Home

Mitsubishi Electronics Mitsubishi Digital Electronics Home Theater Server MELSEC-F User's Manual

1. External power supply wiring 24V Dc d Ls Class D grounding LO LO IC ch O represents the channel number 1 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G FX3U Series PLC can also be used 2 When using a 2 wire temperature sensor type short circuit the LO terminal and the IO terminal For the lead wire use a 100 resistance or less per line 3 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance themometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc K 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring e It is not possible to connect different types of resistance thermometer to 4 channels of PNK ADP Be sure to use the same type of resistance thermometer for all the channels 3 7 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Har
2. P 2nd Analog input xf Saber l Flowmeter i i i European Pressure sensor 7 terminal signal converter H block N etc FT i ES i Analog output FX3u 3A ADP European do terminal Inverter etc T block 3 I Temperature I a 2nd I sensor input adapter Thermocouple I types K and J 2s i i Resistance E European gt 1 terminal thermometer Y I FX3u 4AD TC ADP block sensor Pt1000 83 E FX3u 4AD PNK ADP 1 i i ae 1 EX3u 4AD PT ADP and Ni1090 FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP European Platinum J FX3U 4AD PNK ADP t gt terminal resistance FX3u 4AD PT ADP 222 2 q zs FXau 4AD PTW ADP i ees A thermometer sensor Pt100 E AAA oon ee A S Su oF A 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 3 FX3G Series PLC 3 3 2 Connection of special function blocks FX3G Series o 2 6 0 ie e 0 o Ho 09 Ss N Se O Ko a S oO 2 8 0 Q 17 co je 2 ou AR El and represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition
3. FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM Q jo 3 3 BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference El D Data to be output from channel 1 upon PLC stop Depending on the 3 1 a 32 Valid only if BEM 5 HOOO2 mode used KO Decimal 4 Data to be output from channel 2 upon PLC stop Depending on the KO Decimal B 33 Valid only if BFM 5 HOO20 mode used Subsection as lt gt ig Data to be output from channel 3 upon PLC stop Depending on the KO Daa 5 4 12 SE 34 Valid only if BEM 5 HO200 mode used ES o Data to be output from channel 4 upon PLC stop Depending on the 1 35 Valid only if BEM 5 H2000 mode used Ko Decimal 36 37 Not used C a a y Hexadeci Subsection mn 38 Upper lower limit function setting 2 H0000 mal 54 13 E A gt e a gt 39 Upper lower limit function status H0000 Hexadeci Subsection 5 mal 5 4 14 3 A U 40 Clear of upper lower limit function status 3 H0000 Marea Subsection mal 5 4 15 D 41 Channel 1 lower limit of upper lower limit function K 32640 Decimal n gt x lt 42 Channel 2 lower limit of upper lower limit function Depending on the K 32640 Decimal Subsection 3 43 Channel 3 lower limit of upper lower limit function mode used K 32640 Decimal 5 4 16 3 44 Channel 4 lower limit of upper lower limit function K 32640 Decimal 3 45 Channel 1 upper limi
4. FX3uc Series PLC 1 For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 For a detailed description of analog data reading programs refer to Chapter 4 6 and 7 For a detailed description of seeeee the buffer memory refer to EURO Section 5 3 and Section 5 4 Program e FROM FNC 78 Transmission direction BFM 0 e TO FNC 79 To use FROM TO instruction i or to directly specify the BFM e BFM direct w BFM 6999 refer to Section 5 2 specification UD GOY Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3G FX3U FX3UC User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 4 Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC 2 This function is just available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs B 3 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a aVy NeX3 Ovy ONEXA da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 be day Mld Qyr NeXd Con dav FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting to use the 4AD follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD Refer to Chapter 1
5. LOs LO IO chOl O represents the channel number 1 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc 3 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other PLC equipment PLS equipment PLC equipment l Bo aa Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible J 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data E 2 3 3 4 Programming z ee This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PTW ADP B SE al 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data BE U 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then st
6. Software Version number Remarks H GX Developer Var SwWa P or lat ai er or later SWLIDS5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select FX3U C SWOD5C GPPW E o g gt is TU If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used some instructions and devices cannot be used 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type l 2 FX 30P A Model name Version number Remarks A 5 gt FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later SE a Mld dWy NeXW4 day B 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the 4AD 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored ae 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm 2 E ak 10 times of testing in Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting each direction pe Y resistance 57 150 4 9 and Z axis directions 10 57 0 075 Total 80 min each E 510 40 i Direct Mounting 57 150 9 8 Shock i Mots oe ts A ticana 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Usi
7. i Gain reference value 16000 Gain reference value 16000 10 2V Input voltage 10V 0 i Offset reference value 0 5V 10V Input voltage 1V 3V 5V gt N o Sr E Mo 32000 AS 32640 da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O 3 Determine the offset data var nex4 MI Determine the analog input value offset data for digital output value of 0 Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in pA for the current input mode Example To set the offset value of 1 V set 1 000 mV gt For a detailed description of offset data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 4 Determine the gain data Determine the analog input value so that the digital output value is equal to the gain reference value of each input mode ae varoexa G sav varnex TI The following table shows the gain reference value of each input mode ee Input mode Analog input range Gain standard value Initial value H 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 16000 5000mV a 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 2000 5000mV 2 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 16000 20000uA 5 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 4000 2000014 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 20000nA E 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 200004A ES SSS E A i ki z i 2 Set the analog input value in mV for the voltage input mode and set the analog input value in pA 12 for the current input mode g7
8. Cautions regarding averaging time setting e If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output Ifthe averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 M8000 Normally ON Program Example FNC 12 K1 or s For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 D8264 Sets the averaging time for channel 1 of the 1st analog board to 1 Sets the averaging time for channel 2 of the 1st analog board to 5 D 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the 2AD BD the error status data will be stored in the corresp
9. L Month Example Mar 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2009 Last digit of year A 47 Ssul9 UOWWOJ dvr nexs WW dvr onexs da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI ddv ve nex4 s da Vd1 9 x4 e dav var nexs TI dqy Mu1d dWy NE X4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number Common Items 5 2 Special adapter 5 1 2 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number D8001 PLC type and L Version data Example Ver 1 00 version number PLC type Example 24 FX3u and FX3uc series 26 FX3c series 5 2 Special adapter 5 2 1 Manufacturer s serial number check method 1 Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the left side of the product Example FX3U 4DA ADP manufacture s serial number 960001 MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE Left side MODEL FX3u 4DA ADP DC24V OUT 0 10V SERIAL DE LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ C de MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN Y550D22401B T E Control number Month Example June 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2009 Last digit of year A 48 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User
10. 3 The offset and gain of the FX2N 5A cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct indication mode or analog value mV or uA specification mode 4 The FXon 3A cannot be connected to the FX3G Series PLC A 11 SW9 UOWWOD UJ dvr onex4 da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O dvr nexs var nexs Ml aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Co dav Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products This section shows drawings to describe the configuration of analog units for the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 3 1 FX3u Series PLC 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters FX3u Series Ba RRR B and represent the connecting positions For a detailed installation description refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC a gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Analog input European terminal block Flowmeter e Pressure sensor ij be e Signal converter etc FX3u 4AD ADP FXsu BD Analog output European terminal block e Inverter etc FX3u 4DA ADP Analog input e Flowmeter European terminal block e Pressure sensor
11. Description 1st 2nd M8287 M8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used Sets whether or not input channel OFF Channel is used M9298 M8298 2 is used ON Channel is not used M8289 M8299 Sets whether or not output channel is used POINT When the setting whether or not the output channel is used is changed from Used OFF to Not used ON the last output before the change is held 1 Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs Set whether or not each channel is used in a sequence program 1 To set that input channel 2 in the 1st unit is not used M8001 M8268 Normally OFF H 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 7 Input Data 4 7 Input Data S 5 S Numeric data type Decimal K g The data converted by the 3A ADP will be stored in the special data registers S The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table B e FX3U FX3uc Series PLC aa SS Special auxiliary relay ioe Sie Description ES 1st 2nd 3rd 4th gu D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 input data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 input data C FX3G Series PLC Y S ial ili l p pecial auxiliary relay nen 5 1st 2nd E o D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 input data E D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 input data D x The converted A D immediate d
12. Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends
13. ccecceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeaeeeeeseaaeeesecaeeeeeeneeeeessneeeeaees A 50 6 2 1 Analog control Manuals Messen ener ere ere renerne A 50 6 2 2 Manuals related to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC main Unit ccccccceceececeeaeeeeeseeeees A 50 6 2 3 Manuals of analog Units ieii e dia A 52 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual A 54 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD 4 channel Analog Input FX3uc 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 Outline B 3 ME B 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesneeeeseneeess B 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers cc ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeeseeeeeeeesneetsnaeeees B 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeesneeeseeees B 5 Specifications B 6 2 1 Generic Specification cocinan a A awe a a dida B 6 2 2 Power Supply SpecificatiO0NS ooccoononococoncccnonooooonnnnncnnnnonnonncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nr nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns B 7 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccccceceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeececeecaeeeeecaeeeeeeeaeecesecaeeeeecneeeeeeeeeeesseneeneneeeees B 7 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 ccccccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeseeeeesseneeeeseneees B 8 3 Wiring B 10 3 11 Terminal Layouts
14. SW9 UOWWOJ Inverter etc FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC D A conversion Analog output Voltage or B data special function current I i block special 2 Es it adapter DIE AS he expansion board zo Output the frequency data The frequency will be from the PLC changed depending on the input voltage current To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Analog output products for FX3u Series FX3u 4DA gt For detailed description refer to Section E FX3U 4DA ADP da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O gt For detailed description refer to Section F e FX3U 3A ADP gt For detailed description refer to Section H Analog output products for FX3G Series e FX3G 1DA BD var nexa MI gt For detailed description refer to Section G Other Series Analog output products e FX2NC 4DA e FX2N 2DA e FXon 3A FX2N 4DA e FX2N 5A gt For a detailed description of the other analog output products refer to the corresponding manuals ddv ve nex4 s da Vd1 9 x4 e dav var nexs TI dqy a MId TVt NeXd day A 3 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 1 3 Temperature sensor input control Use the PLC to check the workpiece machine temperature m
15. Specifications check e Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection Refer to Chapter 3 Refer to Chapter 4 Programming If the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version number Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Wiring ePower supply line ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor line Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number g 3 o PT ADP is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production B FX3UC Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 xx SE FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production Res gt O U 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Ite
16. 2 gt a D a a 0 gt 10V 10 2V 0 4mA gt 20mA 20 32mA Analog input Analog input The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC Inst StoR meroa Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O E i 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC points occupied ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 ae day Mld ave nex4 Com day D 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 2 3 A D Conversion Time 2 3 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3G Series PLC Sequence Program END instruction A D conversion start command Digital value A D conversion reading start command Digital value reading conversion 180us 2ch FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 2AD BD 1st 2nd 2 A D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two analog expansion boards are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read ou
17. dvvr onexs aVy NeX3 da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input SEU 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 4AD wiring Observe the following cautions when wiring the 4AD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high vo
18. ec ce ceeceeece cece neces renere ere eee renerne L 9 2 5 Temperature Measurement esserne L 9 3 Wiring L 10 321 Terminal Bayou oia ia arpa ie ELL Saa L 11 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque oooooocccncccccnnncoccccnnnocnnnnnnncnnonnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnno L 12 3 3 Power Supply Line EET ED a a a E eE e e E PAG L 13 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3U Series PLC ooccccooconconoconocononncnocononoconccnnconononnonononoronnrnnnnnanonnnnanonanons L 13 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC ooococcocinncocccncccococccccononononoconcnanonccnncnannncnnnnnannn cnn canannncnncanns L 13 3 4 Selection of the Thermocouple ccccceccccceeeenceeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeeseaaeeeeseeeaeeeeesseeessneeess L 14 34 1 Thermocouple y Peirano ari leidas L 14 3 4 2 Compensating lead Wire oooonicccnnnnnococccccocononccoconcnnonnncnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnn cnn eee renerne eng L 14 325 Wiring of ThermocouUplO spc seek coc 2 dd oo da os anos dde fuen oe L 14 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K W W u u u dssseeeeereer een renen L 14 3 5 2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J ccccccecececeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesecaeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseecaeeeeeees L 15 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring 2 2 3 5 uted cidade is L 15 xo py GOUNA ape et eae tee eee E ee Ee L 15 4 Programming L 16 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data scene nes erne L 16 4 2 List Of Special Devices cccooonooocccnnnccnnnooononononccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
19. 15V 32mA Offset 5V to 5V 12 20mA to 20mA 1 9 Gain 4V to 15V 1 2 16mA to 32mA 13 Digital output With sign 12 bits binary With sign 11 bits binary Resolution 5mV 20Vx1 4000 20uA 40mAx1 2000 a Ambient temperature i R 5 25 5 C Q T Ambient temperature 5 1 0 400pA for 40mA full scale 0 to 55 C ELD oe CON Tor 20V Tull S ale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D conversion Normal conversion mode 15ms x number of selected channels High speed conversion mode 6ms x number of selected channels Input characteristics 2047 3 2000 ia 1 100 ON iS 10V o bake gt 10V O i ti N i S AS 2000 ee 2048 When the input is set from 20 mA to 20 mA 1600 7 4 1000 9 7 rit rte IN 1109 20mA QO rat pl 20mA ti Ses NI Pa T ATRAE 1000 ii 1600 When the input is set from 4 mA to 20 mA 1750 Po 8 55 5 gt 1000 i tic LIE IN ala 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not
20. Controllers 2 User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input D E ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI gt lt Foreword F ev 5 This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD ADP special 5 adapter 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward x it to the end user is 5 gt U This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent Sa licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property a rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION M1d dVb NeX4 dady C 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input C 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 4AD ADP referred to as the 4AD ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4AD ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD ADP to the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC to read 4 channels of voltage current data 1 Up to 4
21. EEY Digital value D A D A conversion conversion Analog data Analog data Inverter DC motor etc 1 Since buffer memory direct specification UL GO can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction programs can be created efficiently This function is supported only in FX3U FX3uc PLCs For a detailed description of buffer memory reading writing refer to Section 5 2 gt For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method To read or write the buffer memory of FX3U 4DA use FROM TO instructions or the buffer memory direct specification function To use the buffer memory direct specification function however it is necessary to adopt the software compatible with the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 1 This function is supported only in FX3u FX3UC PLCs For a detailed description of the software compatible with the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC refer to Section 1 4 E 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification FX3u FX3uc PLC only 9 3 3 When directly specifying the buffer memory specify the following device in the source or destination area of 3 the applied instruction as follows S U LAG E Enter a numeric value in B
22. Manufacturer Model Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Phoenix Contact AI 0 5 8WH 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not meh be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or should be an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 K 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 E E Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PNK ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 5 5 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3u Series PLC L 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC x E gt ENGADE FX3G FX3u ENICADT FX3G FX3u a Series PLC Series PLC ae Main unit Main unit M T 2 Di og SE Terminal Terminal block block Class D 24V DC grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 1002 or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on o
23. Output characteristics N Analog output S gt Analog output 4mA o gt 4000 Digital input Digital input Insulation method e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC A 29 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ dvr onex4 dvr nex4 da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI asvai oexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk dav avi nex4 Co day Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 2 FX2N 2DA FX2N 2DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 2ch eaten pees 4mA to 20mA DC nalog output range i External load 2k to 1MQ External load 4000 or less 4 2 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 Offset OV to 1V 4mA 14 9 If the digital value is 4000 If the digital value is 4000 Stell 5V to 10V 20mA Digital output 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 2 4 A 16mAx1 4000 2 0 1V 0 16mA Overall accuracy Does not include any load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion 4ms x number of selected channels O
24. Output data setting error b2 Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range Analog data will not be correctly output Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range EEPROM error b4 Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office Averaging time setting error b5 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 2 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel 3A ADP hardware error b6 Description of error The 3A ADP is not operating properly Remedy Check that the 3A ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3A ADP communication data error b7 Description of error A communication error is detected between the 3A ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the 3A ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office H 36 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance T
25. Pag Proportional gain s E KP2 7 Kp3 gt KP2 gt KP1 uz KPa E Time S j Proportional gain a KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 5 6 gt Time Example 2 Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Measured value PV Temperature TO Remaining deviation Target value SV ee Time Proportional gain KP3 gt KP2 gt KP1 Output MV Time 3 2 5 Integral time TI S3 4 Setting range 0 to 32767 x 100 ms 0 is handled as co no integration PID operation Integral operation During the integral operation the time after deviation is generated until the integral operation output becomes the proportional operation output This is called integral time and is expressed as TI As TI becomes smaller the integral operation becomes stronger M 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 Pl operation in heating backward operation gt Temperature Output MV Tis a ER ERE NEEDS DEDE Measured value in PI operation X Measured value in proportional operation Th Integral time TI O lt T13 lt T12 lt Tn Time Integral time TI Tis O lt T13 lt Ti2 lt Th N A y e eer Output in PI operation N a Ea a A Wie Tun Output in proportional operation Time Example 2
26. Sets the averaging time to 5 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter 1 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the PT ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data e FX3G Series PLC Special data register Fra Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature meas
27. gt 20mA 0 gt 250 0 250 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input If the input data consists of 9 bits or more only the lower 8 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored Insulation The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC method Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC occupied 1 Combined use of voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Adjustment of the volume offset or gain value will change the resolution 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 38 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 44 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 1 FX3u 4AD PT ADP Ssul9 UOWWOJ UJ FX3U 4AD PT ADP Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F 4ch 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s JIS C 1604 1997 Number of input points dvr 9nex4 dvr nexs Input signal Rated temperature range 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Resolution 0 1 C 0 18 F e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 for full scale Il Overall accuracy e Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 1 0 for full scale FX3u FX3uc Seri
28. o Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check of specifications Specifications e Operation environment Refer to the common e Performance specifications pages e Input characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the analog control common pages Refer to Chapter 3 e Selection of units Wiring Wiring e Power supply line e Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog data reading test program Input mode specification e Input mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Buffer memory e Buffer memory read write method e List of buffer memories Refer to Chapter 6 e Details of buffer memory Buffer memory BFM check Adjustment of input characteristics Adjustment of input characteristics e Input characteristics change procedure Refer to Chapter 7 Program edit Program edit e Basic program e Convenient function program If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting B 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLC and Version Numbers 2 3 o FX3U 4AD is compatible with the following PLC 3
29. special devices yo Ue edo referto Temperature measurement oe 18t adapter M D8260 to M D8269 For a detailed description Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapte M D8270 to M D8279 e program refer to Switching of types between e 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 type K and type J Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the 14 point and 24 point type main unit 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used L 3 dvr nexs A ial U BZ IA OL dVb NEX4 day uononysu did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using TC ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD TC ADP Refer to Chapter 1 e Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check 4 Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications Refer to the common
30. 2 2 Set item Description Occupied points Target value SV The target value SV is set The PID instruction does not change the settings Caution on using the auto tuning limit cycle method If the target value for auto tuning is different from the target value in the PID control it is necessary to set a value to which a bias value is added and then store the actual target value when the auto tuning flag turns OFF Measured value PV This is the input value of the PID operation Parameter 1 2 Auto tuning in the limit cycle Twenty nine devices are occupied from the head device specified in Ss Auto tuning in the step response method a Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are something other than 0 Twenty five devices are occupied from the head device specified in CSs b Operation setting ACT When bits 1 2 and 15 are 0 Twenty devices are occupied from the head device specified in Ss 29 25 20 A Output value MV 1 2 3 PID control normal processing The user sets the initial output value before driving the instruction After that the operation result is stored Auto tuning in the limit cycle method The Upper Limit Value ULV or Lower Limit Value LLV value is automatically output during auto tuning The specified MV value is output when auto tuning is finished Auto tuning in the step response method The user sets
31. D 3 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvr onex4 ddv avr nexs O da dv2 9 x4 var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Ga dav FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the 2AD BD follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3G 2AD BD Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications e Input characteristics Specifications check Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Selection of sensor cable e Analog input line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting D 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1
32. Digital output 0 4mA gt 20mA 20 32mA Analog input Insulation method Number of I O points occupied The analog input area is not insulated from the PLC Channels are not insulated from each other 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC A 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 1 FX3u 4DA ADP Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch Aaaioaioumucrance OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC FOLD g External load 5k to 1MQ External load 5000 or less Offset i Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital input 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4uA 16mAx1 4000 Ambient temperature 25 5 C 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale Ambient temperature 0 to 55 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale Reference Overall accuracy If the external load resistance Rs is less than 5kQ the accuracy increases as shown in the following formula Increase 100 mV per 1 E 47x100 0 9 9 Rs 47 Time required for D A conversion e FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 200us Data updated every scan time FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time
33. Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register If the averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output If the averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 gt For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Sets the averaging time to 32 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter D8
34. The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 var nex4 M 1 Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Normally FNC 12 D8261 D101 PACIEN ON Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101 the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101 asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nex mia gt a d Mld dWy NEXW day J 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the PTW ADP the average
35. W M u sssssssee eee renen ennen renen reen nn nn renerne E 24 5 4 6 BFM 10 to 13 Offset data BFM 14 to 17 Gain data 2 css sneen nen cnn E 25 5 4 7 BFM 19 Data change prohibition of setting CNANGE cc eeeeeceeeseeeeeeeceeneeeeeeeeesneeeeeneeeennaees E 26 5 4 8 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status ssssnseeere nerne E 27 5 4 9 BFM 28 Disconnection detection status only in current output mode eee eeeeeereees E 27 54 10 BEM 29 Error Status oi ic E 28 5 4 11 ES iier as roate iee raea ei ierre iea iae ai e aini raan E 29 5 4 12 BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output upon PLC StOP oooooconccnnnoccccococononancnnnoncnonn cnn nan rc nan nnarnnnnn E 29 5 4 13 BFM 38 Upper lower limit function setting 0 cece ceeeeeeenneeceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeetaeeesneeeenaeeeennaes E 30 5 4 14 BFM 39 Upper lower limit function status oooccononicnnncnonoccccnnonnnnoncnnnnrncc nn nn n nono conan craneo E 31 5 4 15 BFM 40 Clearance of upper lower limit function status oooooociniccccnnninccccccnconccaccncnnnncnncnnnnnns E 31 5 4 16 BFM 41 to 44 Lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 45 to 48 Upper limit values of upper lower limit function ooooooonnincnnnnnnccccccnnnncnnoo E 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5 4 17 BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance only in voltage output mo
36. ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA ae gt a d Mld dWy NEXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC M8002 MAT e DR KE 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 A MOV D8288 K4MO MO Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified M4 range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M2 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified M3 range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M4 EEPROM error in 3rd adapter M5 eee Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter M6 PTW ADP hardware error in 3rd adapter wi PTW ADP communication data error in 3rd adapter 30000000 4 st for the FX3G PLC J 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 3 Program Exampl
37. reference gain value depends on the set input mode 1 Reference offset gain value and initial value set at delivery Offset Gain Input mode BFM 0 Channels 1 to 4 BFM 41 to Channels 1 to 4 BFM 51 to 44 54 Set Ee Reference a Reference AR Description Initial value Initial value value value value Voltage input 0 40V to 10V 32000 to 32000 9 omy ii at Voltage input 1 tov to 10V 4000 to 4000 9 omy 2000 oe Voltage input 0 OmV 5000 5000mV 2 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 impossible impossible impossible impossible 3 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 0 40004A 16000 20000nA Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 0 4000nA 4000 20000A Current input 4000 4000A 20000 20000uA 5 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Current input 2 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 OpA 18000 SALE Current input T 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 9 Opa 4000 da Current input 0 OuA 20000 20000uA 8 Analog value direct indication mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible B 38 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4A
38. 0 Channel number 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure gt For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other ES equipment ae equipment PLC equipment ae ik a ae Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm2 The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible C 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data PO E53E333 2 3 3 4 Programming z ee S This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 4AD ADP B SE Ce 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data RE iw U 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If the data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be y specified E e 3 Special auxiliary relays 10
39. 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 3 2 2 Connection of special function blocks 1 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC Special function block for FX2nNc Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected al Re y FX2nc CNV IF Special function block for FX2NC Special function block for FX3u FX2N and FXoN Al c and D represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition European terminal block Terminal block Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input eThermocouple ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 e For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition e Use the FX3Uc 1PS 5V extension power supply unit if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3uc Series PLC FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for the FX3u FX3U 4AD F
40. 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 o 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 Analog value direct indication mode F Channel not used gt For a detailed description of the standard input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 gt For a detailed description of the input mode BFM 0 refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 1 Analog Input Procedures 3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to read analog signals Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a e While referring to step 2 set the input mode H e While referring to step 1 set the unit number in Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs aVy NeX3 Input mode step 2 Unit number step 1 avvr onexs Initial pulse M8002 i FNC 12 U Specify the input mode BFM 0 for channels MOVE 1 to 4 RUN monitor M8000 D K50 5 seconds after starting the PLC the digital values of channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 to 13 will be read out to DO to D3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Unit number step 1 1 Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G PLCs 4 Sequence program transfer and data register check var nex4 MI 1 Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC 2 The 4AD analog data input mode will be stored in data registers DO to D3 of the PLC 3
41. Check whether the special devices for the PNK ADP are correctly used 1 Input sensor selection Check if the special device for type Pt1000 Ni1000 selection is correctly set Turn off the device to select Pt1000 Turn on the device to select Ni1000 2 Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Averaging time Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected in the PNK ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 K 29 ANd OVt NEXA dav day lt S oLan rm uononysul did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check 5 5 Check the following items for the program Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program Check of storage devices Verify that different values are
42. Ci ae Pp ow MEE ig LIA co T ICAO 1164 190 50 C q l itt 58 F 0 ean So i 250 C E 482 F Qint SRI i 28 Do 500 26 Dan 580 Input A 550 a Aa 670 characteristics Ni1000 Ni1000 150 ss ESS der 2300 ei 1100 2300 4 BEIS BET ee MER 40C 0 LIZ Y 40 F 0 ITT st 110 C x tf a So Sul 230 F I ji o I 1 QO i 400 a i 400 JA FA TI A 450 L 490 e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O 0 points points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC K 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every arithmetic operation of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers A E ele FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 1st Sequence progra
43. FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input B 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD For common descriptions of the FX3U 4AD and FX3UC 4AD these model names are referred to as the 4AD 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4AD is an analog special function block which is connectable with the FX3G FX3u and FX3uc Series PLC used to capture 4 ch voltage current data The FX3uc 4AD cannot be connected to the FX3G FX3U Series PLC 1 Up to 8 1 units can be connected to the FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC including the other special function blocks 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 The A D conversion values will be stored in the 4AD buffer memory BFM 4 Set the digital filter to read out stable A D conversion values 5 For each channel up to 1 700 A D conversion values can be stored as history data Point and section to be Up to 8 units connect to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC including other types of special function blocks eeeee Number of connectable units FX3G FX3u Series PLC So MITSUBISHI Wise eoeggogeerroreoe To check the connectable PLC model number refer to Section 1 3
44. FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions For FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 H2200 Output modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified RUN monitor TO Ww sw UOWWOJ gt M8000 35 D K50 28 25 id FNC 79 SE KO K38 H1122 K1 Upper lower limit function settin gt OH K 3200 Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2 DE K6400 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4 DE K28800 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2 OH K25600 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 DE H0011 Corrective function setting by load resistance DE K5000 Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2 FNC 79 Status automatic transfer function setting 1 Tod KO K60 H0007 K1 The initial setting of destination data registers is used and the sequence program for this function is omitted X000 o H0003 Clearance of upper lower limit function status data X001 FNC 79 KO K29 KO K1 Clearance of error status data TOR X002 o 79 Clearance of disconnection detection status data RUN monitor P M8000 FNC 12 D201 K2Y000 EME FNC 12 D200 K4MO E ARE ag dvz 9 X4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nex4 Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4 Output of upper lower limit error status of channels to Y000 to YOO7 ae varoexa G
45. FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u 4AD PNK ADP 2nd 1st A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 250 us 4ch BE Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected adapters 2 5 Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on ANd OVt NEXA dav day lt S oLan rm UOHONSU did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Thermometer Data Input E 3 Wiring This chapter describes the PNK ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the PNK ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTIO
46. If one of the channels uses the digital filter function set a multiple of 5 1 Sampling cycle As shown in the following table the sampling cycle depends on whether the digital filter function is used Setting range 0 to 30000 Initial value at delivery K15000 Numeric data type Decimal K E RE Value set in Whether digital filter function is used BFM 198 Sampling cycle 0 5 ms x number of selected channels number of 0 A et aie channels using the digital filter function None of the channels use the digital filter function Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected 1 or more channels number of channels using the digital filter function 9 or less 5 ms x number of selected channels number of channels using the digital filter function One or more channels use the digital filter function Set value ms in BFM 198 x number of selected 10 or more channels number of channels using the digital filter function 1 Only multiples of 5 are valid If any value from 10 to 14 is set the sampling cycle will be 10 ms If any value from 15 to 19 is set the sampling cycle will be 15 ms 2 Caution regarding use of data history function If the averaging time is set the data history function cannot be used 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM gt For a detailed description of cau
47. KO Decimal 2 2 2 2 Decimal 1899 Channel 1 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 1900 Channel 2 data history initial value KO Decimal 2 2 2 2 Decimal 3599 Channel 2 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal Subsection 3600 Channel 3 data history initial value KO Decimal 5 4 29 2 2 2 2 Decimal 5299 Channel 3 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 5300 Channel 4 data history initial value KO Decimal 2 2 2 2 Decimal 6999 Channel 4 data history 1 700th value KO Decimal 7000 to 8063 System area 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 2 Use b0 to b3 3 Use bO to b3 and b8 to b11 B 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 Buffer Memory Details Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a 5 4 1 BFM 0 Input mode specification Initial value at delivery H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Specify the input modes of channel 1 to 4 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the input modes of the 4 channels Change the value of each digit to change the input mode of each channel 0 to 8 or F can be set for each digit HOOOO 2 Los The different types of input modes are shown in the following table For a detailed description of input characteristics refer to Section 2 4 avvr onexs dvp nexs da dv2 9 xX
48. Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output If the averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 or K32 D8264 Normally ON FNC 12 K128 D8265 MOV Sets the averaging time to 32 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the averaging time to 128 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter K 22 4 Programming 4 7 Error Status FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Error Status y If an error is detected on PNK ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data 9 register 2 The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3U FX3UC Series PLC L ES Special data register E E Description gt ist 2nd 3rd 4th gt D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data ae FX3G Series PLC M T Special data register a Description aah 1st 2nd Ze Of D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data amp S
49. Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 FNC 12 D8280 D100 E FNC 12 D8281 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction 1 st for the FX3G PLC e For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI RST D8268 6 se D8268 7 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C dav ve nexa oe Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 gt a d Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 FNC 12 D8260 D100 W FNC 12 D8261 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction M1d dVb NeX4 day J 25
50. Transfer the sequence program to change the output characteristics Setting change prohibition Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC After the PLC is started and the output characteristic write command X000 is turned on the offset data and gain data will be written Since the offset data and gain data are stored in the EEPROM incorporated in FX3U 4DA it is pos sible to delete the pre written sequence program Check the analog output signals Check that the output analog signals correspond to the set output data gt If analog signals are not correctly output refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting E 55 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dv Ve neX4 mia dqy a MLld AYY NeX4 dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 Examples of Practical Programs 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation 8 Examples of Practical Programs 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation When you want to use the initial output characteristics but do not need to use the status information you can operate the PLC with a simple program as shown below 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected
51. day Mld ave nex4 Com dady E 45 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 Table Output Function 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 4 Example of transfer of data table The data table below shows the writing of K5000 to BFM 98 and H0001 to BFM 99 Data starting from D5000 is transferred to the buffer memory in the FX3U 4DA PLC main unit Data register Set value D5000 K2 D5001 K3 D5002 KO D5003 K3000 D5004 K18 D5005 H0021 D5006 K8000 D5007 K26 D5008 H0011 D5009 K5000 D5010 K5 D5011 H0011 D5012 Ka Transfer to buffer memory D5013 K1 D5014 K2000 gt D5015 K6 D5016 H0022 D5017 K10000 D5018 K15 D5019 H0002 D5020 K500 D5021 K45 D5022 H0021 D5023 K4000 D5024 K9 D5025 H0012 FX3U 4DA BFM Source data number Servius register 100 K3 D5001 101 KO D5002 102 K3000 D5003 103 K18 D5004 104 H0021 D5005 105 K8000 D5006 106 K26 D5007 107 H0011 D5008 108 K5000 D5009 109 K5 D5010 110 H0011 D5011 400 K4 D5012 401 K1 D5013 402 K2000 D5014 403 K6 D5015 404 H0022 D5016 405 K10000 D5017 406 K15 D5018 407 H0002 D5019 408 K500 D5020 409 K45 D5021 410 H0021 D5022 411 K4000 D5023 412 K9 D5024 413 H0012 D5025 E 46 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual An
52. e FX3U FX3UC Series PLC E R Read W Write x 7 y Device number hate Special device Description Attribute Reference gt 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W Seconds ection 4 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W F M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode R W Section 4 4 x M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Special auxiliary M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 Unused Do not use F relay M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 3 M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of output holding function R W Section 4 5 G M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used R W M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298 Sets whether or not input channel 2 is used R W Section 4 6 a M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Sets whether or not output channel is used R W 9 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 input data R i 3 Section 4 7 D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data R D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data R W Section 4 8 D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Unused Do not use x i D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting range 1 RW gt Special data to 4095 3 register A ma lime for ch L2 Setti T Section 4 9 5 D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel Setting range R W to 4095 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Unused Do not use wl D8267
53. na E 4 2 HI n Ts KD TD ig i are Ts KD TD dd MVn ZAMV Ts AMV KP EVn EVn 1 E EVn Dn l Backward EVn SV PVnf operation ON _ TD Kp TD Dn TS KoA 2PVnf 1 PVnf PVnt 2 TS Ko To Dn 1 MVn AMV 1 Symbols EVn Deviation in sampling at this time Dn Differential term at this time EVn 1 Deviation in previous cycle Dn 1 Differential term in previous cycle SV Target value KP Proportional gain PVnf Measured value in sampling at this time after filter Ts Sampling cycle PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter TI Integral constant PVnf 2 Measured value in two cycles before after filter TD Differential constant AMV Output variation KD _ Differential gain MVn Operation quantity at this time 2 Expression for calculating the measured value after the filter in sampling at this time PVnf The value PVnf is obtained from the following expression based on the read measured value Measured value after filter PVnf PVn L PVnf 1 PVn PVn Measured value in sampling at this time L Filter coefficient PVnf 1 Measured value in previous cycle after filter M 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 How to Use PID Instruction PID Instruction FNC 88 2 1 Explanation of function and operation K 2 How to Use PID Instruction E 1 Instruction format 16 bit Operation Condition 32 bit Operation Condition Instruction Instru
54. nexa FT gt oS d 88 ONS oLdvry UOHONN SU ld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 3 Parameter 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 Set item Setting Remarks Reference Input variation incremental It is valid when operation direction 1 0 to 32767 20 alarm set value ACT bit 1 of 1 is 1 Input variation decremental It is valid when operation direction 1 0 to 32767 Gs 21 alarm set value ACT bit 1 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction Output variation tS ea lie tetental alarm set value 0140 32767 ACT bit 2 of tissa vi or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 S3 Fee It is valid when operation direction Subsection Output upper limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 3 2 2 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 It is valid when operation direction Output variation i De So RER ER ED alarm set value 01032767 ACT DIES OF Ais 4 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 0 S3 123 It is valid when operation direction Output lower limit set value 32768 to 32767 ACT bit 2 of 1 is 0 or ACT bit 5 of 1 is 1 0 Input variation incremental is not Itis valid when operation direction bitd exceeded i i 1 Input variation incremental is ACT bit 1 or bit 2 of 1 is exceeded 1 0 Input variation decremental is bit not exceeded 1 Input variation decremental is A exceeded Subsection S33 1 A
55. x4 J ddv dvr nexs O var nex4 MI Special devices Special auxiliary relays PT I M8260 to M8269 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary 78 M8270 to M8279 AID St Ct Special data registers mn Ht _ i Special auxiliary relays Sequence program AID M8280 to M8289 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Om A Special auxiliary relays i M8290 to M8299 awo lspeciadataregisters The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CF card special adapter ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOv VE NeX4 mia id dVb Nex4 day a Mld QAYY NEX4 dady l 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data FX3G Series PLC Communi FX3U 4AD Eee FX3u 4AD Connector PT ADP adapter PT ADP adapter FX3G Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays i M8290 to M8299 ao AA TT speciai data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as
56. 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 Terminal Crimp or less screw terminal 6 3 mm 0 25 or more 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 Terminal or less or more E 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals 3 3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals S 3 3 1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit Z Below are examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G FX3U Series PLC B 1 Sink input common wiring xx SE ES AC power om 100 to 240 V Class D grounding as FX3G FX3U Series PLC main unit da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the 24V terminal vdr nex4 2 Source input common wiring AC power 100 to 240 V asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI FX3G FX3U Series PLC main unit 15V H FX3U 4DA x Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the OV terminal g U 3 3 2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals x e Ground the terminal and terminal to the Class D grounding line 100 or less together E with the ground terminal of the main unit 5 y For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the g7 connected PLC a Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edit
57. 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog output using the 1DA BD follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3G 1DA BD Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications Refer to the common e Output characteristics pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting G 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 2 3 o The 1DA BD is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 10 or later After October 2008 initial production
58. 1 channel analog output 3 5 Grounding 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt avvr onexs Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment i SE p Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs dqy a MLd V NEX4 day H 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 1 Loading Writing of Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter explains how to create programs for inputting and outputting analog data using the 3A ADP Loading Writing of Conversion Data Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the speci
59. 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 2 504 A 40mAx1 16000 2 004A 16mAx1 8000 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 3 120uA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D conversion 500us x number of selected channels Input characteristics When the input mode is set to 0 16320 42555552 1 16000 f i gt i tN NE 10V 0 Dd gt 10V Nf gi PAN 16000 AS 16320 When the input mode is set to 6 8160 9 7 s 8000 te Pte roast tS 1 tN 20mA 0 cae lt i 20mA Eri tii Oi Vii N 8000 Approx 8160 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain shoul
60. 32000 fis JA i 1S try 10V 0 ul i i 10V Di I Ni S i a 32000 pu ARPA 32640 When the input mode is set to 6 16320 16000 20 4mA 20mA 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels A 25 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ OVy INEX dvr nexs da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Co day Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4
61. 6 Transfer the sequence program to change the input characteristics Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC Start the PLC and turn on the command X000 to write the input characteristics In approx 5 sec onds the offset data and the gain data will be written Since the offset data and the gain data are stored in the 4AD EEPROM it is possible to delete the sequence program T Read out the analog data to check the data Create the following program to check the stored data For FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs RUN monitor The digital values set for oe FNC 16 U0IG10 Ka channels 1 to 4 will be read BMOV out to DO to D3 gt If data is not stored properly refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting B 52 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging Time Examples of Practical Programs 7 Use the functions incorporated in the 4AD to create practical programs This chapter describes the examples of practical programs Program that uses the averaging time Program that uses convenient functions Program that uses the data history function Program that initializes 4AD to the factory default status Program That Uses Averaging Time This section describes a program that uses the analog data averaging time input to the 4AD or the digital filter function of the 4AD 1 Conditions The sequ
62. Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 4 D A Conversion Time 2 4 D A Conversion Time 2 4 1 This section describes the D A conversion time When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 D A conversion and special data register update timing D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of the END instruction the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers performs D A conversion of the data and updates the analog output data eer Ene FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program Digital value writing D A conversion start command END instruction D A Digital value writing ide D A conversion 200us 4ch start command 2 D A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D A conversion and then output in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter D A conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the output setting digital dat
63. B xx ee res 1 Version check go Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 1DA BD of the FX3G da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Series PLC 1 GX Developer E Software Version number Remarks x GX Developer E e SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible gt lt 2 FX 30P E P U FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later da Vd1 9 Xx4 dQv VE NeX4 mia dqy a MId TVw NeXd day G 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for 1DA BD 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications
64. Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 range or disconnection is detected Averaging time setting error The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 range or disconnection is detected PNK ADP hardware error The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 range or disconnection is detected PNK ADP communication data error The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a PNK ADP hardware error b6 or PNK ADP communication data error b7 is once detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error 1 1st for the FX3G PLC K 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programmin
65. Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later from first product FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later xx SE FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later from first product Res gt O U FX3UC 4AD is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product da dv2 9 x4 Oo ddv avr nexs O gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 var nex4 MI 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use a programming tool with the following version number to create 4AD programs for the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 GX Developer 1 FX3u 4AD Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 4 SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting the model select FX3G asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI 2 FX3uc 4AD
66. D8277 D8287 D8297 D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status RIW Section 4 10 gt D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 50 R Section 4 11 3 3 U x K gt Y gt u E H 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 Programming 4 3 Switching of Input Mode FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write 3 p Device number ER 5 Special device Description Attribute Reference ist 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W Section 4 3 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode R W Section 4 4 M8283 M8293 Special auxiliary M8284 M8294 Unused Do not use relay M8285 M8295 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of output holding function R W Section 4 5 M8287 M8297 Sets whether or not the input channel 1 is used R W M8288 M8298 Sets whether or not the input channel 2 is used R W Section 4 6 M8289 M8299 Sets whether or not the output channel is used R W D8280 D8290 Channel 1 input data R Section 4 7 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data R D8282 D8292 Output setting data R W Section 4 8 D8283 D8293 Unused Do not use i D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting range 1 RIW Special data to 4095 register A ing time for channel 2 Setti 1 ni D8285 D8295 veraging time for channel 2 Setting ran
67. Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 3 STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS DANGER Do not touch any terminal while the PLC s power is on Doing so may cause electrical shock or malfunctions Before cleaning or retightening terminals cut off all phases of the power supply externally Failure to do so may cause electric shock Before modifying or disrupting the program in operation or running the PLC carefully read through this manual and the associated manuals and ensure the safety of the operation An operation error may damage the machinery or cause accidents Do not change the program in the PLC from two or more peripheral equipment devices at the same time i e from a programming tool and a GOT Doing so may cause destruction or malfunction of the PLC program CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the PLC Doing so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions For repair contact your local Mitsubishi Electric distributor Turn off the power to the PLC before connecting or disconnecting any extension cable Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Turn of the power to the PLC before attaching or detaching the peripheral devices expansion boards special adapters and extension blocks Failure to do so may cause equipment f
68. FX2N 2AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch OV to 5V DC Analog input range OV to 10V DC es oe Input resistance 200 kQ i Absolute maximum input 0 5V 15V 2mA 60mA Offset If the digital value is 0 0V to 1V 2 8 If the digital value is 0 OmA to 4mA 29 Gain lf the digital value is 4000 5V to 10V 273 If the digital value is 4000 20mA 29 Digital output 12 bits binary Resolution 25 5 C Ambient temperature 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 2 4 00A 16mAx1 4000 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Ambient temperature 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale Time required for A D conversion Operation synchronized 2 5ms x number of selected channels with sequence program Input characteristics Digital output 0 gt 10V Analog input Digital input 20 380mA 0 4mA gt 20mA Analog input Insulation method Channels are not insulated from each other e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2AD combined use of the voltage and current inputs is not possible 2 Use the adjustment volume to adjust FX2N 2AD 3 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 22 FX3G FX
69. Of COM1 E sp ol V2 D p old 12 Channel 2 analog input 5 COM2 3 sf olL vo a el Ol 10 Analog output 5 3 Oj COM S Ol i oll a Do nat connect any lines var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs dqy Mld TVt NEX4 dady H 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown below 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening eee E a Termination single wire torque Scene 0 3mm to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable 9 AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection 3 To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection p P 0 22N mto Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 9 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25Nem recommended terminal with abe oS d inal Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation er 3 t E e FARE Caulking tool sleeve ene VIEW SNOWN e CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact following figure 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod te
70. S fa o 2 n D o o c 5 oO le 2 c E n c is 2 x o D o c o o 2 2 FX FX3G CNV ADP and El represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC gt Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition A st adapter Y lr FX3u 4AD ADP R ist J adapter ba FX3u 4DA ADP a st adapter EL FX3u 3A ADP European terminal block 1st adapter FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PTW ADP European terminal block European terminal block European terminal block European terminal block European terminal block Analog input Flowmeter Pressure sensor Signal converter etc Analog output Inverter etc Analog input Flowmeter Pressure sensor Signal converter etc Analog output Inverter etc Analog input Flowmeter Pressure sensor Signal converter etc Analog output Inverter etc Temperature sensor input Thermocouple types K and J Resistance thermometer sensor Pt1000 and Ni1000 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 A 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Config
71. The analog expansion board connected to the option connector 1 is regarded as the 1st unit and the U analog expansion board connected to the option connector 2 is regarded as the 2nd unit 1 The second analog expansion board is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type da Vd1 9 Xx4 dQv VE NeX4 mia dqy a Mld QAYY NEX4 day G 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 4 Programming 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If 1DA BD is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Special Device number pecia ee f devica 1st 2nd Description Attribute Reference board board M8260 M8270 Switches the output mode R W n M8261 to M8271 to Special M8263 M8273 Unused Do not use n S h of output holdi Secti relay M8264 M8274 ets t e cancel of output holding R W ection function 4 4 M8265 to M8275 to M8269 M8279 Unused Do not use z D8260 D8270 Output setting data R W o y D8261 to D8271 to Special D8267 D8277 Unused Do not use data SE register D8268 D8278 Error status R W A 5 D8269 D8279 Model code 4 R s 4 3 Switching of Output Mode Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the output mode of 1DA BD between the current output mode and the volta
72. altitude OO 1 The criterion is shown in 1EC61131 2 2 If 4DA ADP is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC direct installation is not possible PLC Other Other Other equipment PLC equipment PLC equipment 1 Independent grounding Best condition I eae Shared grounding Good condition Common grounding Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 4 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 4DA ADP The 4DA ADP may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications D A conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 150mA driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power line to the terminal block UY 5V DC 15mA SE Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series it is not 56 necessary to supply the power Performance Specifications F 7 Ww sw UOWWOD gt da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Analog output OV to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC range External load 5kQ to 1MQ External load 500 or less Digital input 12 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10V 400
73. and Fahrenheit Compatible with thermocouple types K and J The product can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit SW9 UOWWOJ u ag dyz X4 J ddv avr nexs O dav ve nex mk dady ayr NEXd dvr nex4 avir nex4 Co dady Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models 2 2 3 Special function block No of g Refer Type are Range Resolution Function GER Voltage current input Voltage 0 32mV Combined use of voltage and 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits current inputs is possible The FX3U 4AD 4ch offset gain can be adjusted 3 B Ea 20MA DC aus 45 bi The sampling function is 20mA to m with sign its incorporated Voltage 0 32mV Combined use of voltage and 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits current inputs is possible The 2 4ch ffset gai be adjusted 3 B as Curent ET o 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits incorporated Voltage 0 32mV Combined use of voltage and 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits current inputs is possible EXONC 4AD2 Ach The offset gain can be 5 i Current 1 254A adjusted 3 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits The sampling function is incorporated Voltage 0 63mV Combined use of voltage 10V to 10V DC with sign 15 bits current and thermocouple is ible The offset gain can
74. dav varnexs TI FNC 12 D202 K4M20 RANES Mea 7010 Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4 x M23 Output to YO10 ES ba 6 MO U Error detected Output to Y011 x 1 The output mode setting setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX3u 4DA For this reason even if the gt sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 53 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each ki setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is used it is not necessary to J set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 z E gt 2 gt I E E 59 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation This section describes a practical program that uses the table output function 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Output mode Channel 1 should be set to mode 0 voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channel 3 should be set to mode 2 current output 0 mA to 20
75. for the channels 8 Table output function setting error b8 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the table output function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the setting value of the table output function 9 Status automatic transfer setting error b9 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the status automatic transfer function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the setting values in the automatic transfer destination data register specification field BFM 61 to 63 10 Over scale b10 1 Description of error This bit will turn on when analog output is out of the specified range 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 setting value and the values in the output data BFM 1 to 4 11 Disconnection detection b11 1 Description of error The bit is turned on when a cable is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that no cables are disconnected or have contact failure 12 Setting data change prohibited b12 1 Description of error The bit will turn on while the setting change is prohibited 2 Remedy To change any setting set BFM 19 to K3030 FX3U 4DA Initialization and Test Program If the above mentioned remedies cannot solve the problem initialize FX3U 4DA and then check the conditions of the FX3U 4DA using the test program gt For a detailed description of FX3u 4DA initialization program refer to Subsecti
76. i E Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W ral 36 ella M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 t rela O Q O 9 d M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use C D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature R z measurement data 2 E D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature R 5 measurement data Section 3 4 4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 CPannel 3 temperature R measurement data D D8263 D8273 D8283 08293 Channel 4 temperature R y measurement data amp Averaging time for channel 1 gt a D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W p ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W Basin E Averaging time for channel 3 4 5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W 3 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 AVeraging time for channel 4 R W 3 Setting range 1 to 4095 D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W pri D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 21 R SER asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 mia gt a d Mld dWy NEXW day J 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write Device number Special device Description Att
77. i E i S i o i od E o N ao El I I oa Oo i N 2 Q eg re is 3 S N N oa o a re ra da es LEd E afefe Ea chO U represents the channel number 1 For FX3G FX3U Series PLC AC power type the 24V DC service power supply is also available 2 The FG terminal and the amp terminal are connected internally There is no FG terminal for ch1 When using ch1 connect directly to the terminal 3 Use a 2 core twisted shield wire for analog input line and separate it from other power lines or inductive lines 4 For the current input short circuit the V terminal and the I terminal 5 If there is voltage ripple in the input voltage or there is noise in the external wiring connect a capacitor of approximately 0 1 to 0 47uF 25 V FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 5 Grounding 3 4 2 FX3uc 4AD If current input is selected Terminal Fas Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a FX3UC 4AD 1 avvr onexs aVy NeX3 Class D L grounding 7 ag dyz 9 X4 J ddv avr nexs O VO I chO U represents the channel number var nex4 M 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the ana
78. i To connect the special adapters By or the connector conversion 1 adapter E refer to the previous page Analog input e Flowmeter e Pressure sensor e Signal converter Terminal block me Analog output Special function e Inverter etc block for FX3U and FX2N Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC FX Series Type Analog special function blocks for the FX3U FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA Analog special function blocks for the FX2N FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC A 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 1 Analog Input 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications SW9 UOWWOJ The analog product performance specifications are shown in the following tables Select the optimal product for your equipment 4 1 Analog Input CVi INEXd dvr nexs 4 1 1 FX3u 4AD ADP C m FX3U 4AD ADP E Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch 3 NEDE ERE OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC D na oginpui range In
79. iw 2 A D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated E gt lt 3 If two analog special adapters are connected E During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of a 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected analog adapters ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3U FX3UC Series PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input E 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 4AD ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the 4AD ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally D
80. register specified in BFM 63 Only when wire break is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened gt For a detailed description of the disconnection detection status BFM 28 refer to Subsection 5 4 9 1 If BFM 63 K202 initial value Specified data register D202 Value of disconnection detection status BFM 28 Description 2 Cautions regarding disconnection detection status automatic transfer function setting e If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register This function is valid by turning on b2 of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on The data set in BFM 63 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM 5 4 22 BFM 80 to 3098 Table output function Related BFM BFM 80 start st
81. to execute the table output function Set the output patterns for the channels BFM 81 to 84 initial value K1 Set the output patterns for the channels in BFM 81 to 84 The output pattern can be changed in the middle of outputting the table Setting range for BFM 81 to 84 1 to 10 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K31 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K81 to K84 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Set the number of table outputs for the channels BFM 85 to 88 initial value KO Set the number of table outputs for the channels in BFM 85 to 88 The number of outputs can be changed even during outputting the table Setting range for BFM 85 to 88 0 to 32767 When 0 is set output of the table will be repeated until the table output is stopped by BFM 80 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K32 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K85 to K88 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Table output start stop BFM 80 initial value H0000 Table output is started and stopped by setting BFM 80 as shown below HOOOO med Lem Set value Description 0 The table output function of each channel is stopped The tabl
82. 0 When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 E mo 3 rot 20MA 73 E Pa y 7 5 IA Ji Output characteristics 2000 0 i 33 J i 1 25 4 ae 7 29 y y i 4 ig i 4mA i i2 y 10V j o 1000 Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Insulation method e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Ga dav Mld A 33 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 6 FX3G 1DA BD Specifications FX3G 1DA BD Voltage output Current output Number of output points Analog output range 1ch OV to 10V DC External load 2k to 1MQ 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5002 or less Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital input 12 bits binary 11 bits binary Resoluti
83. 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value Numeric data type Decimal K The minimum channel data channels 1 to 4 value written to BFM 10 to 13 will be written to BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value and the maximum channel data value will be written to BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak value Caution regarding peak value To use the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value be sure to turn on the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 Note e Ifthe data addition function bO of BFM 22 is used together with this function the addition data will be added to the measurement data e Ifthe value holding function is not used the peak value will be KO Peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value and the maximum peak value will be automatically written to the specified data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified When the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer to data register specification Vali A BFM 125 KL SNe elle Trane o
84. 1MQ When the load Res resistance is 30 kQ or less 1 kQ to 30 kQ the deviation of the output characteristics can be corrected by ge specifying the output corrective function BFM 50 and the load resistance values BFM 51 to 54 Analog value The deviation of output characteristics is corrected by the corrective function by load TO A resistance e e eS e PS e e PS AS le 32000 Digital value Po e e PS eS eS eS PS e e e Lo et e e Po Output characteristics after correction da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O ini 10V Output characteristics before correction vdr nexs 1 Setting of output corrective function BFM 50 The corrective function by load resistance is valid or invalid by writing a 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO in the output corrective function setting BFM 50 HOOOO oa hon Set value Description 0 Corrective function by load resistance is invalid 1 Corrective function by load resistance is valid ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Other than aboye Invalid setting values unchanged values 2 Setting range and initial value of load resistance BFM 51 to 54 H Set the load resistance value for each channel allocated to the following BFM a g BRN Description Setting range Q Initial value Q number P g g U 51 Load resistance value for channel 1 52 Load resistance value for channel 2 1000
85. 21 42 2 Auto tuming Procedure distan icicia grata e a ad M 21 4 2 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response method M 22 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning EXeCuUtiON oooococonoccccnonococononccnnnnnnccnnonnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnninans M 22 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method M 23 5 1 Example System and operation ccccccccceceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeesecaeeeeeeeeeeeessueeeeeeeess M 23 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control M 24 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response mMethod cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees M 26 6 Troubleshooting M 28 6 1 Error Codes 2 20 00 a a Sen ede ened Iii M 28 Warranty RES SEERE SBS DSE FRE subauednectenctcue codec cedetsiadegvesetdasanssustsatueleaedescausedateaiussecess i Revised Hist AVLE EEN Er rr eve ii 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents MEMO 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 Introduction SW9 UOWWOJ This manual describes the analog products for the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC This chapter describes the analog control methods and applications 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control dvv onexs dvr nexs For the FX Series
86. 3 o 5 gt 3 a BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Ho Input mode setting for channels 1 to 4 2 H0000 at delivery Sanaa eae ae 1 Not used a i S 2 Averaging time units for channel 1 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal 3 Averaging time units for channel 2 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal Subsection C 4 Averaging time units for channel 3 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal 5 4 2 s 5 Averaging time units for channel 4 1 to 4095 K1 Decimal ES 6 Channel 1 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal 5 7 Channel 2 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal Subsection 3 8 Channel 3 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal 5 4 3 9 Channel 4 digital filter setting 0 to 1600 KO Decimal D 10 Channel 1 data current data or average data Decimal x 11 Channel 2 data current data or average data Decimal Subsection e 12 Channel 3 data current data or average data Decimal 5 4 4 is 13 Channel 4 data current data or average data Decimal 14 to 18 Not used E E B Data change disable Disables adjustment of the following buffer memory locations Input mode specification BFM 0 Initialization function BFM 20 Input characteristics writing BFM 21 var nex4 MI To enable data change K2080 Subsection 4 Big Convenient functions BFM 22 ee ee IN 5 4 5 F e Offset data BFM 41 to 44 other md K2080
87. 4 2AD BD hardware error b6 1 Description of error The 2AD BD is not operating properly 2 Remedy Check that the 2AD BD is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office D 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 6 6 Error Status Check 5 2AD BD communication data error b7 1 Description of error A communication error is detected between the 2AD BD and the PLC 2 Remedy Check that the 2AD BD is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office D 23 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs ddv avr nexs O da dv2 9 x4 var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy M1d dVb NeX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 6 6 Error Status Check MEMO D 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvv onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs asvar oexa G dav
88. 4000A T6000 12000 S Current output Analog value pA 0 OuA 10000 100004A 4 specification mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 0 mA to 20 mA 0 to 20000 impossible impossible impossible impossible 2 Offset gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the output characteristics The offset and gain data can be set for each channel If the voltage output mode is set write the offset and gain data in mV If the current output mode is set write the offset and gain data in yA To change the offset or gain data execute the offset gain setting value write command BFM 9 The setting range is shown in the following table Voltage output mV Current output uA ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Offset data 10000 to 9000 0 to 17000 Gain data 9000 to 10000 3000 to 30000 H a 1 The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions Z 1000 lt Gain value Offset value lt 10000 gt 2 The offset and gain values should meet the following conditions 3 3000 lt Gain value Offset value lt 30000 a gt lt E 2 El TU a Mld dWy NeXW4 day E 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 7 3 Cautions regarding offset gain data change If the analog value specification mode mode 1 or 4 is used the offset gain cannot be chang
89. 4mA to 20mA output Q Ambient temperature 0 5 100pA for 20mA full scale oO O 0 to 55 C 20 3 100MV for 20V full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Reference Includes corrective function by load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value Output characteristics Insulation method When the output mode is set to 0 32640 When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 3 0 32000 Digital input e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the analog value specification mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 10V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA 4 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution A 31 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O avr onex4 dvr nexs var nex4 MI asvai oexa G davvar nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk d
90. 5 Temperature Measurement 3 E The temperature data input in the TC ADP will be stored in the special data registers i 2 The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table 62 FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register wee gt Description amp 1st 2nd 3rd 4th amp D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data 3 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data M D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data 3 FX3G Series PLC ae 26 Of gs Special data register Pp amp Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data gt For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 1 Caution regarding temperature measurement The temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monito
91. 5V DC 110mA CPU drive power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply power externally FX3uc 4AD Item Specifications A D conversion 24V DC 10 80mA circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the power connector 5V DC 100mA ream power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Item Voltage input Current input Aral input range 10V to 10V DC 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC g mp g Input resistance 200kQ Input resistance 250Q Offset 10V to 9V 2 20mA to 17mA Gain 9V to 10V 17mA to 30mA Absolute maximum HSV 30mA input Digital output With sign 16bits binary With sign 15bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20V x 1 64 000 1 25uA 40mA x 1 32 000 esolution 2 5mV 20V x 1 8000 5 00uA 40mA x 1 8000 e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale overall secu 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale Same accuracy 200A for 4mA to 20mA input y Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C e Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 400pA for 40mV full scale Same accuracy 400A for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for 500us x number of selected channels A D conversion If 1 or more channels use the digital fi
92. 8 Examples of Practical Programs E 56 8 1 Example of Program for Analog Output Operation Regular Operation cseeeeeeees E 56 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions ccccccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeseneeeeeseneeeessnnees E 57 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation E 60 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default ccececeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeseeeees E 63 9 Troubleshooting E 64 9 1 PLC Version Number Check secs seende E 64 9 2 Wiring CHECK a e Arr DEERE esac eel eal sae ee ae ae he el ite ee E 64 3 Program Check 242 2 o ee a eee KEE ALLE E 64 9 4 Error Status Cheek re so tr tes couch rai E 65 9 5 FX3U 4DA Initialization and Test PrograM ooooooocccccncononcnococoncconannnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns E 66 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 Outline F 3 14 Outlineof FUNCIONS 00 A ae ohne ae does aldo Aes F 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccccceceeeccceseeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeneeeeeteteeeeteaees F 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 22 ccceeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeececeeeeeeeceaeeeesenaeeeeseneeeeeeaees F 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ccccccccessssceeeeeesssssseeeeeeeeessssesaeeeeeeesseeeeeeess F 5 2 Specificati
93. A 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO is allocated as shown below Invalid e Looutput updating time unit Invalid Point to point interpolation method Setting of output update time unit Set value Output update time unit 0 10 ms 1 100 ms 2 1s 3 1 min Other than above mee Invalid values Interpolation method Data output between points are interpolated every 1 ms and automatically updated Set value Interpolation method 0 No interpolation Output data is held to the next point Linear interpolation Data output between points are d interpolated in the shape of a straight line S shaped interpolation Data output between points are 2 interpolated in the shape of an S shaped as shown below Other than above Invalid values S shaped interpolation Output data D 8 Point n 1 Time T When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on E 41 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt davvr onexs da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa dqy a MLd AYt NeX4 dav FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 Table Output Function 6 2 Prepar
94. A D conversion reads out the A D converted data B and then writes the data in the special data registers ma lt gt ie e e ee FX3G Series PLC sg ES ge Sequence program A D conversion start command Digital value reading ia A D conversion start END instruction command Pf Digital value reading R 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 3 If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter var nex4 MI 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected adapters 2 5 Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dOv VE NeX4 mia 1d QYp NEX4 day a M1d dVb N X4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input E 3 Wiring This chapter describes the PT ADP wiring Observe the fol
95. AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection i gt To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection Bad P 2 0 22 Nem to e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve a oa i 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal Sonna AWG22 to 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact with Refer to the rod terminal i insulation t vi h i e Caulking tool sle vye ne pi ct en CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact e following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable ends To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude Do not solder plate the end of the cable Termination of cable end berer E AAA 9mm 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer Model Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area Caulking tool Phoenix Contact 3 Tool Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 To tighten terminals use a small sized scre
96. Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm a a i 10 times of testing in Vibration DIN Rail Mounting each direction X Y resistance 57 150 4 9 and Z axis directions 10 to 57 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Shock resistance 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1s Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less Grounding i i i 9 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 3 altitude lt 2000m 14 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 12 Other Other Other PUG equipment PLE equipment PE equipment Le oo Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use 1DA BD The 1DA BD may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Ana
97. Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 6 BFM 10 to 13 Offset data BFM 14 to 17 Gain data 9 3 3 Setting range See below 3 Initial value See below 3 Numeric data type Decimal K If the output mode is specified in BEM 0 the initial value of the offset data and gain data of each channel will B be automatically stored S25 The initial offset data and the gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table SE 2U U e Offset data Analog output value when the output data in BFM 1 to 4 are 0 reference offset value Gain data Analog output value when the output data in BFM 1 to 4 are the reference gain values The reference gain value depends on the set output mode C 1 Reference offset gain value and initial value set 3 Offset channels 1 to 4 Gain channels 1 to 4 5 Sutpulmede BF me 0 BFM 10 to 13 BFM 14 to 17 Referen Referen ES Set value Description IS Initial value ens Initial value value value D g Voltage output 0 OmV 16000 5000mV x 10 V to 10 V 32000 to 32000 Voltage output Analog value mV 0 OmV 5000 5000mV 1 specification mode Data change Data change Data change Data change 10 V to 10 V 10000 to 10000 impossible impossible impossible impossible Current output 2 O mA to 20 mA 0 to 32000 0 gA 16090 10099 gt Current output 3 4 mA to 20 mA 0 to 32000 0
98. Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications 2 1 This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for 4DA ADP Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o 3 i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm 2 E ak 10 times of testing in Vibration Din Rail Mounting i each direction X5 Yz resistance 57 150 4 9 E and Z axis directions i 10 to 57 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 Shock a 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less Grounding f x lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 3 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 4
99. BFM 62 K201 initial value Specified data register D201 Value of upper lower limit function status BFM 39 Description Cautions regarding upper lower limit function status automatic transfer function setting e If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e This function is valid by turning on b1 of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on The data set in BFM 62 will be retained in the EEPROM Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 When creating a program therefore do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM E 36 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 21 BFM 63 Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value K202 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the disconnection detection status data BFM 28 to the data
100. C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To switch the temperature unit to To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C for the 1st adapter Farenheit F for the 2nd adapter M8001 8000 18260 Normally OFF Normally ON L 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 4 Selection of Type K or J 44 Selection of Type K or J Turn on the J type or off the K type selection special auxiliary relay to select the thermocouple type J or K for TC ADP The thermocouple type will be selected for all the channels at the same time To select the thermocouple type use the following special auxiliary relays e FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay TA Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of type K or J M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF Type K ON Type J FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay r Description 1st 2nd Selection of type K or J M8281 M8291 OFF Type K ON Type J 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To select thermocouple type K for the 2 To select thermocouple type J for the 1st adapter 2nd adapter M8001 E M8000 1827 Normally OFF Normally ON L 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 5 Temperature Measurement 4
101. Check that the data is stored in DO to D3 gt If the data is not properly stored refer to Chapter 8 Troubleshooting asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia dav ae Mld dWy NeXW4 dady B 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 5 Buffer Memory BFM This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in 4AD 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 1 Assignment of unit numbers Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left When the units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned When connected to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC D DSS Series PLC Unit Unit Unit number 0 number 1 number 2 Input output extension a Input output Special Special extension Special block function block function block block function unit When connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Unit number 0 Incorporated Unit Unit Unit CC Link LT number 1 number 2 number 3 Input output Main unit Input output extension FXsuc 32MT extension Special Special Special LT 2 block function block function block block function unit B 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4
102. DS do not have a power connector and receive power from the input connector var nex4 M 3 3 3 Cautions regarding connection of power cables e Ground the terminal and terminal to the Class D grounding line 100 or less together with the ground terminal of the main unit To perform crossover wiring to connect the power line from FX3UC 4AD to a succeeding extension block remove the resin cover from the power crossover connector using nippers e For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the connected PLC Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA de day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day B 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 4 Analog Input Line 3 4 Analog Input Line The analog input type voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel 3 4 1 FX3u 4AD External power supply FX3U 4AD wiring 15V 24VDC FE ey 4 N N IH R D Sj Class D grounding If current input is selected 3 ch 6 8kQ PRES SEES ASMA ZE a 1000 Nel GEG fi i iM man ne a oa i 90 1 os H 23
103. END instruction A D command conversion 200us 4ch Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC STOP Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter A D conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected analog adapters C 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 9 5 S 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing g A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC o During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data B and then writes the data in the special data registers mama SS FX3U 4AD ADP FX3u 4AD ADP FX3c Series PLC SE 2nd ist Le 56 U Sequence program A D conversion start T A D command ES igi i 0 250us 4ch Digital value reading z A D command D 250us 4ch Digital value reading 3 AAA E gt es
104. Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting Me This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC Wiring e Special devices Programs Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3uc Series The version number should be 1 30 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The PNK ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PNK ADP is on 2 Resistance thermometer sensor cable When using a 2 wire temperature sensor type short circuit the L terminal and the I terminal Separate the cable of the resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check
105. FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 14 BFM 39 Upper lower limit function status 9 Initial value H0000 zs Numeric data type Hexadecimal H 3 When any of the output data BFM 1 to 4 is out of range between the lower limit and the upper limit BFM 41 to 48 the relevant bit is turned on B mm 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 39 eg ES Bit Description El bO Data output from channel 1 lt Lower limit BFM 41 b1 Data output from channel 1 gt Upper limit BFM 45 C b2 Data output from channel 2 lt Lower limit BFM 42 x b3 Data output from channel 2 gt Upper limit BFM 46 E b4 Data output from channel 3 lt Lower limit BFM 43 o b5 Data output from channel 3 gt Upper limit BFM 47 X b6 Data output from channel 4 lt Lower limit BFM 44 D b7 Data output from channel 4 gt Upper limit BFM 48 z b8 to b15 Not used 2 5 Ww iw 2 Cautions regarding use of the upper lower limit function status The ON bits of the upper lower limit function status are latched after the output data has returned to the specified ranges between the upper and lower limits The upper lower limit function status can be reset by the following methods Use the upper lower limit function status reset function BFM 40 Turn the power supply off then on vdar nexs 3 Upper lower limit automatic tr
106. For all channels data will be sampled 100 times and the sampled data will be stored as data history in the data registers Device assignment Device Description X000 Clearance of data history mp X001 Temporarily stoppage of data history DO A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 to D199 Channel 1 data history 100 data samples D200 to D299 Channel 2 data history 100 data samples D300 to D399 Channel 3 data history 100 data samples D400 to D499 Channel 4 data history 100 data samples Data register YS S S mH B 58 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function 2 Example of sequence program 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs 3 Initial pulse z M8002 FNC 12 H3300 UO GO Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be ete RUN monitor MOV fl specified M8000 TO Ov K100 U0 G198 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 aVy NeX3 avvr onexs Clear data history X000 3 FNC 12 Data history of all the channels will be MOV HOOOF U0 G199 Ceased Temporarily stop data history X001 FNC 12 Data h
107. Gain data BFM 51 to 54 x Automatic transfer to data register E specification BFM 125 to 129 a Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 3 ET P 7 U Initialization function Set K1 in this buffer memory to perform i 20 initialization At the completion of initialization KO or K1 KO Decimal Subsection G 5 4 6 7 buffer memory will be automatically reset to x KO a Input characteristics writing gt Write the input characteristics offset gain value 8 21 At the completion of writing buffer memory will 3 H0000 re SEE Sr i be automatically reset to H0000 b0 to b3 ae H OFF x 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data w 2 To specify the input mode of each channel set each digit using hexadecimal numbers 0 to 8 and F s 3 Use bO to b3 d gt gt 2 83 TU pe x lt K gt Y gt U FE B 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Convenient function setting Convenient functions Automatic send deci O 422 function data addition upper lower limit 2 H0000 at delivery Sagao 22590700 i mal 5 4 8 detection abrupt change detection peak value holding 23 to 25 N
108. Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o 3 i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm PERS EET 1035 Tested 10 times in each Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z resistance 57 150 4 9 axis directions Total E 10 to 57 0 075 80 min each Direct Mounti ii 57 to 150 9 8 z Shock E i i i wee 4 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less 9 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 4 altitude lt 2000m 4 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If PT ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Other PEC equipment REC equipment PLG equ
109. Input 1 channel analog output 4 10 Error Status 4 10 Error Status If an error is detected in the 3A ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay 1st 2nd 3rd Ath D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data FX3G Series PLC Description Special data register 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Description Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors gt For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error i 3A ADP hardware error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 4 Power supply error included b2 Output data setting error b7 3A ADP communication data error b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error 1 A 3A ADP hardware error b6 is valid only when the use of analog input is set Detection of power supply error is valid only when the use of analog input channel 2 is set 2 A3A ADP communication data error b7 is valid only when the use of analog input is set 1 Caution regarding us
110. Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC A 45 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ OVy INEX dvr nexs ag dyz X4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Ga dav Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 8 FX2N 2LC Specifications FX2N 2LC 1 2 Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 2ch Input signal Thermocouple type K J R S E T B N PL Il WRe5 26 U and L JIS C 1602 1995 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 Examples Examples e Type K Type K Rated temperature range 100 C to 1300 C 100 F to 2400 F e Type J e Type J 100 0 C to 800 0 C 100 F to 2100 F Examples Examples e Type K e Type K Digital output 100 to 1300 100 to 2400 e Type J e Type J 1000 to 8000 100 to 2100 Resolution 1 C or 0 1 C 1 F or 0 1 F a Ambient temperature g i 0 3 C 1digi 5 23450 0 3 C 1 digit for full scale O Ambi
111. Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nex4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of FX3U 4DA are arranged as follows Signal Application e 24V DC power supply Ground terminal V VI Channel 1 analog output Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 2 analog output Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 3 analog output Do not connect any lines V VI Channel 4 analog output 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque The FX3U 4DA terminal block is designed for M3 screws The end disposal of the cable shown below Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m When one wire is connected to one terminal 3 2 0 13 Terminal Crimp 6 2 mm 0 24 Gs ee screw terminal or less Y 3 2 0 13 6 2 mm 0 24 Tertainal or less When two wires are connected to one terminal 3 2
112. Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value 20mA Current input Digital value 0 4mA Current input Digital value 20400 20000 0 4mA 20mA Current input B 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 Specifications 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 3 Current input characteristics 20 to 20mA Input mode 6 to 8 Set input mode 6 Input type Current input Analog input range 20 to 20mA Digital output range 16000 to 16000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 7 Input type Current input Analog input range 20 to 20mA Digital output range 4000 to 4000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 8 Input type Current input analog value direct indication Analog input range 20 to 20mA Digital output range 20000 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value 16320 16000 20 4mA Current Input Digital value 4080 i 4000 d i lt rie rast lo Current D Input 20mA 0 i z i 20mA Eri Vit Ort Att b f_ 4000 O 4080 Digital value 20400 20000 i Current Input 20mA 0 lt i El 3 QW I i baii 20000 oo 20400 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a
113. Outline FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 2 3 o The 2AD BD is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 10 or later After October 2008 initial production B xx ee res 1 Version check Bo Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 C 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number x The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number 3 refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 Tl 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with following version numbers to create programs for the 2AD BD da dv2 9 x4 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer SWLID5C GPPW J Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G var nex4 MI SWLID5C GPPW E If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia dav a MId TV NE
114. Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will also be written to the FX3U 4DA EEPROM Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories BFM 5 4 2 BFM 1 to 4 Output data Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Input the digital values corresponding to the analog signals to be output in BFM 1 to 4 BFM number Description 1 Data to be output from channel 1 2 Data to be output from channel 2 3 Data to be output from channel 3 4 Data to be output from channel 4 5 43 BFM 5 Output setting upon PLC stop Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H It is possible to set the output conditions from channel 1 to 4 when the PLC is in the stopped state HOOOO ma hon Set value HEX Output conditions 0 The final value during running is held 1 The offset signal is output 2 The output data set in BFM 32 to 35 are output 3 to F Invalid setting values unchanged The output conditions depend on the output mode BFM 0 1 Cautions regarding output conditions setting upon PLC stop While changing the setting values the output is stopped and H0000 is aut
115. Output of channel 4 upper limit error data Y010 Output of disconnection detection signal Y011 Output of error detection signal D200 Data register at destination of automatic transfer of error status D201 Data register at destination of automatic transfer of upper lower limit function error status D202 Data register at destination of automatic transfer of disconnection detection error status E 57 Ww sw UOWWOD gt OVy INEXY dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nex4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 ae day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 Examples of Practical Programs 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions 2 Example of sequence program e For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 RUN monitor MOV E M8000 TO FNC 12 H1122 UO G38 MOV fy FNC 16 mo pg 3200 Uoeat K2 FNC 16 k6400 uo G43 K2 FMOV FNC 16 28800 uo G45 K2 FMOVIR FNC 16 K25600 Uo G47 K2 FMOVIE FNC 12 H0011 UO G50 mova 01 voveso FNC 16 k5000 uo G51 K2 FMOVE FNC 12 H0007 UO G6O Mov fg 0007 vosso FNC 12 40003 UO G40 MOV amp FNC 12 Ko Uo G29 rove FNC 12 Ko Uo G28 rove D10 FNC 12 D201 k2Y000 MOV D202 2 D202 3 a D200 0 X000 X001 X002 RUN monitor M80 FNC 15 U0IG1 K4 BMOV Outpu
116. PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays AID US AN Special dea Pie 7 D8260 to D8269 i ai Special auxiliary relays A D M8270 to M8279 LU Special data registers D8270 to D8279 En Sequence p program Special auxiliary relays I AID M8280 to M8289 A speciai data registers D8280 to D8289 MM Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 A 71 y special data registers The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CF card special adapter K 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data e FX3G Series PLC y wo Communi E FX3U 4AD a AO Conversion PNK PNK Sic PNK ADP adapter PNK ADP Adapter FX3G Series PLC GA Special devices L Special auxiliary relays 3 M8280 to M8289 T pecial data registers E D8280 to D8289 Sequence 353 Program y Special auxiliary relays M M8290 to M8299 ab DY Special data registers a D8290 to D8299 a a DE The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the OS o next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in
117. PLC G Main unit Input extension 15V block y 9 og J W U Power H Power Power crossover a connector connector connector ES g gt U Terminal a block a gt x lt L Class D gt 24VDC groundin os g g 53 U Caution regarding connection of the power supply line a e For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit MLld V NEX4 day F 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 4 Analog Output Line 3 4 Analog Output Line The analog output type voltage output or current output can be selected for each channel If voltage output is selected i Terminal 1 Shielded block 4DA ADP grounding VO I ch O represents the channel number 1 Use 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G FX3U Series PLC can also be used 3 Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated
118. PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 7 FX2N 8AD G mit FX2N 8AD ecifications E Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 8ch A Thermocouple type K J and T put signal JIS C 1602 1995 Type K Type K 100 C to 1200 C 148 F to 2192 F Type J Type J Rated temperature range 400 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Type T Type T 100 C to 350 C 148 F to 662 F e Type K e Type K 1000 to 12000 1480 to 21920 Ser e Type J e Type J Digita Loutput 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 TypeT Type T 1000 to 3500 1480 to 6620 Resolution 0 1 C 0 1 F gt Type K e Type K S 0 5 6 5 C for full scale 0 5 11 7 F for full scale 8 Ambienttemperature Type J Type J 2 0 to 55 C 0 5 3 5 C for full scale 0 5 6 3 F for full scale 3 e TypeT Type T 0 7 3 15 C for full scale 0 7 5 67 F for full scale Time required for conversion 40ms x number of selected channels Input characteristics 12000 aa Type K T5 Sf 6000 i a a Type J i 3500 i i Type T i i 600 C pd A five Dy i 350 C 1200 C H Type T TypeK 1000 gt Temperature Digital output h gt o A 1112 F i Type J 2192 F Type K Temperature
119. Proportional operation P operation in cooling forward operation Temperature Output MV Integral time TI TER N 0 lt TI3 lt TI2 lt T11 TIBA Ti LSO EE Sp Measured value in proportional operation A EN O Measured value in PI operation Time Integral time TI x S 0 lt TI3 lt TI2 lt T11 A TIS os i i i a EE EEE DE Output in PI operation gt T1271 Output in proportional operation Time Important point The integral operation changes the output so that the continuously generated deviation is eliminated As a result the remaining deviation generated in the proportional operation can be eliminated Deviation Output Deviation EV A Output of proportional operation integral operation ORK Output of integral operation SSS q Output of proportional operation Proportional gain KP x Deviation E Time gt Integral time TI M 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters A 3 2 6 Differential gain KD S3 5 Setting range 0 to 100 PID control Differential operation ANd OVt NEXA dav The filter is applied to the output at the differential operation Only the differential operation is affected by the differential gain KD When the differential gain KD is small the output is immediately given with regard to changes in th
120. QYp NEX4 day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom ddv 1 41 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening eer stranded single wire torque Termination Single wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable Em AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection i gt To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection Bad P 2 0 22 Nem to e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve a oa i 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal Sonna AWG22 to 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact with Refer to the rod terminal i insulation t vi h i e Caulking tool sle vye ne pi ct en CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact e following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable ends To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire dir
121. Section 6 5 G m 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 9 w U Normally ON MO H Channel 1 output data setting error in x 2 3rd gt adapter amp M1 Channel 2 output data setting error in El 3rd adapter M2 I Channel 3 output data setting error in z 3rd 2 adapter E M3 5 Channel 4 output data setting error in by a o 3rd 2 adapter vw M4 ig J EEPROM error in the 3rd 2 adapter ul 3 2 1st for the FX3G PLC 4 E Ge TU F 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 6 Error Status 3 Program Example 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC D8268 0 Channel 1 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268 1 Channel 2 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268 2 Channel 3 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268 3 Channel 4 output data setting error in 1st adapter D8268 4 EEPROM error in 1st adapter F 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code 2 Initial value K2 g Numeric data type Decimal K 1 Description of setting B When the 4DA ADP is connected model code 2 is stored in the corresponding special data register xx The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code SE e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 59 e FX3G Series PLC 1st 2
122. Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Selection of sensor cable e Power supply line Refer to Chapter 4 e Analog input line Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of input characteristics Method of input characteristics change e Convenient function program e How to use scaling instruction If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting C 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number The 4AD ADP is compatible with the following PLCs Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 20 or later After April 2004 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer
123. Series User s Manual Analog Control Edition JY997D16701 Supplied separately This manual This manual describes the details of the FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC analog products 6 2 2 Manuals related to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC main unit For a detailed description of the commands to be used for the sequence programs refer to the programming manual For a detailed description of the hardware such as wiring of the PLC main unit refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition Supplied with Manual type Document productor Description y number supplied separately FX3G Series PLC This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3G Series Supplied with a HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D33401 product hardware of the FX3G Series PLC main unit such as specifications wiring and installation This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3G Series User s Manual Supplied FX3G Series PLC main unit and various items for the a JY997D31301 as ra Hardware Edition separately hardware such as extension specifications wiring and FX3U Series PLC installation This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3u Series Supplied with i a A HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D18801 product hardware of the FX3U Series PLC main unit such as specifications wiring and installation This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3u Series User s Manual Supplied FX3u Series PLC main unit and various
124. Shielded compensating conductor Temperature chamber Electric heater 4 Since turning on off is frequently carried out be sure to use the transistor outputs Setting contents FX3U 32MR ES X010 Auto tuning command X011 PID control command nexy FT oL dvy gt 5 d UOHONNSU did 88 ONS item During auto During PID tuning control Target value 500 50 C 500 50 C Sampling time Ts 3000 ms 500 ms Input filter a 2 70 70 Differential gain KD 5 0 0 5 2000 o mn E Output value upper limit 22 2 seconds 2000 5 Output value lower limit 23 0 0 Input variation alarm bit 1 of 1 Not provided Not provided Operation direction ACT Output variation alarm bit 2 of 1 Not provided Not provided Output value upper lower limit setting bit 5 of 1 Provided Provided According to Output value CD 1900 operation 1 Operation of the electric heater 1 During PID control D502 x 1 ms lt ON duration gt OFF ON ON ON ON ON 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms lt cycle gt 2 During auto tuning When the output is 90 of the maximum output o U H U U 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 1 8 sec 1800 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms 2 sec 2000 ms M 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response M
125. Unit mV or A mode used the mode used Decimal 5 4 6 13 Channel 4 offset data Unit mV or A Decimal 14 Channel 1 gain data Unit mV or uA Decimal 151 Channel 2 gain data Unit mV or A Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection 16 Channel 3 gain data Unit mV or pA mode used the mode used Decimal 5 4 6 17 Channel 4 gain data Unit mV or A Decimal 18 Not used To permit data change K3030 Subsection 19 Setting change prohibition To disable data K3030 at delivery Decimal 547 change Value re other than K3030 Initialization function Set K1 in this buffer memory to perform Subsection a initialization At the completion of initialization DOr Ko Decimal 5 4 8 the KO will be automatically set 21 to 27 Not used 28 Disconnection detection status Valid only in i 0000 Hexadeci Subsection current mode selection mal 5 4 9 429 Error status H0000 Herpes Subsection mal 5 4 10 30 Model code K3030 K3030 Decimal Subsection 31 Not used 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data 2 Specify the output mode of each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 4 and F in each digit 3 Specify the data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in each digit 4 Use b0 to b3 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM
126. V NEX4 day J 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data FX3G Series PLC Communi FX3u 4AD cation FX3U 4AD Connector F 3 special _ e conversion PTW ADP adapter FB adaptar FX3G Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 pecial data registers D8280 to D8289 Sequence Program Special auxiliary relays d M8290 to M8299 FE AD Special data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter However in this case do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type J 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices 2 3 o Ifthe PTW ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table FX3u FX3uc Series PLC z R Read W Write B Special Device number ae Description Attribute Reference 323 device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th ee SE
127. a Example To set the gain value of 3 V set 3000 mV gt For a detailed description of gain data refer to Subsection 5 4 14 Mld dWy NEXW4 dady B 51 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 5 create a sequence program To change the input characteristics write the offset data BFM 41 to 44 and the gain data BFM 51 to 54 in the sequence program and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 for the corresponding channel The following example shows a program for the unit number 0 Example Program for changing the input characteristics of channels 1 and 2 For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs Command for writing input characteristics T FNC 12 HFFOO vig FO Input mode specification for channels 1 to 4 UO GO Offset value of channels 1 and 2 Gain value of channels 1 and 2 Batch writing of offset and gain values of channels 1 and 2 FNC 12 H0003 UNIG21 ou fa 05 uncer 1 It takes approximately 5 seconds to change the input mode BFM 0 This is because all the set values should be changed After changing the input mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before setting other data The input characteristics of each channel can be written in BFM 21 It is also possible to perform batch writing of input characteristics for two or more channels
128. a x lt E gt P gt U E D 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 3 3 Analog Input Line 3 3 Analog Input Line For analog input voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel grounding 7 If voltage input is selected i V O I ch represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 If current input is selected be sure to short the line between the VL terminal and the I terminal 0 Channel number 3 Make sure to short circuit the VLJ and VI terminals when ch is not used 3 4 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1002 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other PLC equipment a equipment BEC equipment SE Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not al
129. a a eo a Sa ape Ao dak e an i oe ean fe G 16 AT AMONG Ods ix vain oie in E in dh ee ee de Le Ans G 16 4 3 Basic Program Example A eee ee eta G 17 5 Changing of Output Characteristics G 18 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output CharacteristiCS oooooocococccnncccnnonooonnnnnncnnnanannnonnncnnnno G 18 6 Troubleshooting G 19 6 1 PLC Version Number Check ius td G 19 6 2 Checking installation ssiri i ei e aiaee ai eie iea G 19 6 3 Wiring Checks ieri i a aaa e e aae deed e i aa a G 19 6 4 Special Device CHECK cccccccccceessssssneeeeeeeessenneeeeeeeesseseseeeeeseesceessaeeeeeessseessseeeeeesseseeeeeeeess G 19 6 5 Program Check iii E A e A A E A eddies G 20 6 6 Error Status Check edad G 20 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 1 Outline H 3 1 41 Outling of FUNCHONS sc a vena duel esses liada dis H 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ooooocccccnnocooonccnonononononnonnnnnnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos H 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 2 ccc cccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeenneeeetees H 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ccecceceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeessaees H 5 2 Specifications H 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ooooooococccccnncoooncnonoconnnonononnnnnnonnnn i ai aae a e i aiai H 6 2 2
130. affect the resolution 2 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition A 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 5 FX2nc 4DA FX2NC 4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output SW9 UOWWOJ Number of output points 4ch UJ OmA to 20mA DC Analog output range ae sk m w M9 4mA to 20mA DC Be External load 5009 or less SE A Pra PPE gt Offset 5V to 5V 1 2 20mA to 20mA 3 i Gain AV to 15V1 2 16mA to 32mA 19 Digital input With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary C Resolution 5mV 20Vx1 4000 201A 20mAx1 1000 3 ES gt Ambient temperature 0 5 100pA for 20mA full scale gt o O S 25 5 C I full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output 5 Q A TU Ambient temperature 1 0 200pA for 20mA full scale oO O 0 to 55 C EA Dora for 2OV full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D Reference Does not include any load fluctuation y O pme dilo fer DWA 2 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value gt conversion iz U When the output mode is set to
131. affect the resolution 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 15V 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 4mA lt Gain Offset lt 32mA A 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 5 FX3uc 4AD FX3UC 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200 kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input 15V 30mA Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 13 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 7 73 Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 1 254A 40mAx1 32000 5 004A 40mAx1 8000 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 5 2001A for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 0 400pA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D conversion 500us x number of selected channels gt Input characteristics When the input mode is set to 0 32640 7
132. and Version Numbers cccoooocoocccncccnnncconnoonnnocnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnos G 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number ooooooccccnccccnoocccnnnccnonoonnnonnnnononannnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnos G 5 2 Specifications G 6 2 1 Genene Specifications r e a a E a E a a aE G 6 2 2 Performance Specifications ccccnocooocccnncconnnoooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnn nro nnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns G 7 2 3 D A Conversion Time cccccnonoooccnnnncnnnnoonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnn rr nnnnnnnnnnnn nn rn EEEE EEEE EEEE rnrnnnnnnnnnnennninnnns G 8 3 Wiring G 9 Il TOrmial Lat A A tas G 10 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque oooooccccccccnnocoooonnnnncnononanonnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnnncnnnns G 11 3 3 Analog Output Line lt 0oiciincioi nn a a dianas G 12 3 4 Grondige a ees ess anes cosa Leda A dd evawe E E a a re reed ER se G 12 4 Programming G 13 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeecaaeeeeecaeeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeeseeaeetees G 13 4 2 Listof Special DeViCeS dad G 14 4 3 Switching of Output Mode cccceeccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeesecaaeeeseeaeeeeseeaeeesseneeeeeseeeetees G 14 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ccccccnnnconoconnncnononononnnnnnnnnnanannnnnnncnnnnnnnono G 15 4 5 Output Setting Data T va pe ee do bat xn ag ies ad da dao e oo eter a awed G 15 AG ETTOR Status Matis ae por
133. and then twist the core before connection i 3 To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection p P 0 22Nemto e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 9 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25Nem recommended terminal with AWG22 to 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool sleeve HE pee showninthe CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact ollowing figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination of eableend Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot poles a WHT Do not solder plate the end of the cable 9mm 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve Insulation sleeve Contact area If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Crimp area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view 0 31 Manufacturer Model Caulking tool ory CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 55 Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If th
134. avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 mia day Mld ave nex4 Com dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions 2 Example of sequence program For FX3u FX3UC Series PLCs Initial pulse maoo FNC 12 H3300 UOIGO RUN monitor MOV G H8300 uoco M8000 FNC 12 H01A2 Uo G22 mov amp FNC 12 K100 U0 G126 Novi 100 voca FNC 12 K101 U0 G128 MOV El FNC 12 k102 U0 G129 MOV EJ TO Clearance of upper lower limit error data X000 FNC 12 0003 Uo G99 mov amp Clearance of over scale FNC 12 KO U0 G28 novia 2 voz data X001 FNC 12 D100 K2Y000 MOV FNC 12 D101 K2Y010 ov ort Setting error detection ey D102 8 C RUN monitor M8000 Error detection D102 0 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 2 The convenient functions will be set The upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D100 2 The over scale status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D101 2 The error status data automatic transfer to data register will be set to D102 2 Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM 10 to 13 into DO to D3 Clearance of upper lower limit error data C
135. b2 ch3 b3 ch4 b4 to b7 Not used b8 ch1 b9 ch2 i i b10 253 Data history stoppage function bio jk b12 to b15 Not used 4 Caution regarding data history resetting When a bit is turned on the corresponding data history will be reset B 48 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 29 BFM 200 to 6999 Data history Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to sample the A D conversion data of each channel and to write the sampled data to the buffer memories The 4AD can sample up to 1 700 points of A D conversion data of each channel at the sampling cycle Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a 17 specified in BFM 198 and can store the sampled data as history data in the buffer memories as shown in SS the following table Buffer memories are assigned to the 4 channels as shown in the following table and data Rs is stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number 6 Use BFM 199 to stop or reset the data history Number of data BFM number C samples ch1 ch2 ch3 ch4 u 1st 200 1900 3600 5300 E 2nd 201 1901 3601 5301 5 gt 3rd 202 1902 3602 5302 2 1 700th 1899 3599 5299 6999 Z x lt 1 Caution regarding data history reading If a large amount of history data is collectively rea
136. be adjusted mode 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 5 oe Input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 8 he input analog value direct indication The offset and the gain cannot be adjusted 9 to E Not used F Channel not used Example Enter HFF00 in BFM 0 to set input mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use channels 3 and 4 Caution regarding data setting Ifa channel is set to the value 2 5 8 or F the input characteristics of the channel cannot be changed Set the optimum input mode for the analog signal to be input FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Changing Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 2 Determine the input characteristics to be changed Determine the digital value to be output according to the input voltage current Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a Example To output digital values in the range from 0 to 32000 by inputting the voltage in the range from 1V DC to 5V DC ma Input mode 0 Input characteristics provided at the time Input characteristics newly provided SE of factory shipment Rs Digital value Digital value 59 32640 7 32000 7 32000
137. be used averaging time setting error The update timing will be as follows b10 of BFM 29 will occur 0 The digital filter i Update time 500us x Number of will not be used Immediate data selected channels Each time the A D conversion is performed the 1 1 to 1600 Immediate data data will be updated The digital filter The digital filter function will The update timing will be as follows will be used be used Update time 5ms x Number of selected channels Each time the A D conversion is performed the data will be updated 2 to 400 Average data The update timing will be as follows Update time 500us 1x Number of 0 The digital filter selected channels will not be used Average data Each time the A D conversion is performed for 401 to 4095 4096 or more Average data 4096 will be set and the averaging time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will occur 1 500us represents the A D conversion time However if one of the channels uses the digital filter function the A D conversion time will be 5 ms for all the channels the set averaging time the data will be updated The update timing will be as follows Update time 500us x Number of selected channels x Averaging time B 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 5 BFM 19 Data change disable Setting range
138. below The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other REC equipment PLC equipment LO equipment Lol NA Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible F 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data E 2 3 3 4 Programming z ee This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 4DA ADP B SE ng Ce 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data BE 1 The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the output mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignm
139. cable Single wire AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection i 3 To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection 3 i 0 22Nemto e Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal with AWG22 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool sleeve oe kone shown in the CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact ollowing figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination of cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude MME Do not solder plate the end of the cable 9mm 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve ee area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Crimp area referring to the external view 0 31 Manufacturer Model Caulking tool 2 6mm CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 0 55 Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown
140. can be connected to the 14 point and 24 point type main unit a 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC 5 For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used 3 Y U Mld QAYY NEX4 day J 3 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the PTW ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check e Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection Refer to Chapter 3 Refer to Chapter 4 Programming If the error status data or the input digital value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Outline of system eCompatible PLC version number eCompatible programming tool version number Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Wiring ePower supply line ePlatinum resistance thermometer sensor line Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs J 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Con
141. cannot be used B 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter setting Setting range 0 to 1600 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K Q o 3 5 o 5 gt 3 a To use the digital filter for channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 set the digital filter value in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 dvvr onexs dvr nexs For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 If the digital filter function is used the relation between the analog input value and the set digital filter value or the digital output value channel data will be as follows Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 gt Fluctuation of analog signal fluctuation width less than 10 times of sampling If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is less than the set digital filter value the analog input value will be converted into a stabilized digital output value and stored in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 Digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 lt Fluctuation of analog signal If the fluctuation of the analog signal input value is more than the set digital filter value the digital output value will follow the analog input
142. channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current input mode 4 mA to 20 mA Set the output mode to the voltage output mode 0 V to 10 V Set the output holding function Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Set the averaging time to 5 for channel 1 data Set the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D102 H 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics PO RENEE 2 7 n a 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics a 0 RER Use the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 for the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to change the input output B characteristics FX3G Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction Use sequence programs to change wy the input output characteristics SE gt For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series Programming 3 U Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 400 to 2000 when the vol
143. connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed da Vd1 9 xX4 dQv VE NeX4 mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day G 9 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 1DA BD are arranged as follows MITSUBISHI Signal V VI HEDE Unused Output COM Application a terminal terminal terminal FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cable Ww sua UOWWOD gt Applicable cable and tightening torque 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve ma Wire size stranded Tightening Termination SE single wire torque 23 aa 0 3mm to 0 5mm2 To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable 9 AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core befor
144. determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a PTW ADP hardware error b6 or PTW ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8000 2 D8288 KAMO Normally ON M8002 MOV K4MO D8288 1 st for the FX3G PLC Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error J 21 Ww sw UOWWOD gt dvvr onexs Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI
145. e PLC version number Wiring Program Error status 8 1 PLC Version Number Check Verify that the PLC being used is of the following version or later FX3U 4AD Compatible PLC Version number FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later FX3UC 4AD Compatible PLC Version number FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later For a detailed description of version number check method refer to Section 1 3 8 2 Wiring Check Check the wiring as follows 1 Power The 4AD needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of the 4AD is on 2 Analog input line Use the 2 core twisted shielded cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from any other power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to short circuit the line between the V terminal and the I terminal of the channel Without short circuiting the terminals it is impossible to obtain the correctly converted digital values gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 4 8 3 Program Check Check the program as follows 1 Storage devices Check whether the device holding digital values contains any values written by other programs 2 Setting of averaging time and digital filter function Check if the av
146. e Signal converter etc Analog output e Inverter etc Temperature sensor input types K and J e Resistance thermometer sensor Pt1000 and Ni1000 e Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 5 D 2 O O E fe O a S N _ D 2 ek jo 5 5 O o n D fe o 2 o 2 FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PTW ADP 1 An FX3u 232 BD FX3U 485 BD FX3Uu 422 BD FX3U USB BD or FX3u CNV BD is needed to connect the special adapters A 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 1 FX3U Series PLC 3 1 2 Connection of special function blocks cay Series AR El and represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC gt Refer to the FX3U Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Ssul9 UOWWOJ i To connect the special adapters MN or the expansion boards E i refer to the previous page N dvr onexs dvr nexs Analog input e Flowmeter e Pressure sensor e Signal converter Terminal block a Analog output Special function block for FX3U e Inverter etc FX2N and FXON Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple e Platinum resistance th
147. elnput characteristics Outline pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring eSelection of sensor cable ePower supply line Refer to Chapter 4 eAnalog input line Programming Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting L 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number TC ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufactur
148. ener A 12 3 1 2 Connection of special function blocks 00 0 eee ee cece cent eeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaaeeeeneeeenaaeeeeeaaeesseeesenaeeeeeaees A 13 3 2 EAU SOPLO ite Aik Re ee Le nee ce et ee A 14 3 2 1 Connection of special Adapters eee ee AE AE re neglene end A 14 3 2 2 Connection of special function blocks oonononicccnnnncinnnnncnnoccncnananorono nn nn non cc cnn cnn nan rr rr A 16 33 FVG Sefes PG a da e abs A 18 3 3 1 Connection of expansion boards special adapterS oooooinnccnnnnncnnnccnnoncnccnnonnnn non cnnnrrncnnnn rr A 18 3 3 2 Connection of special function blocks 0 0 0 eee cence cent teens ee eeaeeeeeeaeeesneeeenaaeeeeeaaeessneeenenaeeeeaees A 20 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications A 21 4 1 Analog INp t rner ai a oe rr em er ede A 21 4101 EXSUR4 A DFA DP ociosa datada A 21 4 1 2 FX2N 2AD SERENE SEES RES SESESSTES SEERE RES i at a SENERE TRES ES eiei RESENS ERE FE iee Ert aae A 22 AAS A a AN eet Oe a ee es A 23 41 4 FX2N 4AD AAA Else EE AE sehen EEEE iaa aeta ATENE Tista A 24 a RSN DUO VN D AEE A OO A 25 4 1 67EX2NC AD oca oo aso Ra A 26 ATT EXQNPBAD a A a in See aa O Rg ot A 27 41 8 FX3G 2ADBD da A 28 42 Analog Outputs 24 28 2 eones ee ed ee es ee era de ee al aS A 29 APN IXUS DASA DPA tire fredede sea dacedaseeth tddi ETA A 29 42 27 EXQN 2DA ci E E E E Nineteen EENS A 30 ARI EDEL ET DA id A A T A E ER E E OAA A 31 ASDA EXONAADAG os a tien iria A 32 4 2 5 FX2NC 4DA at cessed ean aed eee delenit lve a
149. error in 1st adapter D8268 7 TC ADP communication data error in the 1st adapter 3009009086 L 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 8 Model Code 4 8 Model Code Initial value K10 Numeric data type Decimal K When the TC ADP is connected model code 10 will be stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd Ath D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Description FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Description Use the above special data registers to check whether TC ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FNC224 D8269 K10 7010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter L 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 9 Basic Program Example 4 9 Basic Program Example 3 E A Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data i 5 gt For FX3G FX3u FXsuc Series PLCs GR The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd adapter in the D100 and the D101 respecti
150. es cet es tei Bae seh J 14 4 Programming J 15 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data cccccceceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeseeaeeeeseeceaeeeetsneeeeaees J 15 4 2 List Of Special Devices cccoonocoooconnncconooooonnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnn nro nnnnnnnnnnnn nr nnnnnnnnnnnnnn nr rnnnnnnnnnrnnnnos J 17 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit cccccccceceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeaees J 18 4 4 Temperature Measurementt cccccceessseeccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeeeseesaceeseeeeeseesssceaseeeeeeeeseaneees J 19 42D SAVEFAGINGS TMG e 285s tact ast tee Sa tel ac Bs tae ast te Os el ae Os tae cast tee Oa eel acd as ee etek J 20 AGE OSS O Ae J 21 All Model Code 3 vece2e dan J 24 4 8 Basic Program Example REE REE ERE An E aa A e a Eapana J 25 5 Troubleshooting J 26 5 1 PLC Version Number Check u W u sssseeeeeerere renerne J 26 5 2 Wiring ChecKk coccion toda da a J 26 5 3 Special Device Check cccccceeeecceeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeceaneeesscaceseseaeeseseeeeeeseeeseessueeseneeees J 26 5 4 Program Check civic ii ye ede ed ia J 27 5 5 Error Status Check ne esei aa en ei e a e aE E i aa a ea a a aa aa J 27 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline K 3 11 Outlineof FUNCHONS 22 5 553 sa Brede 5 sk edo d
151. figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve da dv2 9 x4 e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable i Termination of cable end E Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude E A Y x Do not solder plate the end of the cable E 9mm J gt 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area 0 31 Manufacturer Model Caulking tool Ory CRIMPFOX ZA 3 i 0 55 Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not eer H be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or hold be an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight x Manufacturer Model g Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm S gt E 0 01 0 09 2 gt lt 2 53 U
152. has been made valid by the setting of BFM 38 set the upper and lower limit values to be used The setting range depends on the output mode 1 Setting range of upper and lower limits and initial values Initial value Output mode 3 BFM 0 Setting range Lower limit value Upper limit value BFM 41 to 44 BFM 45 to 48 0 32640 to 32640 32640 32640 1 10200 to 10200 10200 10200 2 3 0 to 32640 0 32640 0 to 20400 0 20400 2 Cautions regarding upper and lower limit values setting Check that the lower limit value is not equal to or more than the upper limit value If the lower limit value is equal to or more than the upper limit value b6 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on E 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 17 BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance 9 only in voltage output mode BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance values 3 Initial value BFM 50 H0000 BFM 51 to 54 K30000 2 Numeric data type BFM 50 Hexadecimal H BFM 51 to 54 Decimal K B The output characteristics of FX3U 4DA have been adjusted at 30 kQ load resistance as a factory default aS When the load resistance is 1kQ the output deviation is approx 4 3 to 20V in full scale whereas the SS output deviation is approx 0 15 to 20V in full scale when the load resistance is
153. in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm Manufacturer The head should be straight Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m gt 2 5MM 0 01 0 09 L 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the TC ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC FX3G FX3u Series PLC Main unit FX3G FX3u Series PLC Main unit Terminal Terminal block block Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected gt Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC Series
154. is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 1 8 points Taken from either the input or output poi offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30mA FA 5 5 ms x number of selected channels nts of the PLC Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be A 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 7 FX2N 8AD FX2N 8AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 8ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200 kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input Offset 15V 10V to 9V 1 2 30mA 20mA to 17mA 13 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 13 Digital output With sign 15 bits binary With sign 14 bits binary Resolution 0 63mV 20Vx1 32000
155. it may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 2 Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications E 5 S T z Item Specifications D A conversion 24V DC 10 160mA B circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block ul 5V DC 120mA SE CPU drive power Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit it is not necessary to supply power 56 externally 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Item Voltage output Current output Analog output range 10V to 10V DC External load 1kQ to 1MQ OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5002 or less da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Offset 10V to 91 OMA to 17mA Gain 9V to 10V 3mA to 30mA Digital input With sign 16bits binary 15bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20V 64 000 0 63uA 20mA 32 000 vdar nex4 Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 3 60uA for 20mA full scale Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 0 5 100uA for 20mA full scale Overall accuracy Time required for 1ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value D A conversion The photocoupler is used to insulate the an
156. items for the mi JY997D16501 ete 2s ren Hardware Edition separately hardware such as extension specifications wiring and FX3UC Series PLC installation The input output specifications and the wiring and installation methods for the FX3uc D DSS PLC are FX3uc D DSS Series JY997D28601 Supplied with excerpted from the FX3uc Series User s Manual for HARDWARE MANUAL product Hardware For details refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual for Hardware This manual describes various items necessary for the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 Supplied with s HARDWARE MANUAL JY997D31601 product hardware of the FX3Uc 32MT LT 2 PLC main unit such as specifications wiring and installation gt 50 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 6 2 Description of Related Manuals Supplied with 5 Document product or ae S Manual type SYNE RENE supplied Description 3 separately o A Provides detailed information on the hardware such as 2 Pano Senos users Manual JY997D28701 Supplied the input output specifications and detailed wiring Hardware Edition separately installation and maintenance methods for the FX3uc PLC UJ FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC we FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series Supplied This manual describes the basic and application 5 E Programming Manual Basic JY997D16601 ne Aaa commands necessary for the FX3G FX3U FX3
157. l I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Input value I i E Lo dd tf i 4 I l I I I I I I i I I I I I 1 i I I I I I I I I I I I i I 1 I I i I I I i I I 1 I I I I I I I I i I i I 1 I l I I I I I i I I I l I I I I I i i 1 I I I I I I I PSS SS r TNR e a i I I I I I I I I me NA SV SHPv F 7 j Sa a Oa SV target value a SV SHPy pass RSPR Petes asco SS ME Paar aes ae SS SS r a ce ii NN AAA A I I i i gt To Ti Ta Time s SHpv PV input threshold hysteresis Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI x100ms Differential time TD x10ms Only proportional 1 control P operation ULV LLV x100 FE PI control 0 9 Ton PI operation q ULY LLV x100 33 XT on 1 s PID control 1 2 Ton Ton PID operation a ULV LLV x100 20 xT on 1 o 50 x Ton 1 E M 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 2 Step Response Method A 4 2 Step Response Method a gt lt e A 5 4 2 1 Parameters to be set by auto tuning step response method 52 PA Parameter Setting position Parameter Setting position L Operation setting ACT 1 bit O operation direction Integral time TI 4 x Proportional gain KP 3 Differential time TD 6 E gt a 4 2 2 Auto tuning procedure go 1 Transferring the out
158. larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 Sets the averaging time for channel 1 of the 1st analog Normally special adapter to 1 ON Sets the averaging time for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to 5 FNC 12 K5 D8265 MOV C 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the 4AD ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register ee Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Description Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors gt For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 ov
159. limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 50 corrective function setting by load resistance BFM 51 to 54 load resistance values BFM 60 status automatic transfer function setting BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified register specification BFM 63 Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to specified data register specification Specify the following value as the setting change prohibition mode BFM 19 Set value Description K3030 permits data change Other than K3030 disables data change 1 Cautions regarding setting of the setting change prohibition mode While changing the setting value the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3u 4DA Do not turn off power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM E 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edit
160. mA Channels 2 and 4 are out of use 3 Convenient function The table output function is used 4 Device assignment Device Description X000 Start of table output function for channels 1 and 3 X001 Stop of table output function X002 Restart of table output function for channel 3 fol D10 Data to be output from channel 1 D11 Data to be output from channel 2 D12 Data to be output from channel 3 D13 Data to be output from channel 4 D5000 or more Data table Y000 Completion of output of table from channel 1 Y001 Table output error MO Data table transfer complete Output M1 During output of table from channel 3 D100 Data table transfer command D101 Table output completion flag It is necessary to separately create the data table gt For a detailed description of creation of the data table refer to Section 6 2 2 Example of sequence program For FX3u FX3UC Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 HF2F0 UOGO Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4 1 MOV E RUN monitor M8000 D K50 2 Continued 1 The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U 4DA For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is used it is not necessa
161. measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 2 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the PTW ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs 5 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the PTW ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detec
162. not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs Error Status Check If an error occurs in the PNK ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PNK ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PNK ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value of Pt1000 is not in the range between 55 C to 256 C or the temperature measurement value of Ni1000 is not in the range between 45 C to 115 C Altematively wiring with Pt1000 and Ni1000 is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition EEPROM error b4 1 Descripti
163. of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP n th 1st FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start A D command conversion 200us 4ch Digital value reading A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200us 4ch Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 9 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing g A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC a During execution of END instruction the PLC performs
164. of the PLC will be become longer If the E scan time exceeds 200 ms the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate and the PLC will stop E Insert WDT instruction watchdog timer refresh between BMOV instructions g7 a gt x lt E gt P gt u E B 59 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 Examples of Practical Programs 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function For FX3G FX3u FX3UC Series PLCs i 2 3 Initial pulse M8002 RUN monitor TE M8000 D K50 18 FNC 79 sa e De Je Clear data FROM fd history X000 FNC 79 KO K199 HOOOF K1 wg lt w e Temporarily stop data history X001 FNC 79 Ko K199 HoFoo K1 Tom Temporarily stop data history FNC 79 K199 Hoooo K1 Mer vo oso Ho ka FNC 79 KO K200 D100 TO X001 setting Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified 2 The sampling time will be set to 100 ms The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 Data history of all the channels will be erased Data history of all the channels will be temporarily stopped Temporary stoppage of data history will be canceled for all the channels Channel 1 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D100 to D199 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 2 history data 100 data samples will b
165. parameter ACT CS3 1 5 When bit 6 is set to OFF the step response method is selected 33 U Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON Set the auto tuning execution flag to ON bit 4 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 uoHONsU Cid 88 ONS Set the input filter Set the input filter in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 2 Set the sampling time Set the sampling time CS3 O a A QW Set the Upper Limit Value ULV Set the Upper Limit Value ULV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 26 7 Set the Lower Limit Value LLV Set the Lower Limit Value LLV of the output value MV in the operation setting parameter ACT S50 27 8 Set the threshold hysteresis SHPv Set the threshold hysteresis width SHrv in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 25 9 Set the target value SV Set the target value SV to in PID instruction 1 0 Set the ON PID instruction command input to start auto tuning Auto tuning is executed according to the measured value PV y When auto tuning is completed the auto tuning flag bit 4 and bit 6 turns OFF in the operation set ting parameter ACT CS3 1 M 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method Output upper Output lower For acq
166. programming necessary to readout the 4AD analog data Follow the procedure below to confirm that the analog data can be properly read out 4 1 Analog Input Procedures 1 Unit number check Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left When units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned Check the unit number assigned to the 4AD Unit Unit Unit number 0 number 1 number 2 Main unit Input output FX3u Series extension Input output extension block Special Special Special function unit PLC block function block function block 2 Input mode BFM 0 setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected set the input mode BFM 0 for each channel Use hexadecimal numbers for input mode setting Set the corresponding channel digit to the input mode setting value specified in the following table HOOOO 2 Lox Seng Input mode Amllg pg Digital output range value range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 ay A o 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Analog value direct indication mode Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 SAN oh ke hal a ia 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Analog value direct indication mode 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000
167. refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value is not in the range between 55 C to 255 C Or the line between PT ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dv Ve NeX4 mia 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified ES range 1 to 4095 oO 2 Remedy 53 Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel v a M1d dVb N X4 dady l 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PT ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The PT ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is pr
168. register specified in BFM 127 Res When abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this 6 reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 refer to Subsection 5 4 10 1 If BFM 127 K209 initial value Specified data register Description D209 Abrupt change detection status data in BFM 27 2 Caution regarding abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register Be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 and the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 The data written to BFM 127 will be retained in the EEPROM var nex4 MI 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a MLld AYY NeX4 dady B 45 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD
169. requirement time is specified 1 lt Output update time lt 32767 P K161 The output update time unit in the data table that is held Device number where the output update in the PLC is not 0 1 2 or 3 time unit is specified The output update time unit in the data table that is held Number of BFM where the output update K162 A HS in the buffer memory is not 0 1 2 or 3 time unit is specified K171 The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Device number where the interpolation the PLC is not 0 1 or 2 method is specified The interpolation method in the data table that is held in Number of BFM where the interpolation K172 a the buffer memory is not 0 1 or 2 method is specified The head device number BFM 98 in the data table to be K21 i i K98 transferred is out of the setting range K22 The value indicated by bO to b3 of the transfer command K99 BFM 99 is not 0 or 1 K23 The value indicated by b4 to b7 of the source register K99 type in BFM 99 is not 0 or 1 Any of the output patterns BFM 81 to 84 does not meet K31 the following requirement One of K81 to K84 1 lt Output pattern lt 10 The number of table outputs in BFM 85 to 88 does not K32 meet the following requirement One of K85 to K88 0 lt Number of repetitions of output lt 32767 K33 The bit corresponding to each channel in the table output K80 start stop command in BFM 80 is not 0 or 1 E 50 FX3G FX3U FX3UC
170. rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Mld dWy NeX4 day J 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline Ww sw UOWWOJ gt This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4AD PTW ADP referred to as PTW ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions dvr onex4 Qvp nexs The FX3u 4AD PTW ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD PTW ADP to the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4 channel platinum resistance thermometers 1 Up to 4 PTW ADP units can be connected to the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Up to 2 1 PTW ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC including other analog special adapters 2 After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 measurement of temperature will be possible 3 The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Point and sectio
171. screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed F 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog C
172. special adapter M8001 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode Normally OFF Sets the output holding function for channel 1 Program for setting scaling instruction data table Device Sets the number of points D50 X Digital value of specified D51 i Start coordinate start point on X axis i point Y Digital value of desired D A i conversion start point 400 ee i Number of points X Digital value of specified end point Y Digital value of desired D A M8000 apa FNC 259 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored H 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 5 2 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 3 Example of program 2 FX3G Series PLC e For example create the following program to change the digital output data D120 of the 1st analog special adapter M8091 Sets the output mode to the voltage M8282 output mode Normally OFF M8286 Sets the output holding function FNC 230 FNC 237 20 me to make sure the oer FNC 22 D120 K1600 D121 FNC 23 DDIV Diet Rene eine Calculation for changing output characteristics FNC 20 D123 K400 D127 Stores the operation result in D8282 ADD FNC 12 D127 D8282 MOV 4 Cautions regarding programming e GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instr
173. special adapter s Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected When using the high speed input output special adapter s be sure to connect the high speed input output special adapter s first and then connect the analog special adapter s High speed Analog special adapters input output Expansion board PLC special adapters om 90 99 9000000000 HKD FX3u BD A Wie eM won Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected 485 epresonis g i gt For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3uc D DSS Series PLC Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected Analog special adapters PLC looo0 000000 ROCOODCOCCCICOON i 0090909909 KOOL TTT 00000 000 00 q Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition A 6 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Types of Analog Products 3 FX3UCc 32MT LT 2 PLC Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3Uc 32MT LT 2 PLC An expansion board is needed to connect the special ada
174. special data registers FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register Description ist 2nd 3rd Ath D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data FX3G Series PLC Special data register ie Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting e If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register e Ifthe averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output e Ifthe averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or
175. term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if an
176. the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit Mld QAYY NEX4 dady 1 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt100 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area and will ensure accurate measurement 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Twisted shielded Terminal 4 7kQ 4 7kO Pt100 cable block i l Shield Twisted shielded cable Pt100 Class D grounding LO LO IC chOl U represents the channel number 1 Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer sensor from the other power cables or areas easily affected by inductive noise of the commercial power etc 3 6 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s M
177. the PLC main unit MLd V NEX4 dady H 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 3 4 Analog Input output Line 3 4 Analog Input output Line 3 4 1 Analog Input Line For analog input voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel If current input is selected 3A ADP Terminal block rn 1 110kQ ch a Lo i OGC pa eee gt A Comal HA tS T 88 7kO ren of external ren line 15V i ES Er 24V DC E Class D grounding VU I 1 chL represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 If current input is selected be sure to short the line between the VL terminal and the I terminal 0 Channel number 3 4 2 Analog Output Line If current output is selected Terminal 1 Use 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side H 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input
178. the factory default status state 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Device assignment Device Description X000 4AD initialization command 2 Example of sequence program For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs ADA initialization command X000 FNC 12 K1 U0G20 The 4DA will be initialized MOV B BFM 0 to 3098 will be cleared For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs ADA initialization command X000 i BERN FNC 79 KO K20 K1 K1 The 4DA will be initialized TOR BFM 0 to 3098 will be cleared 3 Cautions regarding initializing During initialization output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of initialization the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted e It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization Do not set write data in the buffer memory during the period e Priority is given to the setting of the change prohibition mode BFM 19 e Once initialization is completed the value in BFM 20 will automatically change to KO E 63 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvv onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA ake dav a M1d dVb NeX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog C
179. the following program is created the value in data register D20 is added to K10 and written to buffer memory BFM 6 of unit 1 WRITE command FNC 20 p20 Kio UNGE ADD Addition f Unit number result Buffer memory number Augend Addend 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction FX3G FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 FROM instruction Reading out BFM data to PLC Use the FROM instruction to read the data from the buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows READ command FNC78 1 Kio po K FROM Sl ler Buffer memory number Destination register If the above program is created 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM 10 of unit No 1 to data register D10 2 TO instruction Writing PLC data into BFM Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows WRITE command FNC79 k1 ko H3300 K1 TO Number of transfer Unit aa E AS ga points Buffer memory number Transfer source If the above program is created 1 point of data H3300 will be written to buffer memory BFM 0 of unit No 1 B 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM 4AD incorporates the following buffer memories For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 and subsequent sections Q o 3
180. the user s manual but for a detailed description refer to the separate manual asvai oexa G dav var nexy TI Analog control H a 2s Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output Temperature input T X For use of each analog control product 5 eae User s Manual Analog Control Edition Supplied separately l For each analog product use this manual for details on wiring setup details example programs and troubleshooting methods x wo E gt T 53 U a E gt Y gt o Se A 49 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 6 2 Description of Related Manuals 6 2 Description of Related Manuals The main manuals necessary for the use of analog products are described below These manuals are classified into two groups manuals necessary for the PLC main unit and manuals necessary for analog products The manuals specified as supplied separately are not supplied with the products Other manuals are supplied with the corresponding products o 2 1 Analog control manuals The following manuals are common manuals that can be used for any of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series analog products Manual type FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Document number Supplied with product or supplied separately Description FX3G FX3Uu FX3UC
181. this case do not include the connect conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type K 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If PNK ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table FX3U FX3UC Series PLC R Read W Write i Device number Special Description Attribute Refer to device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W 4 3 Special Section auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R W 4 4 relay M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to Unused Do not use a i M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 i D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 pa temperature measurement R D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature measurement R data Section E 4 5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 a 3 temperature measurement R D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 ee temperature measurement R i D8264 D8274 D8284 ps294 Averaging time for channel 1 R W o Setting range 1 to 4095 ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W apes Averaging time for channel 3 4 6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1
182. to 2 PNK ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Thermometer types Pt1000 and Ni1000 can be connected However it s impossible to use both types Pt1000 and Ni1000 with 1 adapter 3 The temperature data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3G FX3uU FX3UC Series PLC FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 2 maximum Number of connectable i i ial adapters S T units other analog special eee EXau FX3uc FX3c Series PLC A A A Al on P on P om P P n To check the connectable Ja Ja 3 fa EF FE FR E PLC model number refer E E E FE En FE ESS to Section 1 3 i i 13 E BL BL BL 12 4th 3rd 2nd 1st a adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed eee description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 Resistance thermometer sensor type Pt1000 and Ni1000 a For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC For a detailed description inti A of special devices refer to Description Transfer direction Special devices Chapter go Temperature measurement oe 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 For a detailed description Setting of temperature unit 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 al a panie program refer to Switching of types between a 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D828
183. to 30000 30000 a 53 Load resistance value for channel 3 2 54 Load resistance value for channel 4 is w El U a Mld dWy NeXW day E 33 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 3 Cautions regarding use of the output corrective function by load resistance While changing the settings the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted e This function is valid only in the voltage output mode mode 0 or 1 The corrective function by load resistance is valid only at a load resistance from 1 k to 30 ka e Ifa setting is out of the upper setting range b7 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e When not using this function the output characteristics at a load resistance of 30 KQ are applied 4 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM 5 4 18 BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function sett
184. to 4095 R W Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W oe D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 11 R A K 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Refer to 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W Section 4 3 i re M8281 M8291 Input sensor selection R W Section 4 4 Special auxiliary relay Meebo UN BESS IO Unused Do not use M8289 M8299 i D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature measurement R data D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature measurement R data ER 5 Section 4 5 D8282 D8292 annel 3 temperature measurement R data D8283 D8293 Channel 4 temperature measurement R data Averaging time for channel 1 Special data register D8284 D8294 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAN D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 R W Setting range 1 to 4095 A Torn 13 Section 4 6 veraging time for channe D8286 98296 Setting range 1 to 4095 PY Averaging time for channel 4 Been none Setting range 1 to 4095 RW D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 7 D8289 D8299 Model code 11 R Section 4 8 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit The sta
185. transfer to first data register specification Setting range 0 to 7992 Initial value at delivery K200 Numeric data type Decimal K If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM 125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically transferred to the specified data registers 8 points registers starting from the first data register specified When the peak value is updated data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 refer to Subsection 5 4 19 1 If BFM 125 K200 initial value Data will be transferred to D200 to D207 8 points Specified data register Description D200 Channel 1 minimum peak value BFM 101 D201 Channel 2 minimum peak value BFM 102 D202 Channel 3 minimum peak value BFM 103 D203 Channel 4 minimum peak value BFM 104 D204 Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 D205 Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 D206 Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 D207 Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 2 Caution regarding peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification e If data registers are already specified for the o
186. type by turning on the type K J selection special auxiliary relay 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring e It is not possible to connect different types of thermocouples to 4 channels of TC ADP Be sure to use the same type of thermocouple for all the channels TC ADP is not insulated between the channels For this reason be sure to use a non grounded type thermocouple Be sure not to connect to the terminal e 3 7 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other EEG equipment Pre equipment Boe equipment i I NE FT Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible L 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 T
187. upper lower limit function BFM 38 to 48 corrective function by load resistance BFM 50 to 54 and status automatic transfer function BFM 60 to 63 of FX3U 4DA 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 System configuration FX3U 4DA unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 2 current output 0 mA to 20 mA 3 Convenient functions The disconnection detection function upper lower limit function corrective function by load resistance and status automatic transfer function are used 4 Device assignment Device Description X000 Clearance of upper lower limit function status data X001 Clearance of error status data X002 Clearance of disconnection detection status data Input D10 Data to be output from channel 1 D11 Data to be output from channel 2 D12 Data to be output from channel 3 D13 Data to be output from channel 4 YOOO Output of channel 1 lower limit error data Y001 Output of channel 1 upper limit error data Y002 Output of channel 2 lower limit error data Y003 Output of channel 2 upper limit error data Y004 Output of channel 3 lower limit error data Y005 Output of channel 3 upper limit error data Y006 Output of channel 4 lower limit error data Output Y007
188. will be updated 3 If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected adapters 2 5 Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on L 9 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 0 E II 3 Wiring This chapter describes the TC ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the TC ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q o
189. zoner Aad ease ik Kr Aes ts nok ig Aas etek as ast Ae a eA op es ee ee dr B 11 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque cccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeeseaeeeeseneeeeeseaees B 12 3 2 1 Power cable FX3UC 4AD ceccceccecceeeceeceeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeecaeecaesaaeeaecaesaeseeseeeeeeseseseeenseeeeeeeteaeeaees B 12 3 2 2 Cable EX3U 4 AD e o o ta tanto Moe B 12 3 2 3 Gable EX8UC 4AD o Aectt a ts ete E E eee erindrede gere B 13 3 3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit cccccccceeeesceeeeeeeceeeececeeeeceeeeceseaeeeeeeaeeeeseeeeeessneeeeseneees B 14 BESS UA Bn ee ee a eee B 14 3 3 2 FXSUC AAD ias B 15 3 3 3 Cautions regarding connection of power CAbIeS eee ceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesneeeeenaeeeeeaees B 15 3 4 Analog Input Lines athe dirias B 16 3 41 FXSU AAD ii da iaa B 16 3 42 PXU OA D ci dee ea ra a dde a e ed o ti Bae B 17 A eta B 17 Analog Input B 18 4 1 Analog Input Procedures oooooonncccnnnconncononcccnccnnnnnnnnnccnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnnn ii aaia iie iei B 18 5 Buffer Memory BFM B 20 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory coooooocconccccccoccccccononccononanccononnn cnn B 20 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method occcccnnncoooconnccnononononcnnnncnonanononnnnnncnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnos B 22 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification FX3U FX3UC PLC ONly ooconcoccccccccccccccccccnancnccnccnanancnnncnans B 22 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction
190. 0 74 i Em LIO pe 148F 0 fie 600 C 1112 F wi Z O 1 i toy 1000 1480 1100 ian 1660 The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O 0 points points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC L 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3u 4AD TC ADP n th 1st FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion 200 us 4ch Digital value reading A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200 us 4ch A Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special da
191. 0 41A 16mA 4000 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C E 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale z when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C E 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale 9 Sal sapere If the external load resistance Rs is less than when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C y 5kQ the value calculated from the following 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale formula will be added when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C Addition will be 100mV per 1 47100 aay z 0 h E Rs 47 5 D A i FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 200us The data will be updated at every scan time 5 a e FX3G Series PLC 250us The data will be updated at every scan time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 G ra rm og l J 10V 20MA 7 I 5 i I a i I Output 2 E a H characteristics 3 2 i i x 2 E SEE E lt i i gt lt 4mA i S 0 gt 4000 4080 0 S 4000 4080 Digital input Digital input E e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC ES Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog output area is e Channels are not insulated from each other LF Fm Numbers of vo 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC points occupied J gt E gt gt U E FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual
192. 0 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible Check the version number of the FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 30 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The PT ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PT ADP is on 2 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the PT ADP are correctly used 1 Temperature measurement Verify that the special device for the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 2 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the PT ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wi
193. 00 to 2000 when the voltage input is 1 to 5V to the digital output range of 0 to 10000 1 Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed product specifications Y axis aaa aaa 10000 5 i 2 i 9 i 3 i E i sa i D i 235 i O i 238 i DaT 1 2000 ip p 522 i 400 PA i X axis 0 4v 5V gt 10V 0 400 1V 2000 5V Analog input Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion 2 Example of program For example create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog board M8001 M8260 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the Normally OFF voltage input mode OV to 10V a FNC 12 D8268 K4MO Normally ON MOV M8002 Error status b6 OFF Initial pulse iz Error status b7 0FF NE FNC 12 f K4MO D8268 M8000 FNC 12 D8264 Sets the averaging scaling to 1 for MOV the channel 1 data M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D110 FNC 230 FNC 237 Check to make sure the digital D110 K400 D119 peo D value D110 is in range M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 Calculation for changing input f ENG 22 D111 k10000 D112 characteristics el Stores the operation result in D100 FNC 23 DDIV D112 K1600 D100 D 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting method
194. 1 The stepped output may be obtained from 0 to 75 or from 0 to 50 Operation characteristics 100 Output value Output value MV 0 Time Input value variation Maximum ramp R c Time s Dead time L 1 s s Operation characteristics and three constants Control type Proportional gain KP Integral time TI x100ms Differential time TD x10ms Only proportional 1 Output value 100 _ control P operation RL MV PI control 0 9 Output value 400 33 L PI operation RL PID control 1 2 Output value 4090 20L 50L PID operation RL MV 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 1 Countermeasures with in the program when the input value PV does not change When the input value PV does not change normally due to factors such as wire breakage in an analog input line auto tuning is not finished Detect and avoid such occurrences by introducing a sequence to monitor the input value or the elapsed time from the start of auto tuning M 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method 5 1 Example System and operation K 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method _ 5 The following is an example of a program for the operation application system shown below 5 1 Example System and operation System configuration Temperature sensor Thermocouple
195. 1 6 FX2Nc 4AD FX2NC 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input Offset 15V 10V to 9V 1 2 30mA 20mA to 17mA 13 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 13 Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 1 254 A 40mAx1 32000 5 001A 40mAx1 8000 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 5 200uA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 0 4001A for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D conversion 1ms x number of s elected channels Input characteristics When the input mode is set to 0 32640 9 7 1 32000 4 ta iN o 10V 0 da gt i 10V Ni o aoe 32000 AUREA 32640 When the input mode is set to 6 16320 9 7 16000 rig rie 1 ix 1 50 1 IN 20mA 0 ee PE a 20mA E Xi oO Ni ys 16000 REPARAR 16320 20 4mA 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter
196. 16mAx1 4000 3 TE 0 5 50mV 0 5 801A 0 5 50mV 0 5 801A D pe i for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale a 25 5 C Q Ambient gt CGE He 1 0 100mV 1 0 1601A 1 0 100mV 1 0 160uA 5 3 P ESSEN for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale w Q 0 to 55 C 3 If the external load E 5 resistance Rs is less T than 5kQ the accuracy x L increases as shown in the e O Reference z a following formula z a Increase 100 mV per 1 47x100 o RS 47 0 9 FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 80us for each selected input channel 40us for each selected output channel Operation synchronized with sequence program Metelo FX3cG Series PLC ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI aa 90us for each selected input channel 50us for each selected output channel Operation synchronized with sequence program For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 4080 7 3280 4000 3200 4 10V qien 20mA 7 E y 2 i E gt El 2 pa 5 2 5 if characteristics E al 3 x g g S i iS amp 2 D D w i i 7 E i iS 4mA 2 0 gt 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA 0 4000 o 4000 3 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input Reed The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and outpu
197. 2 D8281 D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction 1 1st for the FX3G PLC Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 C 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 Programming 4 8 Basic Program Example For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 M8001 FNC 12 q pit Wai i FNC 12 aia Ma Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V Sets the input mode of channel 2 to the current input mode 4 mA to 20 mA Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction C 25 Ww sua UOWWOD gt OVy INEXY dvp n
198. 2 2 2 a B and 4 represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC pa FX3u 4AD ADP E pa European terminal block European terminal block ele gt FX3u 3A ADP FX3u 4AD TC ADP FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3u 4AD PT ADP FX3u 4AD PTW ADP connect the special adapters 2 European terminal block _ European terminal block The FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC is due to be upgraded later Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc Analog output elnverter etc Analog input eFlowmeter ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input e Thermocouple types K and J e Resistance thermometer sensor Pt1000 and Ni1000 e Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 An FX3U 232 BD FX3u 485 BD FX3U 422 BD FX3U USB BD or FX3U CNV BD is needed to A 15 sw9 UOWWOJ da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O dvr onexs dvr nexs var nex4 MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day ld QYy NEXd avi nex4 Co day Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products
199. 2000 n D Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 2 2V D5015 K6 El Output update time at point 1 in pattern 2 6s Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 2 1s D5016 nenes Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5017 K10000 y Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 2 10V D5018 K15 2 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 2 15s N Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 2 1s D5019 HORE Point to point interpolation method No interpolation D5020 K500 y Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 2 0 5V D5021 K45 2 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 2 4500 ms wo Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 2 100 ms 2902 MODE Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5023 K4000 y Data to be output at point 4 in pattern 2 4V D5024 K9 El Output update time at point 4 in pattern 2 9s R 4 D5025 H0012 Output update time unit at point 4 in pattern 2 1s Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation E 42 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 5 Example of pattern output 9 Data can be output in a predetermined pattern as shown below Example of pattern 1 in output mode 1 3 shown on the previous page 3 7 When the pattern is repeated B BFM 85 to 88 ae are set to 0 or 2 or S Output higher SE value 56 8V pp Linear interpolat
200. 24V DC power supply line of the 3A ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3G FX3u Series PLC B 1 To use an External power supply 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC 38 FX3G FX3u Series FX3G FX3u Series ES PLC Main unit PLC Main unit block Terminal block da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line var nex4 MI Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit e For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FXanc Series PLC Input extension block ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector ddv Vve nexs Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding day Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 1009 or less together with the grounding terminal of
201. 259 e Ifthe input digital value for the D A conversion is out of the data table range specified by scaling instruction SCL FNC259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 F 25 Ww sua uowwog gt avv onexs Qvp nexs da dv2 9 xX4 J dav avr nexs O var nex4 MI da Vd1 9 Xx4 O dav vdv nex4 dav ve nexa mia day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If analog data is not output or if the proper analog value is not output check the following items e Version number of PLC Wiring Special devices Programs Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check e Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible Check the version number of FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 20 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The 4DA ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 4DA A
202. 264 D8265 M8000 FNC 12 K32 Normally MOV ON MOV Sets the averaging time to 128 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter L 22 4 Programming 4 7 Error Status FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 7 Error Status If an error is detected on TC ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register sae Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data FX3G Series PLC Special data register FEE Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to determine the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data bO of channel 1 is outside the specified b5 range or disconnection is detected Averaging time setting error The temperature measurement data b1 of channel 2 is outside the specified b6 range or disconnection is detected TC ADP hardware error The temperature measurement data b2 of channel 3 is outside the specified b7 range or disconnection is detected TC ADP comm
203. 3 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specifications en e i a sone tee eee lode ea a aa aa ae aAA A S aiaia R B 45 5 4 24 BFM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 46 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 46 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history B 47 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time SettidQ o ooconnccnnnnicinnnnccnnnncnnnonccnnnanncnnnrnnnnrnccnnnnnnrnnnno B 47 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history resetting stoppage oooonocccinoccnnoncccnnoncononononnon nc nano nor rnn nn nan cnc rnnrcare nn B 48 5 4 29 BFM 200 to 6999 Data hiStOlY ooonocicniinicinconocccocnnoncccnnnn non crnn cnn cnn nnrn rra criar B 49 6 Changing Input Characteristics B 50 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics oooooocccinnncicinnncccconncccoconnncnnnnnnrnnnnnnnn cn nnnnrncnnnnnnn B 50 7 Examples of Practical Programs B 53 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging Time coooccccnnnoncccccccccnoncnonncnnnccnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns B 53 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions ccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaceeeeeeaeeeeseneeeeessneeeeeseaees B 55 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function oooooccccccccococococcncccnonananoncnnncnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnns B 58 7
204. 3 input data E D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 input data y T The converted A D immediate data or averaged data data average conforming to the specified averaging gt time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data gt For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 5 1 Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 Normally MON ON MOV Stores the channel 1 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Stores the channel 2 input data of the 1st analog special H adapter in the D101 Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in x the timer counter set value or in a PID instruction amp gt U m gt lt E E TU x lt E gt P gt U E C 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the 4AD ADP the average data will be stored as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following
205. 3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 3 FX3u 4AD FX3U 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200 kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input 15V 30mA Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 20mA to 17mA 13 Gain 9V to 10V 1 2 17mA to 30mA 7 73 Digital output With sign 16 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 2 5mV 20Vx1 8000 1 254A 40mAx1 32000 5 004A 40mAx1 8000 25 5 C Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 5 2001A for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 0 to 55 C Overall accuracy Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 1 0 400pA for 40mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input Time required for A D conversion 500us x number of selected channels gt Input characteristics When the input mode is set to 0 32640 7 A 32000 fis IR i 1S ray 10V 0 E i i 10V gt i Ni S Hs a 32000 pu ARPA 32640 When the input mode is set to 6 16320 16000 420 4mMA 20mA 0 4mA 20mA Insulation method The photocoupler is
206. 3u FX3uc Series PLC Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 1st adapter var nex4 MI pace Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter D8268 2 i Output data setting error of the 1st adapter D8268 4 EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 ear i i Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 Hardware error in 1st 3A ADP ae varoexa G sav varnex TI D8268 7 Communication data error in 1st 3A ADP ddv Vve nexs day Mld Qyr NeXd Ca day H 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 Programming 4 11 Model Code 4 11 Model Code Initial value K50 Numeric data type Decimal K When the 3A ADP is connected model code 50 is stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code FX3G Series PLC Special data register nee Description 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether a 3A ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example FX3u FX3uc Series PLC FNC224 D8289 k50 007 LD Checks the model code of the 1st analog special adapter H 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3
207. 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC ooconocccccnincncnnnnancnonononaconononannnnonancnnnonnnaca conca anna nn nananannns 1 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC inenen idi ioia re reed Peer vera 1 9 2 5 Temperature MeaSurementt ccccccccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeceaeeeeeaeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 1 9 3 Wiring 1 10 3 1 Terminal Layout rs codicia eet 1 11 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque cooooccccinncccccnonococononocononnnncnnnnnnconnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 1 12 3 3 Power Supply Line e td l 13 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3U Series PLC ooononnncccccnocccccnonaccnnnonococcnnnannnononanano nono no ncn non ara nano na ana nnnano 1 13 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3UC Series PLC nijione ta neee ar e ae s aae a nana 1 13 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer SenSOT ooooooccccncccoccccnonocccononnnononnoncnnnnnnnnnnns 1 14 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor oococoncccccnncoccccnonoccconnnncononncncnnnnnenonannns 1 14 316 GroUndiNd ilu dde dl dla ee 1 14 4 Programming 1 15 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeaaeeeeesaceeeeseaeeeeeesesaeeeeseneeensaees 1 15 4 2 List Of Special DevicesS ccccooooooocccnnccnonoooooncnnnccnnononononnnnncnnnnnn rrtt AEAEE EEEE nn nnnnnnnnnnnn nn EEEE neee 1 17 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit ccccccecccecenceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeceeeseseaeeeeseseeeee
208. 4 Initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default cceccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseneeeesenees B 61 8 Troubleshooting B 62 8 1 PLC Version Number Check 2 ccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceaeeeeecaeeceseaeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeessneeeeseeees B 62 82 Wiring Checkitax stitute es A a el ee oe Scot deta id B 62 8 3 Program Check tt ar o doo B 62 8 4 Error Status Checkiccunisc rt ds B 63 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test PrograM ooooccccccnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnneninininnns B 64 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 Outline C 3 11 Outlineof FUNCIONS 0 ecc sea a eg eke ae SA Koden o o te C 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccecccceeceeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeesneeeeeees C 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number cccc cccceeeeceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeneeeseeceeesesseeeeeesneeeeeees C 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccccccscesecceeeeessessneeeeeeeescsenseeeeeeeeesseenaeeees C 5 2 Specifications C 6 2 1 Generic Specifications A a a e a a E a a E C 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications cccssccceccceeeseessceeeeeeeeecseneeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeess C 7 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceecaeeeesceeeesecaeeeeeeeaeeeee
209. 4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 The offset gain values cannot be changed 1 Cautions regarding input mode setting e If the input mode is set changed the analog input characteristics will be changed automatically Furthermore when the offset gain value is changed the characteristics can be set to the desired values Set value Analog input Digital output HEX Inpubmode range range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 E Voltage input 1 z 2 Analog value direct indication mode AOUE ETON Led x 3 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 S gt 4 Current input mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 Current input 1 5 Analog value direct indication mode FMA to ems 4090 fo 20900 F 6 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 y 7 Current input mode 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 T U x Current input P 1 z 5 gt 8 Analog value direct indication mode ZUMA to t Z0mA 20900 t0 720009 2 9to E Setting not possible G F Channel not used 3 P og J es U The resolution cannot be changed H Ifthe analog value direct indication 1 is specified the offset gain value cannot be changed x e It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the input mode For this reason after changing the input amp mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more before writing other data HFFFF no channels used cannot be set E 2 Caution regarding
210. 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 24 BFM 128 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K210 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the over scale status data BFM 28 to the data register specified in BFM 128 When over scale is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the over scale status data BFM 28 refer to Subsection 5 4 11 If BFM 128 K210 initial value Specified data register Description D210 Over scale status data in BFM 28 Cautions regarding over scale status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 The data written to BFM 128 will be retained in the EEPROM Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM gt For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 25 BFM 129 Error status data au
211. 4AD ADP units can be connected to the FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Up to 2 1 4AD ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC including the other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 A D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC System Point and section to be referred to FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 2 maximum including other analog special adapter e Number of connectable units FX3u FX3uUc FX3c Series PLC To check the connectable Pon PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 oov00 ovo00000000 O EEE dl i i oooooloooooo000 0 oooooloooooooooo E 2 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data Rn description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 Flowmeter pressure sensor etc For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC For a detailed description Transfer direction Special devices of special devices refer to Analog data 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Chapter 4 Switchi fi t d 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 For a detailed description eSwitching of Input mode of a basic program refer to Setti
212. 4th Input sensor selection M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 OFF Pt1000 ON Ni1000 FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay aay Description ist 2nd Input sensor selection M8281 M8291 OFF Pt1000 ON Ni1000 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To select Pt1000 for the 1st adapter 2 To select Ni1000 for the 2nd adapter M8001 023 M8000 627 Normally OFF Normally ON K 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 5 Temperature Measurement 4 5 Temperature Measurement 3 E The temperature data input in the PNK ADP will be stored in the special data registers 9 The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table 62 FX3U FX3UC Series PLC L Special data register ae x Description amp 1st 2nd 3rd 4th amp D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data I D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data M D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data 3 FX3G Series PLC ae 26 oF Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 tem
213. 5 4 2 List Of Special Devices Li Ashit g gi aia iapa aeei iaa F 17 4 3 Switching of Output Mode cceceececeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeecaaeeeseeaeeceseaeeesseaeeeeeseeeeeseneeessaees F 18 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ooooccnnnncooocccnnncnonononononnnncnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns F 19 4 5 QutputSetting Data sipe rt rl a a e e eaa ea e aap eaa NE eee F 20 AONEmMOr Status e e ee eee edo e er ser ER F 21 A RR sek sips seated eth eee ote ef Seas eA en A as A dee FILE F 23 4 8 Basie Program Example xc iia F 23 5 Changing of Output Characteristics F 24 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ccccccccccesesessceeeeeeesesesteeeeeeesseseees F 24 6 Troubleshooting F 26 6 1 PLC Version Number Check rss zar f2ec peta cs gst Ge arien oc at sene aan aaa e ee tonteria Modo F 26 6 2 WiriNg Check ks i AAL E SR e a ah a Dd SDN ad ap ah a ae oad e arte F 26 6 3 Special Device Cher e o ds al dedo a e ed he s F 26 6 4 Program Checks ic o Seas de tan E Seiad eae ALINA SME LEN Lan ca F 27 6 5 Error Status Cheka a aaa iii F 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3c 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 1 Outline G 3 11 Outline of FUNCIONS i iii tad a a ee ia a Ata ah G 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccceeeeccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeetees G 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs
214. 63 automatic transfer to data register specification K202 Decimal 54 21 gt Valid if b2 of BFM 60 is set to ON gt 5 64 to 79 Not used 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain the data ae i ee z i gt 2 Specify the use of the upper lower limit function for each channel setting one of hex code 0 to 2 in e each digit gt 3 Use b0 to b1 53 TU 4 Specify the use of the corrective function by load resistance for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit J 5 Use bO to b2 x E gt Y gt I FE E 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference 80 Start stop of table output function 1 H0000 oe 81 Channel 1 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal 82 Channel 2 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal 83 Channel 3 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal 84 Channel 4 output pattern K1 to K10 K1 Decimal 485 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Decimal from channel 1 486 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Decimal Chapter 6 from channel 2 487 Number of times of output execution of table KO to K32767 KO Decimal from channel 3 88 Number of times of output execution of ta
215. 8 total number A and point to point interpolation method of data tables 1 1 5 w 53 Note The device number marked by 1 should not exceed D7999 or R32767 d For a detailed description of the data table items 1 to 8 refer to the following pages a MId TV NEXd day E 39 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 3 Details of data table 1 Number of patterns number of data items 1 Store the number of patterns at the top of the data table device specified in BFM 98 Up to 10 patterns can be prepared The setting range of the number of patterns is 1 to 10 When the number of patterns is out of the setting range table output error code K111 is stored in BFM 90 the device number in which the number of patterns is specified is stored in BEM 91 and b8 in error status BFM 29 is turned on 2 Pattern number of data items 5 to 299 A pattern refers to a predetermined flow of output The contents of a pattern are defined by a combination of points Prepare pattern data following the number of patterns to form the data table Up to 10 patterns can be prepared 3 Number of points number of data items 1 Store the number of points to be used in each pattern at the top of the pattern Up to 99 points can be provided The setting range of number of points is 1 to 99 When the number of points is out of th
216. 8001 Sets the input mode of the 1st board to the voltage input mode Normally 0 V to 10 V OFF M8000 Sets the input mode of the 2nd board to the current input mode Normally 4 mA to 20 mA ON M8000 FNC 12 D8268 K4MO M8002 Initial pulse jaa A FNC 12 K4MO D8268 Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Mel Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 a FNC 12 D8260 D100 E FNC 12 D8261 D101 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction D 19 avenexa UU sway uowwog gt Qvr onex4 dav avr nexs O da dv2 9 x4 var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale day Mld Qyr NeXd Gon day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 5 Changing of Input Characteristics The input characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3G Series PLCs 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital output range of 4
217. 8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 input data R D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data R Section 5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 input data R 4 4 D D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 input data R 2 D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting R W p range 1 to 4095 3 Special D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 Setting R W i data range 1 to 4095 Section i ing ti E i 4 5 register D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 Setting RW E range 1 to 4095 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 Setting R W E range 1 to 4095 5 D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W n D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 1 R cy asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia day Mld avy nex4 Com day C 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 3 Switching of Input Mode FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write y 3 Device number NEN r Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W i 2 Section 4 3 nd M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 R W Special auxiliary relay M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 R W M8284 to M8294 to M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use D8280 D8290 Chann
218. 9 D8289 D8299 Model code 5 2s FX3cG Series PLC E gt Special data register Ma Description Si 1st 2nd d D8289 D8299 Model code D Use the special data registers above to check whether a 4AD ADP is connected or not x T 5 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC w FNC224 D8269 K1 Checks the model code of the ist FNA pease Kt 007 analog special adapter E x A oOo gt ae varoexa G sav varnex TI dav ve nexa dqy a M1d dVb NeX4 dady C 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 8 Basic Program Example 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion A D conversion data e For FX3G FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 M8001 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V M8000 Sets the input mode of channel 2 to the current input mode 4 mA to 20 mA Error status b6 OFF Initial pulse Error status b7 OFF eon Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data FNC 12 Cee Ls ee FNC 12 5 D8285 MOV M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D100 E FNC 1
219. 9 For a detailed description eSwitching of input mode of a basic program refer to Setting of averaging time 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 Section 4 12 Output mode switching e 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 eOutput setting data eSetting whether or not a channel is used eAnalog data eError status Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used H 3 Ww sw UOWWOJ gt CVi onexd Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 Oo ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv ve nexs day Mld Qyr NeXd Ga day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input output using the 3A ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 3A ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 S
220. 9 ection Ta type Pt1000 and Ni1000 Setting of averaging time 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the 14 point and 24 point type main unit 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used K 3 ANd OVt NEXA dav nexa FT day 10 9N 4SU did OL dvr 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using PNK ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system Compatible PLC version number Compatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications eOperation environment ePerformance specifications elnput characteristics Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control eSelection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring eSelection of sensor cable ePower supply
221. AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 2 Outline of buffer memory The analog signals input into the 4AD will be converted into digital values and then stored in the 4AD buffer memory To switch the input mode between voltage input and current input or to adjust the offset or gain numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written set in the 4AD buffer memory To read write data from to the 4AD buffer memory the buffer memory can be directly specified using the FROM TO instruction or an applied instruction Using this function sequence programs can be easily created Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a Main unit 4AD e BFM direct 4AD specification e TO instruction aVy NeX3 Avy ONEXA e BFM direct specification e TO instruction Sequence program A e BFM direct specification e FROM A D instruction conversion conversion e BFM direct specification e FROM instruction da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Analog data Analog data Flowmeter pressure sensor etc var nex4 MI 1 Since buffer memory direct specification ULI GL can directly specify the buffer memory in the source or destination area of an applied instruction programs can be created efficiently This function is supported only in FX3U FX3UC PLCs gt For a detailed description of buffer memory reading writing refer to Sectio
222. AN BFM 22 is set to ON i i Decimal Channel 2 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of F 102 Decimal BFM 22 is set to ON Subsection Channel 3 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of 5 4 19 103 BFM 22 is set to ON 7 i Decimal Channel 4 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of F 104 BFM 22 is set to ON i i Decimal 105 to 108 Not used hs i En Hexadeci Subsection 109 Minimum peak value resetting 3 H0000 mal 5 4 20 110 Not used Channel 1 maximum peak value Valid if b3 i AIN of BFM 22 is set to ON 7 2 Decimal Channel 2 maximum peak value Valid if b3 r 112 BFM 22 is set to ON Decimal erario Channel 3 maximum peak value Valid if b3 5 4 19 113 of BFM 22 is set to ON 7 Decimal Channel 4 maximum peak value Valid if b3 114 of BFM 22 is set to ON i i Decimal 115 to 118 Not used i F Hexadeci Subsection 119 Maximum peak value resetting 3 H0000 mal 5 4 20 120 to 124 Not used Peak values Minimum BFM 101 to 104 Maximum 111 to 114 automatic transfer Subsection 125 2 to first data register specification Valid if b4 of 0 to 7992 K200 at delivery Decimal 5 4 21 BFM 22 is set to ON Occupies of 8 HE consecutive points 1 Use bO to b2 2 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 3 Use b0 to b3 B 25 Q jo 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a dvvr onexs aVy NeX3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G
223. AUTION Do not bundle the control line together with or lay it close to the main circuit or power line As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit or power line Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to a special analog input adaptor or special analog extension block at one point on the PLC However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Noise may cause malfunctions Make sure to ground the shield wire or shield of the shielded cable connected to a special analog output adaptor or special analog extension block at one point on the analog device side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Noise may cause malfunctions Install module so that excessive force will not be applied to the power connectors or terminal blocks Failure to do so may result in wire damage breakage or PLC failure GHEE S2fcty Precautions SD Read these precautions before use 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out
224. Changes for the Better e MITSUBISHI PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS MELSECF USER S MANUAL Analog Control Edition FX3G FX3u FX3uc SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS Voltage Current Input FX3G 2AD BD FX3Uu 4AD FX3U 4AD ADP FX3uc 4AD Voltage Current Output FX3G 1DA BD FX3u 4DA FX3U 4DA ADP Voltage Current Input Output Mixture FX3U 3A ADP Temperature Sensor Input FX3U 4AD PT ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP GUI S2fcty Precautions ED Read these precautions before use Before installation operation maintenance or inspection of this product thoroughly read through and understand this manual and all of the associated manuals Also take care to handle the module properly and safely This manual classifies the safety precautions into two categories gt DANGER and XCAUTION DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in CAUTION medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Depending on the circumstances procedures indicated by may also cause severe injury It is important to follow all precautions for personal safety Store this manual in a safe place so that it can be taken out and read whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1 DESIGN PRECAUTIONS DANGER Make sure to have the following s
225. Changing of Input Characteristics C 26 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics ccccccceceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeees C 26 6 Troubleshooting C 29 6 1 PLC Version Number Check ur 20 nm rar er ele sets astra den ee ae fr meen skt fase ate C 29 6 2 Wiring Gheck ci a o o Dd SDR Ayn SEN ap a o gt te C 29 6 3 Special Device Check eee Se ad ee at eet ee a i C 30 6 4 Program Checklist a e loa C 30 6 5 Error Status Check muii arado C 31 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3c 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 1 Outline D 3 11 Outline of FUNCIONS 2 2 s24 8 sea e ae ena D 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccceeccceeeceeeeeeceeeeeteeeeeeeesneeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeeees D 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number cccccceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeenneeeetees D 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccccccssesccceeeessesseeeeeeeeseseessaeeeeeeesssssntaaeees D 5 2 Specifications D 6 2 1 Generic Specifications e ne n cnn cnn nn nn cnn cnn rre D 6 2 2 Performance Specifications cccconnooocccnnccononoooonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nro nnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnncnnnnnnrnncnnnns D 7 2 3 A D Conversion TIM E AET EA E Mn sen eg D 8 3 Wiring D 9 3 1 Terminal Layouts cts iba D 10 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque oooooccconnccccconcccccconno
226. D FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 2 Offset gain data change Set offset data and gain data to change the input characteristics The offset and gain data can be set for each channel If the voltage input mode is set write the offset and gain data in mV If the current input mode is set write the offset and gain data in pA To change the offset data or gain data turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 21 buffer memory for input characteristics writing The data setting range is shown in the following table Q o 3 5 o 5 gt 3 a SE Voltage input mV Current input uA SE Offset data 10000 to 9000 20000 to 170007 59 Gain data 9000 to 10000 17000 to 30000 1 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition Gain value Offset value gt 1000 2 The offset and gain values should meet the following condition 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 3 Cautions regarding offset gain data change If the analog value direct indication mode is used the input characteristics cannot be changed Even if the input characteristics are changed the actual valid input range will not be changed from 10V to 10V for the voltage input mode and from 20mA to 20mA for the current input mode da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Even if the input characteristics are changed the resolution will not increase gt For a detailed description of inp
227. DP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check MEMO K 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input A ANd OVt NEXA dady OL dVb NEX4 adv FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers UOHONSU did User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 88 ONS Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3Uu 4AD TC ADP special adapter 4 channel thermocouple input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION L 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapte
228. DP is on 2 Analog output line Use the 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 6 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the 4DA ADP are being used correctly 1 Output mode switching Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode 2 Output setting data Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 4DA ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 F 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 4 Program Check 6 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs 6 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 4DA ADP the corres
229. EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD a EEPROM z The maximum number of EEPROM rewrites is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not gt frequently write data to the above buffer memories BFM 2 TU a Mld dWy NeXW4 day B 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 2 BFM 2 to 5 Averaging time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K To change the channel data type from the immediate data channels 1 to 4 BFM 10 to 13 to the average data set the desired averaging time channels 1 to 4 BFM 2 to 5 The relation between the set averaging time and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table For a detailed description of channel data update timing refer to Subsection 5 4 4 Averaging time BFM Channel data BFM 10 to 13 type Error descriptions 2 to 5 Immediate data KO will be set and the averaging time 0 or less Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel setting error b10 of BFM 29 will data will be updated occur 4 initial Immediate data value Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel data will be updated Average data 2 to 400 Each time the A D conversion is performed t
230. END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters J 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLCs 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers eer ae ee FX3G Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion 250us 4ch Digital value reading A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 250us 4ch Oo Digital value reading w 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 250us and the
231. FX2N 1HC FX2N 1PG E FX2N 1PG FX2N 10PG The number of connectable units however depends on the type of main unit To check the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hard ware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system FX2NC Series special function block FXON Series special function block FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA FX2NC 1HC FXON 3A A 55 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ avr 9nex4 dvr nexs da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav Ve nexa mk day avi nex4 Ga dav Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual 4 Peripheral unit Abbreviation generic name Peripheral unit Description Peripheral unit Programming tool Programming tool Generic name for programming software handy programming panel and display units Generic name for programming software and handy programming panel Programming software Generic name for Programming software GX Developer D5C GPPW J and SW Generic name for SW software packages D5C GPPW E programming Handy programming panels HPP 5 Manual Abbreviation generic name Generic name for the following models FX 30P FX 20P FX 20P E Description FX3G hardware manual FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3u hardware manual FX3
232. FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC ccecceeceeeeeeceeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeeeesaeeneeeaeeaaes B 22 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM c ccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeecaeeeeeecacecescaeeeeeeaeeeseseeeeessneeeseeeeees B 23 5 4 Buffer Memory DetalilS occccnoccccnnccccccnnonooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnncnnnnnn rn rrnnnnnnnnnn nn rrnrnnannnnns B 27 5 4 1 BFM 0 Input mode Specification oooocooninncccnnnnnnccccccnoconcconcnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnn nn cn nnnann nn nn cnn anannnnnnnnnnnns B 27 5 4 2 BFM 2 to 5 Averaging time cccccecceceeeecececeeeeceeaeeeeeeseeaeceeeescaeeeeeeeecaeaeeeeseseeaeeeeeeseeeeeeees B 28 5 4 3 BFM 6 to 9 Digital filter Setting eee eee eeeneeceeeeeeeneeeesaaeeceeeaeesaeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeesneeeeeneeeennaees B 29 5 4 4 BFM 10 to 13 Channel data oooocccccccnincnncnconoconcncnncnononnnnn cnn corran c cnn rana narran mann B 30 5 4 5 BFM 19 Data change disable ooococcconnnncccnncononcconnonnnnono corno nnn naar nn r a rr rr B 31 5 4 6 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status u u u u dsssssesee ennen nunne B 31 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics WritiMQ oooooooccccnnncccncnnnnoccocccncnononncnncnonnnnnnncnonnnnn nn cnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnns B 31 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function Setting cccccceceeeeceeceeeeceeaeceeeeeeeaeceeceseaaeaeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeaeenea B 32 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error Status 0 0 eee sees senere ner
233. FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC Wiring Special devices Programs Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible Check the version number of the FX3UC Series The version number should be 1 30 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The PTW ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the PTW ADP is on 2 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor cable Separate the cable of the platinum resistance thermometer from other power cables or inductive cables For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the PTW ADP are correctly used 1 Temperature
234. FX3G PLC Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement temperature data to D100 Stores the current value of the channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 K 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 9 Basic Program Example For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101 respectively The averaging time will be set to 32 for channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 M8002 RST D8268 6 M8001 M8260 M8002 M8000 no Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Selects Pt1000 Sets the averaging time to 32 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 128 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement temperature data to D100 Stores the current value of the channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction K 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control
235. FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions This section describes a program that uses the 4AD convenient functions BFM 22 1 Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 2 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 Averaging time For all the channels the averaging time should be set to 1 default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program Digital filter function For all channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program Convenient functions The upper lower limit detection function upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function over scale status data automatic transfer function and error status data automatic transfer function should be used Device assignment Device Description inp
236. FX3u 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 Outline E 3 11 Outlineof FUNCHONS 000 ae Sa ee ee Ae ee As E 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccceccceeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessneeeess E 4 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 2 cccceeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceseeeeeeeecaeeeeecneeeeeseeeeeeeeeaees E 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccccecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeesteessseess E 5 2 Specifications E 6 2 1 Generic Specifications aiie E a E r E a e a aE E 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseneetsneeeees E 7 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccccecceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeecaeeeeeecaceceseeaeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeesenseneneeeees E 7 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 cccsesccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceaeeeeseeeeeeecaeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees E 8 3 Wiring E 9 3 17 Terminal Layout iii An E 10 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque ccccsccceeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeccaeeeeseneeeeeseneeeessaees E 10 3 3 Wiring to Power Supply Terminals essensen nerne renerne E 11 3 3 1 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 0 0 cee cecceeeeeeeecenneeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeaeeesneeeenaaeeeeeaaeesseeesenaeeeeaees E 11 3 3 2 Cautions regarding wiring to the power supply terminals ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeaaes E 11 SA An
237. G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input da dv2 9 x4 var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI gt lt Foreword F i A 5 This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3G 2AD BD analog input 5 expansion board 2 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward y it to the end user E 5 53 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent 3 licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property a rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MId TV NEXd dady D 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input D 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3G 2AD BD referred to as the 2AD BD 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3G 2AD BD is an analog expansion board Connect the FX3G 2AD BD to the FX3G Series PLC to read 2 channels of voltage current data 1 Upto 2 1 2AD BD units can be connected to the FX3G S
238. HOOOO cre Ho Setting value Output mode Analog output range Digital input range 0 Voltage output mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 q voltage output sae 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 analog value mV specification mode 2 Current output mode OmA to 20mA 0 to 32000 3 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 oa OMA to 20mA 0 to 20000 analog value pA specification mode F Channel not used For a detailed description of the standard output characteristics refer to Section 2 4 For a detailed description of the output mode BFM 0 refer to Subsection 5 4 1 E 13 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvv onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdar nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nex oe dqy a Mld TVt NEXd day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures 3 Creation of sequence program Create the program as follows to output analog signals e While referring to step 2 set the output mode H e While referring to step 1 set the unit number in Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs Output mode step 2 Unit number step 1 Initial pulse M8002 Specify the output mode BFM 0 for channels 1to 4 RUN monitor M8000 Data to be output to channel 1 is written in DO Data to be output to channel 2 is written
239. Input 1 channel analog output varnexa MMI agaveoexy O aav avr nexs O ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Foreword ddv Ve nexs This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 3A ADP analog special adapter 2 channel analog input 1 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward 3 it to the end user 2 53 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent 3 licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property a rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MLld AYt NeX4 day H 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 3A ADP referred to as the 3A ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The analog special adapter FX3U 3A ADP receives voltage current data from 2 channels and outputs voltage current data from 1 channel when connec
240. Input Output 4 3 3 Specifications FXON 3A Voltage input FXON 3A Current input Voltage output Current output Number of input output 2ch ich points Analog input py OA OY DG 4mA to 20mA DC OV to OVDE 4mA to 20mA DC tput range pete De Input resistance 2509 ON ov Be External load 5002 pupu 9 Input resistance 200kQ i External load 1k to 1MQ i Absolute 0 5V 2mA A 15V 60mA Offset 2 3 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 If the digital value is 0 S OV to 1V OmA to 4mA OV to 1V 4mA 4983 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 If the digital value is 250 Gar 5V to 10V 20mA 5V to 10V 20mA Digital input 0 to 250 0 to 250 output 8 bits binary 8 bits binary Resolution 40mV 10Vx1 250 64yA 16mAx 1 250 40mV 10Vx 1 250 64uA 16mAx1 250 Overall 0 1V 0 16mA 0 1V 0 16mA accuracy Time required for conversion TO instruction processing time x 2 FROM instruction processing time operation synchronized with sequence program 255 7 Dob peer 250 7 Le 10V 7 20MAg 7 id 5 id es z id e tet 5 gt 5 tot 5 155 2 5 lt 5 E o i vO 5 3 S lo i E i characteristics 5 D a i 719 lt i 719 O A a g i iS ama Co 0 10V 0 4mA
241. K gt Y gt o Sz A 41 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 4 FX3U 4AD TC ADP Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Thermocouple type K or J input signal JIS C 1602 1995 e EA Sask EFS Digtal output Type 1000 to 16000 Type 1480 to 111120 Resolution i A Pc i aS o Overall accuracy 0 5 for full scale 1 C Time required for FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 200us Data updated every scan time e FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time conversion Type K Type K eres O ss Corman 18320 T5 e as ra o LO co 148 F oo 2 gt 1000 C 5 0 gt 1832 F 2 Temperature 8 Temperature MT 1000 1779 1480 1660 Input characteristics P Type J Type J eG eta a Tee VAY O 7 9 2 rr eee eatery 11120 Ku a gt Za a G3 uw o 2 1 2 0 gt 600 C oc O gt 1112 F Temperature AR 1480 Mmperature E 1000 aei 1660 Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 0 points This number of po
242. K2080 or value other than K2080 Initial value at delivery K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a Disables adjustment of the following BFMs Input mode specification BFM 0 Initialization function BFM 20 US Input characteristics writing BFM 21 e Convenient functions BFM 22 SE e Offset data BFM 41 to 44 Gain data BFM 51 to 54 36 Automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 125 to 129 e Data history sampling time setting BFM 198 Set the value of BFM 19 Data change disable as follows Set value Description K2080 Data change enabled Value other than K2080 Data change disabled 1 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM gt For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 5 46 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status Setting range KO or K1 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K var nex4 MI Use this function to initialize all data in BFM 0 to 6999 to the factory default status Set value Description KO Normal K1 Initializes all data Set K1 to initialize all data When initialization is complete KO will be set automatically 1 Caution regarding initialization function setting It takes a
243. M For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid l z T gt 3 U a x lt E gt P gt U FE B 57 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function 7 3 Program That Uses Data History Function This section describes a program that uses the data history function of the 4AD Conditions The sequence program described in this section is created under the following functions 1 2 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 Averaging time For all the channels the averaging time should be set to 1 default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the averaging time in the sequence program Digital filter function For all channels the digital filter function should be disabled default To use the default value it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program Data history function For all channels the data sampling time should be set to 100 ms The sampling cycle should be 100 ms x 4 number of selected channels 400 ms
244. N Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the
245. Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the following operation will be performed Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a e If new value previous value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will turn on OVy INEXA aVy NeX3 e If previous value new value gt abrupt change detection value The direction bit will turn on gt For a detailed description of abrupt change detection status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 1 Assignment of each bit of BFM 27 For the abrupt change detection function of each channel the and directions are assigned as shown in the following table da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Bit No Channel number Description bO an direction for abrupt change detection b1 direction for abrupt change detection b2 h3 direction for abrupt change detection b3 direction for abrupt change detection b4 a direction for abrupt change detection E b5 direction for abrupt change detection x b6 apa direction for abrupt change detection E b7 direction for abrupt change detection Z b8 to b15 Not used 2 Caution regarding use of abrupt change detection status data e To use the abrupt change status data be sure to turn o
246. ON Special data register TA Description ist 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register If the averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output If the averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 gt For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter
247. PLC Input extension block FX3uc Series PLC Main unit Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector al Termin block L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit L 13 A ANd OVt NEXA dav OL dVb NEX4 adv d uojongsu did Sm 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 4 Selection of the Thermocouple 3 4 Selection of the Thermocouple 3 4 1 Thermocouple type There are 2 types of thermocouples K type and J type When selecting the thermocouple type make sure that the same type of thermocouple is connection to all the channels Be sure to use a non grounded thermocouple type 3 4 2 Compensating lead wire To connect the thermocouple use one of the following types of compensating lead wires Thermocouple Type of compensating lead wire Type K KX KCA KCB KCC Type J JX e The compensating lead wire indicates a temperature value of approximately 0 12 C higher than that of the wire resistor 100 Use the appropriate compensating lead wire when considering this difference
248. PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 5 Details of table output error 2 Cautions regarding table output errors Errors in data table When the data table in the PLC contains an error the error can be detected during transfer of the data to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA In this case the error code BFM 90 is K1111 and the device number is written as the error source BFM 91 If an error is caused in the data table by directly rewriting the data in BFM after the data table is transferred the error can be detected when the table is output using incorrect data In this case the error code BFM 90 is K112 and the BFM number is written as the error source BFM 91 Error during transfer of the data table While transferring of the data table an error error codes K31 to K33 does not occur even when the BFM 80 table output function start stop is set to a value out of the setting range An error occurs after the completion of the transfer of the data table Error during output of the table Even if the output value is scaled over during output of the table the output of the table will not be stopped However while the output value is scaled over b10 scale over of the error status BFM 29 stays on When an error error codes K122 to K172 K31 to K33 occurs during output of the table the output of the table is cancelled and the analog output
249. PLC equipment ae equipment PLC equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG14 2mm The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Output FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures 4 Analog Output This chapter describes the minimum programming necessary for analog output by the FX3U 4DA Follow the procedure below to confirm that correct analog values can be output 4 1 Analog Output Procedures 1 Unit number check Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left When the units blocks are connected to the FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC the unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned Check the unit number assigned to the FX3U 4DA Unit Unit Unit number 0 number 1 number 2 Main unit Input output FX3u Series extension PLC 3 e Input output Special Special extension Special block function block function block block function unit 2 Output mode BFM 0 setting Depending on the analog signal generator to be connected set the output mode BFM 0 for each channel Use hexadecimal numbers for output mode setting Set the corresponding channel digit to the output mode setting value specified in the following table
250. Power Supply Specifications ccccsccccceceeeesssseeeeeeeeesseseeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseseeseaeeeeeessseeeeeeeess H 6 2 3 Performance Specifications cecccccccesccceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaceeeeceaeeeeseaeeeesecaeeeeseeeeeseceeeeeseeneeseeaeeees H 7 2 4 Conversion Time ui ia Eaei H 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC onccccniccccconnncccnnnnnnccnnononancnnnanann nono nac nono nana no nana nancnnincnns H 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC sce cecececceececenecceceeeeeeeeeceeecesaeaeeeecesaaaeeeeeesasaeaeseeseecueeeeeeeeenaeeeess H 9 3 Wiring H 10 S Terminal Layouts rt En ones SERENE Ree Aaa ie Re tiie A Ane H 11 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ooooooccccccccnnncooonnnnnnnnononanoncnnnncnnnnnnnononnnnnnnns H 12 3 3 Power Supply Line e ECO E a H 13 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3G FX3U Series PLC oooocconocccccnnonocccnnnnncccnnnnannnonona cnn nn nnna cnn nn nana nano nanacnnns H 13 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC ooooococconccccccccococccccccnononncnccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnannnns H 13 3 4 Analog Input output Line re netit ate ERE near cnn name nn RR nnnnn nn rnnnnrnnnnnnins H 14 3 4 1 Analog Input LINE neinn a caes H 14 3 42 Analog Output Mei elites ieee inn a a E aaa aE ae e eee H 14 IO GrOUNGING siii a Pe ee eee de de Ace ee heirs cat at Sars ste H 15 4 Programming H 16 4 1 Loading Writing of Conversion Data cccccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
251. Series PLC For a detailed description Contents Special devices o iS refer to Output mode Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 dial switching 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer to Output setting data Section 4 8 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 ESSEN Error status gt 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used F 3 Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Qvr onex4 Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 M da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav vdv nex4 dQv VE NeX4 mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Ca dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog output using the 4DA ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4DA ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Refer to Chapter 2 Specificatio
252. Switching of Input Mode Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the input mode of 2AD BD between the current input mode and the voltage input mode To switch the input mode use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay or Description 1st board 2nd board M8260 M8270 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF Voltage input M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON Current input 1 Program Example To switch the channel input mode create a sequence program as follows 2 To switch the input mode of channel 2 of the 1st analog board to the current 1 To switch the input mode of channel 1 of the 1st analog board to the voltage input mode input mode M8001 M8000 a E a Normally OFF Normally ON D 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 4 Input Data 4 4 Input Data S 5 S Numeric data type Decimal K g The data converted by the 2AD BD will be stored in the special data registers S The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table B Special data register xx Description e 1st board 2nd board Res D8260 D8270 Stores the channel 1 input data 57 D8261 D8271 Stores the channel 2 input data The converted A D immediate data or averaged data data average conforming to the specified averaging x time will be stor
253. This Manual 1 Main unit Abbreviation generic name PLC FX Series PLC Description Generic name for the FXo FXos FX1s FXoN FX1N FX1 FX2 FX FX2N FX3G FX3u FX1NC FX2NC and FX3uc Series PLC FX3G Series Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC FX3G Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3G Series PLC main unit FX3u Series Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC FX3U Series PLC or main unit Generic name for the FX3U Series PLC main unit FX3uc Series Generic name for the FX3uc Series PLC FX3uc Series PLC or main unit Abbreviation generic name Generic name for the FX3uc Series PLC main unit 2 Expansion board and special adapter Description Expansion board Expansion board Generic name for analog expansion board communication expansion board special adapter connection expansion board and variable analog potentiometer expansion board Analog expansion board Generic name for 2AD BD 1DA BD 2AD BD FX3G 2AD BD 1DA BD FX3G 1DA BD Communication expansion board Generic name for 232BD 422BD 485BD and USBBD 232BD FX3U 232 BD FX3G 232 BD FX2N 232 BD FX1N 232 BD 422BD FX3uU 422 BD FX3G 422 BD FX2N 422 BD FX1N 422 BD 485BD FX3uU 485 BD FX3G 485 BD FX2N 485 BD FX1N 485 BD USBBD FX3u USB BD Variable analog potentiometer expansion board 8AV BD Generic name for 8AV BD FX3G 8AV BD Special adapter connection board or connect
254. Types of Analog Products 2 1 3 Special function block The special function block uses buffer memory BFM to send receive data to from the PLC 1 FX3U Series PLC e Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3U Series PLC Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected PLC Analog special function block for FX3U FX2N and FXON MITSUBISHI Mee ET har Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters gt For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 2 FX3uc Series PLC e Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3uc Series PLC In some cases FX2NC CNV IF or FX3uc 1PS 5V may be needed for connection e Up to 8 1 special function blocks can be connected PLC FX3uUC or FX2NC Analog FX3U FX2N or FXON Analog special function block FX3uC 1PS 5V special function block or FX2NC CNV IF 990900590 s000808000 Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters 1 Up to 7 special function units blocks can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Select either FX3uc 1PS 5V or FX2NC CNV IF considering the current components consumption gt For a detailed description of the system con
255. U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 Programming 4 12 Basic Program Example 4 12 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to input output analog conversion data FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 The program also sets voltage output for output channels and sets the D A conversion output to D102 M8001 Normally OFF M8000 Normally ON M8001 FNC 12 D8288 K4M0 M8002 Initial pulse ELO cz FNC 12 K4MO D8288 FNC 12 e eee i FNC 12 i FNC 12 cia eat Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D102 1 1st for the FX3G PLC M8000 Set the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V Set the input mode of channel 2 to the current input mode 4 mA to 20 mA Set the output mode to the voltage output mode 0 V to 10 V Set the output holding function Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Set the averaging time to 5 for channe
256. U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 Buffer Memory Details S 5 4 1 BFM 0 Output mode specification Z Initial value at delivery H0000 B Numeric data type Hexadecimal H wy ee Specify the output modes of channel 1 to 4 SE 4 hexadecimal digits are assigned to specify the output modes of the 4 channels ae Change the value of each digit to change the output mode of each channel 0 to 4 and F can be set for each digit HOOOO nd hon The different types of output modes are shown in the following table gt For a detailed description of output characteristics refer to Section 2 4 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O e ig Output mode Analog output range Digital input range 0 Voltage output mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 17 voltage otitput ER 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 analog value mV specification mode Current output mode OmA to 20mA 0 to 32000 x Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 E gt 4 ure nb Apu vor OMA to 20mA 0 to 20000 analog value uA specification mode 5toE Invalid setting values unchanged F Channel not used 1 The offset gain values cannot be changed 1 Cautions regarding output mode setting While the output mode is being changed the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of change of the outp
257. UAL product 2 f and installation and also describes various programs EX2N 4AD Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 4AD analog input a JY992D65201 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S GUIDE product i and installation and also describes various programs EX2N 2AD Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 2AD analog input 3 JY992D74701 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S GUIDE product 3 i and installation and also describes various programs Analog output unit SEM hace rr Supplied Langin board hardware such as specifications ard INSTALLATION MANUAL product PAPASI i P installation FAU ADA JY997D20801 Supplied with Sane nae ie Soe aks INSTALLATION MANUAL product pes i i P and installation EDA ADE JY997D14001 Supplied with Lely a Sentra RR a ea a USER S MANUAL product Pere P installation EX2NC 4DA Supplied with This manual describes the FX2Nc 4DA analog output JY997D07601 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S MANUAL product y i and installation and also describes various programs EX2N 4DA Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 4DA analog output i JY992D65901 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S GUIDE product i and installation and also describes various programs FX2N 2DA Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 2DA analog output P JY992D74901 special function block hardware suc
258. UC Series 36 8 Applied Instruction Edition P y PLC ag dyz X4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI ddv ve nex4 s da Vd1 9 x4 e dav var nexs TI day avi nex4 Co dav Mld A 51 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 6 2 Description of Related Manuals 6 2 3 Manuals of analog units The manuals of various analog units are described below Manual type Analog input unit Document number Supplied with product or supplied separately Description This manual describes the FX3G 2AD BD analog input FX3G 2AD BD Supplied with P eee INSTALLATION MANUAL JY997D33501 product expansion board hardware such as specifications and installation O JY997D20701 Supplied with Be rada er Seas INSTALLATION MANUAL product DEG i SSR and installation and also describes various programs a ivesratasor Someta aa adapter hardware such as specifications an USER S MANUAL product AR P installation FX2NC 4AD Supplied with This manual describes the FX2NC 4AD analog input JY997D07801 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S MANUAL product A f and installation and also describes various programs EXon 8AD Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 8AD analog input JY992D86001 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S MAN
259. UC Series PLC either the FX2NC CNV IF or FX3uc 1PS 5V is required 2 Connectable with the FX3UC Series PLC only 3 The offset and gain of the FX3U 4AD FX3uc 4AD FX2Nc 4AD and FX2N 8AD cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value direct indication mode 4 The offset and gain of the FX3u 4DA cannot be adjusted for channels using the analog value mV or A specification mode 5 Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product A 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models No of a Refer Type hadas Range Resolution Function Gres Voltage current input output mixture Voltage 0 32mV Input 10V to 10V DC with sign 16 bits combined use of voltage and 4ch Current 1 254A current is possible 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 15 bits i EXON 5A g The atfol gah can be J Voltage 5mV adjusted Output 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits The scaling function is 4ch Current 201A incorporated OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 40mV Input OV to 10V DC 8bits 2ch Current 64uA The input format is common to 2 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits channels 3A 1 4 FXON SA Voltage 40mV The offset gain can be adjusted 2 Output OV to 10V DC 8bits Common to 2 input channels 1ch Current 64uA 4mA to 20mA DC 8bits Temperature sensor input Type K 0 1 C Combined use
260. Unit number 0 to 7 e Es Buffer memory number 0 3098 38 OK 35 U 1 Example 1 If the following program is created data in buffer memory BFM 10 of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data K10 and then the multiplication result will be output to the data registers D10 D11 READ command FNC 22 uncio Kio D10 MUL Unit number TES Multiplication result Buffer memory number Multiplier 2 Example 2 If the following program is created the value in the data register D20 is added to K10 and written to buffer memory BFM 6 of unit 1 WRITE command FNC 20 D2 K1 11G6 M Addition Unit number result Buffer memory number Augend Addend 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction FX3G FX3u FX3uc PLC da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdar nexs 1 FROM instruction Reading out BFM data to PLC Use FROM instruction to read out the data from the buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows READ command FNC 78 K1 K10 D1 K1 Pow S ee i Number of transfer Unit number ERA points Buffer memory number Transfer to register ae varoexa G davvaynexa TI er gt lt If the above program is created 1 point of data will be read out from the buffer memory BFM 10 of unit No 1 T to the data register D10 s U 2 TO instruction Writing PLC data into BFM Use the TO instruction to write data to a buffer memory In a sequence program use this instruction as follows gt lt WRITE comm
261. Voltage current output Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits Current 4mA to 20mA DC 104A 11bits Combined use of voltage and current inputs is possible var nexa MI FX3U 4DA ADP 4ch Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits Current 4mA to 20mA DC Voltage current input output mixture Input 2ch FX3U 3A ADP Output 1ch Temperature sensor input Voltage OV to 10V DC 4uA 12bits 2 5mV 12bits Current 4mA to 20mA DC Voltage OV to 10V DC 5uA 12bits 2 5mV 12bits Current 4mA to 20mA DC 4uA 12bits Combined use of voltage and current outputs is possible Combined use of voltage current inputs and voltage current output is possible aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4ch Pt100 50 C to 250 C 0 1 C Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 The product can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4ch Pt100 100 C to 600 C 0 2 C to 0 3 C Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 The product can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4ch FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4ch Pt1000 50 C to 250 C Ni1000 45 C to 115 C Type K 100 C to 1000 C 0 1 C 0 4 C Type J 100 C to 600 C 0 3 C Compatible with the input sensor Pt1000 and Ni1000 The product can be switched between Centigrade
262. Wiring FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 2AD BD are arranged as follows Signal V1 11 V2 12 VI Channel 1 Channel 2 COM analog input analog input terminal Application D 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown Ww sw UOWWOD gt below 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque SS z OR Wire size stranded Tightening Termination bS single wire torque o Single wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm2 To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable ee AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection C 3 To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection x Cc p P 0 22N mto Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 9 3mm to 0 5mm 0 25Nem recommended terminal z with abe to 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 insulation Se er 3 the i ate Caulking tool sleeve Bini pee SOAWMIN BAS CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact ollowing
263. X3U 4DA Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA Analog special function blocks for the FX2N FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC Analog special function blocks for the FXoN FXON 3A A 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 2 FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC Aj E g and D represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with your PLC Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition SW9 UOWWOJ i To connect the special adapters f or the expansion boards BB Prefer to Subsection 3 2 1 2 dvr onexs dvr nexs European terminal block European terminal block Analog input Special function QA AA eFlowmeter block for FX2nc Pressure sensor eSignal converter etc da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O European terminal block Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input var nexa MI eThermocouple ePlatinum resistance A thermometer European terminal block sensor Pt100 5 2 D fe 2 o a i nn x O to ro lt e lt S D o 0 N o E o or Special func
264. X3UC Series PLC FNC224 D8269 K11 7010 Checks the model code of the st LD analog special adapter K 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 9 Basic Program Example 4 9 Basic Program Example 3 E E Create the following basic program to read out the temperature measurement data 5 gt For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC GR The following program will select Pt1000 and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 L and 2 of the 3rd adapter in the D100 and the D101 respectively The averaging time will be set to 32 for ES channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 ES M8000 LE MOV D8288 K4MO Se Normally Y ON M M8002 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter 3 Initial b6 OFF hardware error BE pulse Error status of 3rd analog special ze adapter OF b7 OFF communication data error amp gt Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Selects Pt1000 Sets the averaging time to 32 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 128 for channel 2 data M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8284 E FNC 12 K128 D8285 MP FNC 12 D8280 D100 E FNC 12 D8281 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction 4 1st for the
265. Xd day D 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general and performance specifications for the 2AD BD 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm el The Bae Tests 10 times in each Vibration DIN Rail Mounting i direction X Y and Z resistance 57 150 4 9 axis directions Total 10 to 57 0 075 ca Direct Mounting 57 to 150 9 8 MH Shock 147 m s2 Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1s Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz G di Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less roundin g lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 2 Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 3 altitude lt 2000m 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 12 Other Other Other PLC equipment PLC equipment PUG eq
266. a of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 TC ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 TC ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value of thermocouple type K is not in the range between 110 C to 1010 C or the temperature measurement value of thermocouple type J is not in the range between 110 C to 610 C Or the line between TC ADP and the thermocouple is disconnected 2 Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified rang
267. a per of 4 channel will be subject to D A conversion which takes 200us after which the analog data will be output END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters F 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 2 4 D A Conversion Time 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 9 1 D A conversion and special data register update timing g D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC a During execution of the END instruction the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers B performs D A conversion of the data and updates the analog output data ma S SE eae DE AR nd FX3G Series PLC E E iw Sequence program Digital value D A writing conversion D A conversion 250us start command 4ch END instruction D A Digital value writing did D A conversion 250us 4ch start command da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 2 D A conversion during PLC stop E If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be Y output E If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be a latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins 3 If two analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data in all the connecte
268. a register will be set to D100 2 FNC 79 The over scale status data automatic transfer to data KO K128 K101 K1 register will be set to D101 2 TOR The error status data automatic transfer to data register avvr onexs Reads the digital values of channels 1 to 4 from BFM 10 to 13 into DO to D3 K1 K4 Clearance of upper lower limit error data X000 On H0003 Clearance of upper lower limit error data Clearance of over scale data X001 RUN monitor M8000 K2Y000 K2Y010 7020 The error detection signal will be output to Y020 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI The upper lower limit error status data of each channel will be output to YOOO to YO07 The over scale status data of each channel will be output to YO10 to Y017 Error detection MO Setting error detection M8 The setting error detection signal will be output to YO21 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI setting H After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time 7 TO K50 again 2 The set input mode convenient functions upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register number over scale status data automatic transfer to data register number and error y status data automatic transfer to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPRO
269. aa A 33 4 2 0 FX3G 1DABD usina acct guess pac cti edad ccoo Eolica A 34 4 3 Mixed Analog Input OutpUt ooocconccccnnncccccnnnocccnonnncnnnnnnononnnnnnnn near cnn nnnnn nn near nn nrnnn nn nnnnnn rn rare A 35 433 1 EXBUSBACADP A iia A 35 AB NN A 36 4 3 9 O A A 38 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input ccccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeaeeeessaeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeaees A 39 4431 FXSU 4AD PIHAD PE ds A 39 4 4 2 FX3U 4AD PTWADP cccccccccsssssceceecececececeeceececececescaceusuaueeeaueuacauacececeeeescececessaaeausueeuauauaeaeass A 40 4 4 3 FX3U4AD PNK ADP csi aiii A 41 44 4 EXSUS4AD 9GC AD mE ere es a AAT A 42 440 EX2N GADE Rite as eee eee en ee e Diy eet a Me A 43 4A 0 FX2N 4ADERT O r a a a ohne Late A 44 VAT SE X2NeBAD ina nat ii nl A 45 AAB FEX2N GA a e Lo alana Dd ek A 46 5 Version Number A 47 DACPECMa Unit saca titi ro ti ds A 47 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial number Check Method ccccccccseesseeseeceeeecececeeaueeseeeseeeeeeeseaaeaneeeesees A 47 RN Su to AN A 48 5 2 Special adapter iii es eon Ae ete ene A 48 5 2 1 Manufacturer s serial number Check Method cccccccceeeeseeseeeeecececeaeeaueesseeeeeeeeeseeaueaaeeessess A 48 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment A 49 6 1 How to Use the ManualSi concursante lie ee eae A 49 6 2 Description of Related Manuals
270. afety circuits outside of the PLC to ensure safe system operation even during external power supply problems or PLC failure Otherwise malfunctions may cause serious accidents 1 Most importantly have the following an emergency stop circuit a protection circuit an interlock circuit for opposite movements such as normal vs reverse rotation and an interlock circuit to prevent damage to the equipment at the upper and lower positioning limits 2 Note that when the PLC CPU detects an error such as a watchdog timer error during self diagnosis all outputs are turned off Also when an error that cannot be detected by the PLC CPU occurs in an input output control block output control may be disabled External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that the output current of the service power supply for sensors varies depending on the model and the absence presence of extension blocks If an overload occurs the voltage automatically drops inputs in the PLC are disabled and all outputs are turned off External circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case Note that when an error occurs in a relay triac or transistor output device the output could be held either on or off For output signals that may lead to serious accidents external circuits and mechanisms should be designed to ensure safe machinery operation in such a case C
271. ailures or malfunctions FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition Manual revision G Date 6 2009 Foreword This manual describes the analog function of the MELSEC F FX Series programmable controllers and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Outline Precautions e This manual provides information for the use of the FX3U Series Programmable Controllers The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associated with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill th
272. al adapter and the special function block Subsequent subsections explain differences among analog products 2 1 1 Expansion board The analog expansion board uses PLC devices to send receive data to from the PLC 1 FX3G Series PLC Connect analog expansion boards to option connectors of an FX3G PLC e Upto ga analog expansion boards can be connected PLC Analog expansion board CE MITSUBISHI Wis FXac 40M For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type When two analog expansion boards are connected to the FX3G Series PLC 40 point or 60 point type analog special adapters are not available in the main unit A 5 SW9 UOWWOJ dvr nex4 WW dvr onex4 da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI ddv ve nex4 L da Vd1 9 x4 O dav var nexs TI dqy Mu1d dWy NE X4 dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Types of Analog Products 2 1 2 Special adapter The analog special adapter uses PLC devices to send receive data to from the PLC 1 FX3U Series PLC e Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3U Series PLC e An expansion board is needed to connect the
273. al devices of the FX3U F X3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If the data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 Writing of D A Conversion Data 1 The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the output mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest the main unit gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 e FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Communic High speed FX3u 3A FX3u 3A FX3u 3A ation FX3u 3A input output ADP ADP ADA a A e FXau FXauc Series PLC Special devices AID Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 or COo IL Special data registers D A D8260 to D8269 E Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 rl LU special data registers D A D8270 to D8279 Sequence E program Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 ERE ti D A D8280 to D8289 1 B mi Special auxiliary relays A D o IED speci data registers Ay EE The analog special adapter nearest to the main
274. al power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not 56 necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications gt x lt gt Y Items E Centigrade C Fahrenheit F d Inbut sional 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor D case Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 x lt Rated temperetire 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F 9 range gt O Digital output 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Resolution 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 4 F to 0 5 F 0 5 for full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 1 0 for full scale when ambient temperature is in the range from 0 to 55 C Total accuracy e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 200us The data will be updated at every scan time AD conversion e FX3G Series PLC 250us The data will be updated at every scan time var nex4 MI time gt For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 O 11390 F O i 11120 4 gt E E i 10 ie Input i ito i 18 5 icti 1 lo toi U characteristics 100 C 0 MES TY G gii 600 C E 1112 F i 1000 y 1480 x Eran 1150 Lo 1750 Oo a es iw The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input Insulation method pie H e Channels are not insulated f
275. al pulse RUN monitor Data to be output to channel 1 is written in DO Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1 Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2 Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3 ne FNC 79 KO KO H2300 K1 fraggle ete aa eel Ae Transfer H2300 to BFM 0 output modes of channels 1 to 4 ch1 and ch2 Voltage output 10 to 10 V output mode O ch3 Current output 4 mA to 20 mA output mode 3 M8000 K50 ch4 Current output 0 mA to 20 mA output mode 2 Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4 in DO to D3 in the following ranges DO and D1 32000 to 32000 D2 and D3 0 to 32000 DO gt BFM 1 output to channel 1 D1 BFM 2 output to channel 2 D2 gt BFM 3 output to channel 3 D3 gt BFM 4 output to channel 4 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After the output mode is specified if the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 E 56 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions 8 2 Example of Program using Useful Functions This section describes a practical program that uses the disconnection detection function BFM 28
276. ale is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Z Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from memory BFM 128 KO BFM 22 b7 ON BFM 28 gt D B 36 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 12 BFM 29 Error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Error data is assigned to the bits of BFM 29 1 BFM 29 Bit Assignment Bit No Item Description bO Error detection If any bits between b2 and b4 are turned on bO will turn on b1 b2 Power supply error The 24 V power is not supplied properly Check the wiring condition or the voltage supplied b3 Hardware anor FX3uU 4AD FX3uc 4AD may be defective Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office The A D conversion value is abnormal b4 A D conversion error Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error channel b5 b6 BFM reading writing If change in the input characteristics is started this bit will turn on If impossible this bit b6 is on A D conver
277. ally output mode 0 V to 10 V OFF Sets the output holding function for the 1st board M8000 Sets the output mode of the 2nd board to the current Normally output mode 4 mA to 20 mA ON Cancels the output holding function for the 2nd board M8000 Ly Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D101 for the 2nd board FNC 12 E gt D109 RARO i in D100 for the 1st board FNC 12 D101 D8270 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored MOV Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 G 17 Ww sua UOWWOD gt dvr onex4 Qvp nexs varnexa MMI agaveoexy O aav avr nexs O dav var nex4 TI da Vd1 9 xX4 dQv VE NeX4 mia dady Mld Qyr NeXd Ca day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 5 Changing of Output Characteristics 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 5 Changing of Output Characteristics The output characteristics can be changed using sequence programs in FX3G Series PLCs 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 when analog output range is 1 to 5V to 0 to 10000 A specified digital value is inputted into D100 1 Output characteristics Voltage output
278. alog Output Wiring s 8 22 02 de ME eee el e once ee ae Bee ee tg E 12 3 5 OU tii isc E 12 4 Analog Output E 13 4 1 Analog Output Procedures ccccccccceeeenceeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaneeeeseaeeeeesaaeeeeseaeeseeseaeeeesenneeseaees E 13 5 Buffer Memory BFM E 15 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory ooooocccconccccccocccccnononocononancconanancnnnns E 15 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method ccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeeeneees E 16 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification FX3U FX3UC PLC onlly c ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees E 17 5 2 2 FROM TO instruction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC cecceeeceececeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeeneeseaeeenes E 17 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM c ccccceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaceeeeseaceceseeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeeesseesseeeeess E 18 5 4 Buffer Memory DetalilS occcconocccncccccccononoooncnnnncnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnn ai a a a aE ana aai Siea E 21 5 4 1 BFM 0 Output mode specification oe cece eeenee cere eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeenaeeseeeaeeenneeeseneeeenees E 21 5 4 2 BFM 1 to 4 Output data oo srati ierra eeatt aaia ereta rieren kopeke riea piia tiiat asrasin E 22 5 4 3 BFM 5 Output setting upon PLC StOP ooooccnnncccnnnoccnnoccnonnonncnnno non nnn cnn nan nn nano rra E 22 5 44 BEM 6 DUtpUtStatUS iii a e egene E 23 5 4 5 BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command
279. alog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 5 Cautions regarding data table transfer While the table output function is executed it is impossible to start transferring the data table The number of patterns is not transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA The transferred data table is stored in the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA The data table stored in FX3u 4DA will be erased when power is turned off Therefore it is necessary to transfer the data table after rebooting the power At completion of transfer BEM 99 will automatically change to H0000 Also when transfer is stopped due to an error BFM 99 will automatically change to H0000 When BFM 99 changes to H0000 check the error flag For a detailed description of errors related to table output refer to Subsection 6 5 If an error occurs during transfer of the data table the data up to the error is transferred Subsequent data is not transferred It is possible to write the data table directly in the buffer memory without using the data table transfer command BFM 99 In this case the correctness of the data table is not evaluated until the table is output by the table output start stop function BFM 80 If a data table with incorrect data is output the data up to the point where incorrect data occurs is output At the point where incorrect data occurs an error is register
280. alog output area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the analog output area from the power supply unit Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In output mode 1 or 4 however the offset gain cannot be adjusted ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset lt 10 V H 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition n 3 mA lt Gain Offset lt 30 mA Z gt gt 3 z T 2 93 z E gt P Lu es E 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 2 Specifications 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 2 4 Output Mode Characteristics BFM 0 For the FX3U 4DA there are two types of output characteristics voltage 10 to 10V and current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA output characteristics The output characteristics depend on the set output mode as described below 1 Voltage output characteristics 10 to 10V Output mode 0 1 Set output mode 0 Output type Voltage output Analog output range 10 to 10V Digital input range 32000 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set output mode 1 Output type Voltage
281. alue of changed D52 v coordinate X axis value start point i Zz i X A D converted digital value end pea K2000 D53 End point data 2000 D53 point y Digital output value of changed 40000 D54 FNC 12 coordinate X axis value end point MOV K10000 D54 M8000 ENC 259 D8260 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100 H 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 3 Example of program 2 FX3G Series PLC For example create the following program to change the digital input data D110 of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 M8280 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode M8000 OV to 10V FNC 12 D8288 K4MO MOV MERA Error status b6 OFF ca eee Error status b7 OFF E FNC 12 i K4MO D8288 M8000 FNC 12 Sets the averaging scaling to 1 MOV K1 D8284 for the channel 1 data M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D110 MOV FNC 230 D110 K400 FNC 237 D110 K2000 mio Check to make sure the digital LD gt AND lt value D110 is in range M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 fae ae Calculation for changing input bra D111 K10000 D112 characteristics Stores the operation result in D100 FNC 23 DDIV D112 K1600 D100 4 Cautions regarding programming GX Developer version 8 13P or later supp
282. an error occurs in the 3A ADP the corresponding bit will turn on ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error 3A ADP hardware error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 f 1 Power supply error included b2 Output data setting error b7 3A ADP communication data error b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error 4 3A ADP hardware error b6 is valid only when use of analog input is set Detection of power supply error is valid only when use of the analog input channel 2 is set 2 3A ADP communication data error b7 is valid only when use of analog input is set ddv ve nexs To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Over scale detection b0 b1 x 1 Description of error E The input analog value voltage or current value is outside the specified range 5 The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode 0 to 4080 or outside the range TU specified for the current input mode 0 to 3280 2 Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring a M1d dVb NeX4 day H 35 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 6 5 Error Status Check 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
283. and E FNC 79 H3300 o TO ES 3 SE of transfer Unit AP HER par points Buffer memory number Transfer source If the above program is created 1 point of data H3300 will be written to buffer memory BFM 0 of unit No 1 M1d dVb NeX4 day E 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM Buffer Memory List BFM FX3U 4DA incorporates the following buffer memories For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 and subsequent sections BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Ho Output mode setting for channels 1 to 4 2 H0000 at delivery diese O 1 Channel 1 output data KO Decimal 2 Channel 2 output data Depending on the KO Decimal Subsection 3 Channel 3 output data mode used KO Decimal 5 4 2 4 Channel 4 output data KO Decimal Hexadeci Subsection 4 P 5 Output setting upon PLC stop 3 H0000 iial 543 Hexadeci Subsection 6 Output status H0000 el 544 7 8 Not used 9 Command to write offset gain setting value of 4 40000 Hexadeci Subsection channels 1 to 4 mal 5 4 5 101 Channel 1 offset data Unit mV or A Decimal 1171 Channel 2 offset data Unit mV or A Depending on the Depending on Decimal Subsection 12 Channel 3 offset data
284. annel 3 R W 4 3 M8283 M8293 _ Switches the output mode of channel 4 R W M8284 M8294 Sets the cancel of the channel 1 output R W holding function Special auxiliary relay M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of the channel 2 output R W holding function Section 4 4 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of the channel 3 output R W holding function M8287 M8297 Sets the cancel of the channel 4 output RIW holding function M8288 to M8298 to M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data R W D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data R W Section D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data R W 45 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data R W Special data D8284 to D8294 to used Do not use i E register D8287 D8297 D8288 D8298 Error status R W Seon D8289 D8299 Model code 2 R Ei 4 3 Switching of Output Mode Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the output mode of 4DA ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode To switch the output mode use the following special auxiliary relays FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage output M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON Current output M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of c
285. ansfer function b1 of BFM 60 If the upper lower limit automatic transfer data register is specified in BFM 62 the data in BFM 39 can be transferred to a specified data register Only when an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 5 4 15 BFM 40 Clearance of upper lower limit function status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI The flags can be reset by turning on the following bits of BFM 40 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 40 de F Bit Description bO Clearance of lower limit status G b1 Clearance of upper limit status b2 to b15 Invalid x 2 Operation to be performed after resetting E At the completion of status reset the bits of BFM 40 will automatically turn off a 5 TU a Mld dWy NeXW4 day E 31 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 16 BFM 41 to 44 Lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 45 to 48 Upper limit values of upper lower limit function Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K When the upper lower limit function
286. anual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other PLC equipment ae equipment PLC equipment l l oe Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible 1 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data PO E5 gt ___ 2 3 3 4 Programming z MR This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the PT ADP B Z al 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data S U U 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Communi High speed cation input output FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD special FX3u 4AD special PT ADP PT ADP PT ADP adapter PT ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC da dv2 9
287. apter and the CF card special adapter L 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data e FX3G Series PLC Communi FX3u 4AD cation FX3U 4AD Connector Th special 5 conversion asin adapter TCADE adapter FX3G Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 A D CO Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Sequence a Program Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 al Special data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter However in this case do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type L 17 dVr Nexs A ia U oz DA OL dVb NEX4 day uojongsu did Sm 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 Programming 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If TC ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table e FX3U FX3UC Series PLC R Read W Write i Device number Special Description Attribu
288. at role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with Mitsubishi Electric This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where ma
289. ata or averaged data data average conforming to the specified averaging 9 time will be stored in the above data registers as the input data amp When the channel is not used 0 will be stored w For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 9 1 Caution regarding input data Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool var nex4 MI 2 Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8000 dela D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 Ney 08261 Drot Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter set value or in a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 input data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs dqy a Mld dWy NEXW4 day H 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 8 Output Setting Data 4 8 Output Setting Data Numeric data type Decimal K The 3A ADP performs D A conversion on the output setting data digital data into analog data and outputs the analog data Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the ou
290. ation 5 0 lt ab gt lt gt Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 E 52 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristic FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics 7 Changing Output Characteristic For FX3u 4DA the standard output characteristics are provided for each output mode BFM 0 at the time of factory shipment Changing the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and gain data BFM 14 to 17 can change the output characteristics of each channel This chapter describes how to change the output characteristics Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics Cancel the setting change prohibition mode If setting change is prohibited write K3030 in BFM 19 The setting change prohibition mode will be canceled Determine the output mode BFM 0 Determine the output mode BFM 0 optimum for the selected channels and the voltage current specifications Set value HEX Output mode Analog output range Digital input range 0 Voltage output mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 Voltage output analog value mV specification mode Current output mode OmA to 20mA 0 to 32000 Current output mode 4mA to 20mA 0 to 32000 1 The characteristic cannot be changed Current output analog value pA 4 DON The characteristic cannot be changed specification mode 5
291. ation CS3 1 bit 2 is set to 1 A _ Variation gt 2 5 o 5 O Variation a Time Sampling time TS Alarm flag Y a S3 24 bit2 bit3 When the preset input output variation is exceeded Each bit of CS3 24 alarm flags turns ON immediately after PID instruction execution FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 Auto Tuning This chapter describes the auto tuning function of PID instruction The auto tuning function will automatically set the important constants such as the proportional gain and the integral time to ensure optimum PID control There are two auto tuning methods limit cycle method and step response method 4 1 Limit Cycle Method 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit cycle method Parameter Setting position Proportional gain KP CS3 3 Integral time TI 4 Differential time TD 6 M 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 1 Limit Cycle Method K 4 1 2 Auto tuning procedure a a 1 Set the forward or backward operation 53 A Set the operation direction flag bit 0 in the operation setting parameter ACT CS3 1 L 2 Select the auto tuning method limit cycle method 3 Set the auto tuning method to ON bit 6 in the operation setting
292. ation Half amplitude Hz m s mm ee 0307 Tos Tests 10 times in each Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z resistance 57 150 49 axis directions Total F 10 57 0 075 a Direct Mounti irect Mounting 57 150 9 8 i Shock a i i i wee 4 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less 9 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 4 altitude lt 2000m 4 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 When this block is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC the direct mounting method cannot be used 3 Other Other Other ee equipment PLC equipment PE equipment Ia il NA SEE Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of grounding refer to Section 3 5 4 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the FX3U 4DA as
293. ation is set to 500 ms The mode of FX2N 4AD TC is set Ch 1 Unused Ch 3 Unused Ch 2 K type Ch4 Unused Data is read from the channel 2 in FX2N 4AD TC The PID operation is initialized PID instruction is driven The PID operation is executed M 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control x E Auto tuning ON flag 3 M1 i 7 y FNC 12 Auto tuning operation is oz DSM BARD confirmed DA Auto tuning ON flag M14 PLF Auto tuning is finished Auto tuning is finished M2 RST The normal operation is started nexa FT oL dvy gt 5 d PID operation is executed w iw M3 gt 1246 Heater operation cycle as K2000 25 gs Heater operation cycle T246 RST T246 Preset PID operation is executed M3 T246 lt D502 PID operation is executed M3 FNC226 LD lt T246 D502 Yoz1 Heater output Error flag M8067 020 Error occurs END M 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method Auto tuning is started a The target value is set to 50 C MOVP Leones mer oil time Ts i
294. ation of data table 4 Example of data table The following table shows an example of data table containing two patterns prepared in and after D5000 Patterns 1 and 2 are in the output mode 1 Data a Set value Description register D5000 K2 Number of patterns 2 patterns D5001 K3 y Number of points in pattern 1 3 points T i ig vee Holding of value D5002 KO 3 Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 1 output at final point D5003 K3000 BY Data to be output at point 1 in pattern 1 3V D5004 K18 El Output update time at point 1 in pattern 1 1800 ms Output update time unit at point 1 in pattern 1 100 ms D5005 H0021 Point to point interpolation method S shaped interpolation D5006 K8000 y Data to be output at point 2 in pattern 1 8V D5007 K26 2 Output update time at point 2 in pattern 1 2600 ms N D5008 H0011 Output update time unit at point 2 in pattern 1 100 ms i Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation D5009 K5000 y Data to be output at point 3 in pattern 1 5V D5010 K5 2 Output update time at point 3 in pattern 1 500 ms wo Output update time unit at point 3 in pattern 1 100 ms D5011 110019 Point to point interpolation method Linear interpolation D5012 K4 y Number of points in pattern 2 4 points D5013 K1 T Setting of condition after output at final point in pattern 2 Output of offset value D5014 K
295. avr nexs O M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 Cancel output holding function OFF Holds the analog data output setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC E Cancel output holding function ON Outputs the offset data at J M8266 M8276 m8286 m8296 Sting for channel 3 stop of the PLC 2 Cancel output holding function S M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 setting for channel 4 FX3G Series PLC gt Special auxiliary relay aaa T Description Oo 1st 2nd E m U M8284 M8294 Cancel output holding function d setting for channel 1 G M8285 mg295 Cancel output holding function OFF Holds the analog data output E setting for channel 2 just before stop of the PLC Cancel output holding function ON Outputs the offset data at 3 Mees meee setting for channel 3 stop of the PLC z U M8287 M8297 Cancel output holding function setting for channel 4 H gt 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Z To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel create a sequence program as follows g 1 To set the output holding function for 2 To cancel the output holding function for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter l M8001 M8000 a Mi ma Poo aan Normally OFF Normally ON E w 53 U gt E gt Y FE F 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 chan
296. ay avi nex4 Co dav Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 2 4 FX2N 4DA FX2N 4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch Analog output range 10V to 10V DC External load 2k to 1MQ OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5000 or less Offset 5V to 5V 12 20mA to 20mA 19 Gain 15V or less and 32 mA or less and Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 4mA Digital output With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary Resolution 5mV 10Vx1 2000 204A 20mAx1 1000 Overall accuracy 1 0 200mV for 20V full scale 1 0 2001A for 20mA full scale Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output Does not include any load fluctuation Time required for D A conversion 2 1 ms The number of selected channels will not affect this value Output characteristics When the output mode is set to 0 When the output mode is 2 The dotted line is for mode 1 Analog output 4mA 0 gt 1000 Digital input Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog output Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not
297. be 8AD 8ch ier 75 FAZN BOD Current 2 5uA adjusted 73 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 14 bits The sampling function is incorporated Voltage 5mV 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits Combined use of voltage and FX2N 4AD 4ch T current inputs is possible 5 urrent 104A i i The offset gain can be adjusted 20mA to 20mA DC with sign 11 bits Voltage 2 5mV Combined use of voltage and OV to 10V DC 12bits current inputs is impossible 4 EX2N Z D een Current 4uA The offset gain can be adjusted 2 4mA to 20mA DC 12bits Common to 2 input channels Voltage current output Voltage 0 32mV i 10V to 10VDC with sign 16 bits Combined use of voltage and FX3U 4DA 1 4ch rent GENT current outputs is possible 4 E PPAR The offset gai be adjusted OMA to 20mA DC 15bits e e Voltage 5mV i i 10Vto 10VDC with sign 12 bits Combined use of voltage and FX2NC 4DA 2 4ch T JOLA current outputs is possible 5 urrent HEN The offset gain can be adjusted OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 5 mV i i 10V to 10V DC with sign 12 bits COmbined use of voltage and FX2N 4DA 1 4ch current outputs is possible 5 Current 204A The offset gain can be adjusted OmA to 20mA DC 10bits Voltage 2 5 mV i i OV to 10V DC 12 bits Combined use of voltage and FX2N 2DA 1 2ch current outputs is possible 5 Current AA The offset gain can be adjusted 4mA to 20mA DC 12bits 1 To connect this block to the FX3
298. below 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening Termination stranded single wire torque Single wire 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm e To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection i To connect a single wire cable just strip the cover off the 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection 3 e 0 22 Nemto Rod terminal with insulation sleeve Rod terminal 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm 0 25 Nem recommended terminal with AWG22 20 i Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation Refer to the rod terminal Caulking tool sleeve external view shown in th CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Termination of cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude vom mm Do not solder plate the end of the cable 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve i i If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Insulation sleeve Contact area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while Crimp area referring to the external view
299. bit is turned on when BFM 28 is not 0 mode Setting data change i ae b12 prohibited Setting change is prohibited b13 to b15 2 Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated the error bit will turn off 3 Error status data automatic transfer function b0 of BFM 60 If the error status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 61 the data in BFM 29 can be transferred to a specified data register Only when an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3Uu 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 E 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 11 BFM 30 Model code 9 3 3 Initial value at delivery K3030 3 Numeric data type Decimal K 2 K3030 fixed value is stored as the model code 5 4 12 BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output upon PLC stop Be ES 2U U Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K To enable the output data set when the PLC stops Set 2 for any digit in the output data H0000 at PLC s stop Set the BFM values as follows BFM number Description 32 Data in channel 1 33 Data in channel 2 34 Data in channel 3 35 Data i
300. bit of BFM 29 Bit No Item Description bO Error detection If one of b1 to b11 is turned on bO will turn on b1 O G error Gain setting error error in offset gain data or in EEPROM offset gain setting 24 V power is not supplied properly b2 Power supply error Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage b3 Hardware ror FX3Uu 4DA may be defective Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office b4 Error setting function for y b5 output setting upon PLC The setting value of the function for output setting upon PLC stop stop BFM 5 is not set correctly Correctly set the value b6 Upper lower limit function The setting value of the upper lower limit function BFM 41 to BFM 48 setting error is not set correctly Correctly reset the value ae ibe i able The setting value of the corrective function by load resistance b7 ng 9y 5 BFM 51 to 54 is not set correctly Valid only in voltage output Correctly set the value mode b8 Table output function The setting value of the table output function is not set correctly setting error Correctly set the value status automatic transfer The setting value of the status automatic transfer function b9 E BFM 61 to 63 is not set correctly setting error Correctly set the value b10 Over scale The analog output is out of the specified range b11 od it Wire break has occurred The details are indicated by BFM 28 y PU The
301. ble KO to K32767 KO Decimal from channel 4 89 Output completion flag of table output function H0000 De 90 Table output error code KO Decimal 91 Table output error occurrence number KO Decimal 92 to 97 Not used 98 Head device number in data table KO to K32767 K1000 Decimal 99 Data table transfer command 2 H0000 eee Chapter 6 100 to 398 Data table in pattern 1 KO Decimal 399 Not used 400 to 698 Data table in pattern 2 KO Decimal Chapter 6 699 Not used z ES E 700 to 998 Data table in pattern 3 KO Decimal Chapter 6 999 Not used 1000 to 1298 Data table in pattern 4 KO Decimal Chapter 6 1299 Not used 1300 to E 1598 Data table in pattern 5 KO Decimal Chapter 6 1599 Not used 1600 to i 1898 Data table in pattern 6 KO Decimal Chapter 6 1899 Not used 1900 to gt i 2198 Data table in pattern 7 KO Decimal Chapter 6 2199 Not used E z E z 2200 to y a 2498 Data table in pattern 8 KO Decimal Chapter 6 2499 Not used 2500 to 2798 Data table in pattern 9 KO Decimal Chapter 6 2799 Not used E z 2800 to 3098 Data table in pattern 10 KO Decimal Chapter 6 q Specify whether to start or stop the table output function for each channel setting a hex code 0 or 1 in each digit 2 Specify the data table transfer command and the register type setting 0 or 1 in the last two digits of the hex code E 20 FX3G FX3
302. bsection 5 4 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia dav a Mld dWy NeXW day B 33 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 9 BFM 26 Upper lower limit error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H If channel data BFM 10 to 13 is out of the range set by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 the following operation will be performed If channel data lt lower limit error set value The lower limit error bit will turn on e If channel data gt upper limit error set value The upper limit error bit will turn on gt For a detailed description of upper lower limit error status data resetting refer to Subsection 5 4 18 BFM 26 bit assignment The upper and lower limit error values of each channel are assigned as shown in the following table Bit No Channel number Description bO hi Lower limit error value le b1 Upper limit error value b2 Lower limit error value ch2 b3 Upper limit error value b4 Lower limit error value OOO ch3 b5 Upper limit error value b6 Lower limit error value ch4 b7 Upper limit error value b8 to b15 Not used Cautions regarding use of upper lower limit error status data To
303. cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed K 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the PNK ADP are arranged as follows ANd OVt NEXA dav m FXau 4AD PNK ADP OL dVb NEX4 av O POWER Application y x External power e Ground terminal 25 Of gs Channel 1 Pt1000 Ni1000 sensor input Channel 2 Pt1000 Ni1000 sensor input 0000000000 HULU UU L3 12 L2 Lae M Lt Lt Channel 3 Pt1000 Ni1000 sensor input Channel 4 Pt1000 Ni1000 sensor input Mola lar b La 00000 HULU K 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown
304. ccnnnnoncnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno D 11 3 3 Analog Input ENG viii eee ee D 12 A e techs renee ce dis eves cutee oe a a aa een Sin nn dre D 12 4 Programming D 13 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccccccccceceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeeesecaeeeesseaeeeeseeeeesseseeees D 13 4 2 List of Special DEVICES uan D 14 4 3 Switching of Input MOde ceccecceececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeecaaeeeeecaeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeseneeeetnseeetees D 14 4 4 Input Data ste c reset sae a ake a ek ke a ok a ke a oe a D 15 45 AVEFAGING LIMON E de eal ow ead toons ee eee ead e al ds D 16 4 67 a ON OtatuS is a ie a dos de as a o ae A a bt o A ea ma ke D 17 AT Model Code ii eek ei de ee te in ede ld e i a pee Oe ee rad D 19 4 3 Basic Program Example 000000 iaa polio duo eee HE AE LD D 19 5 Changing of Input Characteristics D 20 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input CharacteristiCS ooonnncoccooocccccnccononononcnnnncnonananonnnnnnno D 20 6 Troubleshooting D 21 6 1 PLE Version Number Check ccoo coccion tal ta aa D 21 6 2 Checking Installation ad D 21 6 3 Wiring Check EET ED deni ed eaea E aaa D 21 6 4 Special Device Check cccccccccceesessssceeeeeeeeeseenneeeeeeeeseceeneeeeeceesseseeaeeeeeeseseeeaseeseeesseeeeeeeeeess D 21 6 5 Program Check iii ib D 22 6 6 Error Status Check 25 22 EF ELDELE ED a eie a es ege D 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents
305. ceeeeeseneeeeneeeess C 7 2 4 A D Conversion TIM Er ieee eet eee a ot eta C 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC onccconiccccccnnnoncnnnnncccnononancnnnanananonancn cono nana ca no nanannnnnnnins C 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC sce ceeececceccececnececeeeeeee cece eeeaeaeeeeceseaaeceeeeseaaeaeeeeseeceeeeeeeeesenaeeeess C 9 3 Wiring C 10 3 1 Terminal Layout dba C 11 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque oooooccccnncccccconoccncnnncnncnnnancnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn C 12 3 3 Power Supply A C 13 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3G FX3U Series PLC ocooococonnccnconnconccocooconononcnnnnnnonononononnnnronnrannnncnnnnnono C 13 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC ecececccceececece renerne eee C 13 3 4 Analog Inp t ENE aeaaea a ll deta ANG BEER NE aaae ot ety C 14 Ro Peo eal A o le ee C 14 4 Programming C 15 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccccoonooocccnccccononononcnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos C 15 4 2 List Of Special Devices hresian aia eai aei C 17 4 3 Switching of Input MOde ceccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeseaaeeesecaeeeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeessteeeeenseeeeees C 18 44a IND UD AA teca a Sh Det Gaal al haath eet dae ert ete awe Sette new ee erat C 19 AS SAVORAGING IMGs oO eN aa rA Patada E C 20 ANETO AUS e acted otk e tes C 21 4 f ModelCode custia ct adela a lt dd a e C 23 4 8 Basic Program Example arenie e ea E a a e E nE C 24 5
306. ces Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program 6 6 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 2AD BD the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 2AD BD hardware error b2 Unused b7 2AD BD communication data error b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Over scale detection b0 b1 1 Description of error The input analog value voltage or current value is outside the specified range The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode 0 to 4080 or outside the range specified for the current input mode 0 to 2040 2 Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 2 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel
307. ces refer to Chapter 4 a MLd V NEX4 dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 6 5 Program Check 6 5 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs 6 6 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 1DA BD the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description bO Output data setting error b1 to b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Output data setting error b0 1 Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range Analog data will not be correctly output 2 Remedy Check that the specified digital value is within the specified range 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output ave nexd UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog
308. channel 3 ON Current input M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC To switch the channel input mode create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the input mode of channel 2 To switch the input mode of channel 2 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the of the 1st analog special adapter to voltage input mode the current input mode M8001 T Normally OFF M8000 i E Normally ON C 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 4 Input Data 4 4 Input Data Numeric data type Decimal K The data converted by the 4AD ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the input data are shown in the following table FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Ww sua UOWWOJ gt mama SS SE Special data register Res Description gt U 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 4 D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 input data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 input data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 input data x D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 input data E O gt o U FX3G Series PLC D Special data register m Description x ist 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 input data 5 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 input data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel
309. characteristics 5 product specifications 3 w oO OU eta JTE gt pee 2 0 lt ari 5 e Y axis D pee O 225 T SOO lt gt 232 2000 N gt n 5V 400 1V 0 400 2000 4000 0 Digital value input 2 Example of program Digital value characteristics to be changed X axis 10000 Desired digital value D100 For example create the following program to change the digital output data D100 of the 1st analog board M8001 Normally OFF y Sets the output mode of 1st board to the voltage output mode OV to 10V Sets the output mode to the output holding mode Check to make sure the digital value D100 is in range Calculation for changing output characteristics Stores the operation result in D8260 G 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 6 1 PLC Version Number Check E 2 3 3 6 Troubleshooting a 0 ERE se This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status B If analog data is not output or if the proper analog value is not output check the following items ul e Version number of PLC SE Installation 59 Wiring e Special devices Programs Error status o 1 PLC Version Number Check Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC The version number should be 1 10 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to S
310. cified digital value is within the specified range 2 EEPROM error b4 1 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office F 27 ave nexg OU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav vdv nex4 dOV VE NEXA mia dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 6 5 Error Status Check 3 4DA ADP hardware error b6 1 Description of error The 4DA ADP is not operating properly 2 Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the 4DA ADP Also check that the 4DA ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office F 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output ave nexd UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI dav vay nexa TI gt lt 9 y J es iw mn gt lt Foreword e AA gt This manual describes t
311. conoconocncnonononoconcnnncnnononnonononoronerannnnanonononinnnnnns K 13 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3UC Series PLC ooooocccccnnococccnccconocccnconononcnnnnnnancnnncnnnnnnnnnn nana tn cnn nncnnnnncnncanns K 13 3 4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer SenSOF ocoococcccnnoccccnnonccoconnnccnnnnnencnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnannnnnns K 14 3 5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermomester Sensor cc cccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeseeees K 14 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring ccccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeseaceceseceeeeseeaeeeesseeeeecsueeeesaeeees K 15 3 7 108 0 69 Jere re ee tidad K 15 4 Programming K 16 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data ccoooncoooccncccccnccnonooonnnononccnnnnnnnnncnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn nn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns K 16 4 2 List Of Special Devices ar on la ERE eee anana eaaet raie aeda apinn sa K 18 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit ccccccccceeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeeeeseaeeeeessaeeeensneeeeeaees K 19 4 4 Input sensor selection 22 K 20 4 5 Temperature Measurement 2222 essere K 21 AO AVOFAGING TIMO scsi K 22 ATA EImor Status mota ee each he hd o ra ad nd e e Sh Re K 23 48 ModeliGode sce at nd ee er a ee ee eee A K 26 4 9 Basic Program Example ciisossccise 55 soso ii LASSE SSSA SS A ee K 27 5 Troubleshooting K 29 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 2 ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeceaceeeecaeeceseeeeeeseeeesesceeeeecsueeeetetes K 29 5 2 Wir
312. cription Description Special devices of special devices refer to Measurement 4st ad Chapter acti st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 temperature Transten direction For a detailed description 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer to Setting of temperature Section 4 8 unit 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 id Setting of averaging time e 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 4 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the 14 point and 24 point type main unit 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Qvr onex4 dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 M ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 5 T gt gt o d 1d TV neX4 day MLd avy neXy Con dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the PT ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD PT ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline Refer to Chapter 2
313. cription Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Channel 1 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital RON Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in input range Decimal 82 Channel 2 upper limit value error setting From lower limit Maximum digital Decimal Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON e O value in input range Subsection 480 Channel 3 upper limit value error setting digital value in Maximum digital Decimal 5 4 16 alid i O is set to value in input range Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON input range lue in input Channel 4 upper limit value error setting Maximum digital neg Valid if b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON value in input rarige PEST 85 to 90 Not used Channel 1 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of o Valid if b2 of BEM 22 is set to ON full scale S OMU Scale Decimal Channel 2 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of gt ae Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale S Gi fullscale Decline ge cies Channel 3 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of gt F 5 4 17 93 Valid if b2 of BFM 22 is set to ON full scale ems lt Decimal Channel 4 abrupt change detection value From 1 to 50 of gt ns Valid if b2 of BEM 22 is set to ON full scale SOUL Scale Decimal 95 to 498 Not used 499 Clear of upper lower limit error data or abrupt 4 H0000 i Subsection change error data 5 4 18 100 Not used Channel 1 minimum peak value Valid if b3 of
314. cription of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 Remedy Check that the averaging time is set correctly for each channel 4 4AD ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The 4AD ADP is not operating properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the 4AD ADP Also check that the 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 4AD ADP communication error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the 4AD ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the 4AD ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office C 31 ave nexa UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI var nex4 MI dOV VE NEXA mia dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 5 Error Status Check MEMO C 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input A B FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable i Controllers c User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3
315. ct Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions E Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise z Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high e voltage line or load line iS Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line a at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems F Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Y Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 S Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem 3 Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires U Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not
316. cted depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Averaging time Verify if the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 4 Error status Check that no error is detected in the TC ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 L 29 A ANd AYY NEXA day OL dVb NEX4 dady uononysul did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check 5 5 Check the following items for the program Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared the b6 and the b7 should turn off using the program Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs Error Status Check If an error occurs in the TC ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement dat
317. ction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Item Specifications A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 40mA driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block By 5V DC 15mA SE Interface driving power Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not 56 necessary to supply the power 2 3 Performance Specifications gt x lt T 5 Specifications d Item Voltage input Current input D Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC n range Input resistance 194 KQ Input resistance 250 Q ES F Y AD R Rp 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA E maximum Y Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 10uA 16mA 1600 E 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale x when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C T Total accuracy 5 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160A for 16mA full scale gt when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 200 us The data will be updated at every scan time Aa FX3G Series PLC 250 us The data will be updated at every scan time F gt F
318. ction nexa FA WY Continuous 9steps PID A Operation E gt 9 gt U 2 Set data Operand type Description Data type 3 Data register storing the target value SV Binary 16 bit EH Data register storing the measured value PV Binary 16 bit 28 Data register storing PID parameters Binary 16 bit CD Data register storing the output value MV Binary 16 bit 3 Target devices Bit devices Word devices Others y Real Char i Operand System User Digit Specification System User sai Index Num acter is type stant ber String er X Y M T C S DO b KnX KnY KnM KnS T C D R ULNG vz MIKA E YE P EEES MEE Pi D y 4 A Only available for FX3U and FX3uc PLCs 2 1 Explanation of function and operation 1 16 bit PID operation Once the target value S1 measured value and PID parameters to CS3 6 are set and the program is executed the operation result MV is transferred to the output value CD at every sampling time The sampling time is specified by Command on FNC 88 Target Measured PID Output value value Parameters value SV PV MV M 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 2 How to Use PID Instruction 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning Explanation of set items
319. d D8268 4 EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 eer Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O PT ADP hardware error in 1st adapter D8268 7 o PT ADP communication data error in 1st adapter 390600606 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI gt Q T gt o U 1d QYp NEX4 day Mld dYr NeX4 Com day l 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K20 Numeric data type Decimal K When the PT ADP is connected model code 20 will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd Ath D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Description FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Description Use the special data registers above to check whether PT ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FNC224 D8269 K20 7010 Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter 1 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 8 Basic Program Example 4 8 Basic Program Examp
320. d gt PID operation is not started gt E Because the set value fluctuated during auto tuning auto 5 z lt Step response method gt tuning was not executed correctly oz 6752 E me vu Improper auto tuning operation Set the sampling time to a value larger than the output change cycle or set a larger value to the input filter constant L After changing the setting execute auto tuning again v lt Limit cycle method gt 6753 Abnormal output set value for auto tuning o ae o gt ULV upper limit lt LLV lower limit lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not L started gt BO lt Limit cycle method gt Check whether the target settings are correct 6754 Abnormal PV threshold hysteresis set value for auto tuning SHPv lt 0 lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not 6755 Abnormal auto tuning transfer status started gt mo Data of device controlling transfer status is abnormally Verify that devices occupied by PID instruction are not 38 overwritten overwritten in the program gs lt Auto tuning is forcibly finished gt PID operation is not started gt The auto tuning time is too long Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whethe
321. d adapters will be subject to D A conversion 3 and then output in the order of 1st adapter 2nd adapter 5 P 4 D A conversion speed data update time 5 During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data per of 4 channel will be subject to D A conversion which takes 250us after which the analog data will be output G END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected adapters J og Ea es U ap gt lt gt gt U m E gt E 33 U a Mld dWy NeXW4 day F 9 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output E 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 4DA ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the 4DA ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling
322. d out to the PLC main unit using the FROM instruction the b iw watchdog timer error may occur in the PLC main unit Therefore when programming separate the history data and then read it out using the FROM instruction Set WDT watchdog timer refresh instruction between the separated data var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day B 49 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 6 Changing Input Characteristics 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics SEU 6 Changing Input Characteristics For the 4AD the standard input characteristics are provided for each input mode BFM 0 at the time of factory shipment Changing the offset data BFM 41 to 44 or gain data BFM 51 to 54 however can change the input characteristics of each channel This chapter describes how to change the input characteristics 6 1 Procedure for Changing Input Characteristics 1 Determine the input mode BFM 0 Determine the optimum input mode BFM 0 for the selected channels and the voltage current specifications Set value 2 aes HEX Input mode Analog input range Digital output range 0 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 1 Voltage input mode 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 Voltage input analog value direct indication 2 The offset and the gain cannot
323. d satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the thermocouple input s the input voltage current data conversion speed will be 1 ms x number of selected channels A 27 SW9 UOWWOD UJ OVy INEX dvr nexs da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Ga dav Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 8 FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 2AD BD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 2ch ARSS noul range OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC ae g Input resistance 198 7 kQ Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA Offset Impossible to change Impossible to change Gain Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 8uA 16mAx1 2000 gt O i pee temperature 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80pA for 16mA full scale 3 E oO 5 RUGE cana 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale Time required for A D conversion 180us Data updated every scan time Input characteristics Digital output 0 gt Analog input 10V 10 2V
324. d temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Special data register aoe Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data FX3G Series PLC Normally ON Special data register TA Description ist 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register If the averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data
325. data BFM 14 to 17 upper lower limit function setting BFM 38 and table output function start stop setting BFM 80 are correct FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 4 Error Status Check A 9 4 Error Status Check 2 3 When an error occurs in FX3U 4DA the bit appropriate to the error is turned on in the error status BFM 29 El Take measures referring to the following table E Bit No Items B bO Error detection RX b1 O G error SE b2 Power supply error b3 Hardware error b4 C b5 Error in setting of function for setting output upon PLC stop y b6 Upper lower limit function setting error E b7 Error in corrective function setting by load resistance Valid only in voltage output mode 2 b8 Table output function setting error D b9 Status automatic transfer setting error b10 Over scale b11 Disconnection detection Valid only in current output mode 5 b12 Setting data change prohibited S b13 to b15 Error detection b0 OIG error b1 Power supply error b2 Error when setting the function for output upon PLC stop b5 1 Description of error If any of b1 is turned on this bit b11 will turn on var NEXd 1 Description of error The bit is turned on when the offset or gain data BFM 10 to 17 in the EEPROM has a setting error 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the o
326. data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 250us x number of connected adapters 2 5 Temperature Measurement To stabilize the temperature measurement warm up the system for 30 minutes or more after power on J 9 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt Qvr onex4 ddv Ve nexs SE da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav var nex4 TI var nex4 m da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O day Mld dWy NEXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input PO HERE 3 Wiring This chapter describes the PTW ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the PTW ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris d
327. dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ole day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Description Setting range Initial value Data type Reference Upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 S bsecti n 41261 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K208 at delivery Decimal 5422 Valid if b5 of BFM 22 is set to ON aa Abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 Subsection 12771 automatic transfer to data register specification 0 to 7999 K209 at delivery Decimal 5423 Valid if b6 of BFM 22 is set to ON ES Over scale status data BFM 28 automatic Subsection 1281 transfer to data register specification Valid if b7 0 to 7999 K210 at delivery Decimal 5 4 24 of BFM 22 is set to ON qe Error status data BFM 29 automatic transfer Subsection 129 1 to data register specification Valid if b8 of BFM 0 to 7999 K211 at delivery Decimal 5 4 25 22 is set to ON 130 to 196 Not used Selection of cyclic data update function function i Hexadeci Subsection AII for data history 2 H0000 mal 5 4 26 198 Data history sampling time setting Unit ms 0 to 30000 K15000 Decimal a E A Hexadeci Subsection 199 Data history resetting stoppage 3 H0000 m l 5 4 28 200 Channel 1 data history initial value
328. day avi nex4 Co day Mld A 43 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 44 6 FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 4AD TC Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Input signal Thermocouple type K or J JIS C 1602 1995 Rated temperature range 3 Type K 100 C to 1200 C Type J 100 C to 600 C Type K 148 F to 2192 F Type J 148 F to 1112 F Digital output Type K 1000 to 12000 Type J 1000 to 6000 Type K 1480 to 21920 Type J 1480 to 11120 Input characteristics e Type K 0 4 C e Type K 0 72 F Resolut reso Type J 0 3 C Type J 0 54 F Overall accuracy 0 5 for full scale 1 C ie egune or 240ms 2 x number of selected channels conversion 12000 do AER oc Type K Type K S3 6000 SB 11120 i a 2 Type J 2 Type J j O 600 C 1200 C Type J Type K Temperature 0 1112F 2192F Type J Type K Temperature Insulation method Number of I O points occupied The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC A 44 FX3G FX3U FX3UC
329. de BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance values oooooconnccnnocicccncnos E 33 5 4 18 BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function SettinQ ooooccconnnnnnnninnnncccnnonnnnnccnnnnorncnnno narco E 34 5 4 19 BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification E 35 5 4 20 BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status data automatic transfer to data register Specification ii dedos E 36 5 4 21 BFM 63 Specification of data register for automatic transfer at disconnection detection E 37 5 4 22 BFM 80 to 3098 Table output function s suse seeren nerne renen E 37 6 Table Output Function E 38 6 1 Outline of Table Output FUNCTION 22 0 0 eccccceeeeccceeeeneeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeecaeeeesseaeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeaees E 38 6 2 Preparation of data table isish eea ee i E 39 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory ccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenaees E 44 6 4 Procedures for executing table output fUNCHION cccooocooocccnncccnnooonnnnnnncnnnnononnnnnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnns E 48 6 5 Details of table OutpUt Gn rOr oi scotia eedives Winelands E 50 6 6 Examples uses of table output FUNCTION ccccoocococcnnncconnnooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnn nro nnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnns E 52 7 Changing Output Characteristic E 53 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeessaeeees E 53
330. de the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 1 The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected nexa FT 91 QWr D8268 2 av The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 3 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 4 uoponysu did 88 ONS EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 PNK ADP hardware error in 1st adapter D8268 7 PNK ADP communication data error in the 1st adapter 308009009086 K 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 8 Model Code 4 8 Model Code Initial value K11 Numeric data type Decimal K When the PNK ADP is connected model code 11 will be stored in the special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Description FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Description Use the above special data registers to check whether PNK ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example For FX3U F
331. dth 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less 9 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 4 altitude lt 2000m 4 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If PTW ADP is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Other PEG equipment pee equipment PUG equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 6 4 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the PTW ADP The PTW ADP may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Items Specification A D conversion circuit 24V DC 20 15 50mA driving power It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block UY 5V DC 15mA SE Interface driving power Since the intern
332. dware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other PUE equipment PLE equipment PHG equipment ro 1 i a Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible K 15 ANd OVt NEXA dav day lt S Lava rm UOHONSU did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data 4 Programming 4 1 This chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the PNK ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Subsection 4 2 FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Communi High speed FXau 4AD FXau 4AD FXau 4AD Speciar FXau 4AD PuVoutput PNK ADP PNK ADP PNK ADP adapter PNK ADP n FX3u FX3uc Series
333. e m a measured value PV caused by disturbance etc ES When the differential gain KD is large the output is given after a long time with respect to changes in the gt measured value PV caused by disturbance etc 353 U Important points Set the differential gain KD to 0 and then adjust the operation using the input filter a If the output response is too close to the disturbance increase the differential gain KD UONON SU did 88 ONS 3 2 7 Differential time TD S3 6 Setting range 0 to 32767 x 10 ms PID control Differential operation Use the differential time TD to respond sensitively to fluctuations in the measured value PV caused by disturbance etc and to minimize the fluctuations When the differential time TD is large it becomes to prevent large fluctuation in the control target caused by disturbance etc e It is not always necessary to use the differential time when disturbance is small for example A 1 TD3 PID operation Disturbance AA E R ER NR HEDERGER SER SEE K Tp1 PID operation Deviation Deviation EV TD2 PID operation Time A TD3 PID operation Tos gt TD2 gt TD1 a TD2 PID operation 6 TD1 PID operation AR Time M 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 3 Parameter 3 2 Details of Parameters Example 1 PID operation in heating backward operatio
334. e 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel L 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 TC ADP hardware error b6 1 2 5 TC ADP communication data error b7 1 2 A Description of error The TC ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the TC ADP Also check that the TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office ANd OVt NEXA dav OL dVb NEX4 adv Description of error A communication error is detected between the TC ADP and the PLC e Remedy Check that the TC ADP is correctly connected to the PLC Z If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi 35 Electric distributor office 23 L 31 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check MEMO L 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 A ANd AYY NEXA dqy rm OL dVb NEX4 gt 5 d FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition E
335. e H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H If the input analog value is out of the A D conversion range the following operation will be performed e If analog input value lt lower limit value in A D conversion range The over scale lower limit bit will turn on If analog input value lt upper limit value in A D conversion range The over scale upper limit bit will turn on A D conversion range Input type A D conversion range Voltage input 10 2V to 10 2V Current input 20 4mA to 20 4mA 2 Assignment of each bit of BFM 28 Bit No Channel number Description bO ae Over scale lower limit b1 Over scale upper limit b2 a Over scale lower limit b3 Over scale upper limit b4 ae Over scale lower limit b5 Over scale upper limit b6 Over scale lower limit b7 1 sis Over scale upper limit b8 to b15 Not used Caution regarding use of over scale status data Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Write H0000 in BFM 28 as the over scale status data e Even if over scale is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will continuously be updated Over scale status data automatic transfer function b7 of BFM 22 If the over scale status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 128 the data in BFM 28 can be transferred to the specified data register When over sc
336. e z E 2 a Z gt 3 3 rot 5 a i 3 E la 2 H characteristics 3 ER T T S i 1S z 2s 2 roy za amp T 1 13 a a z i ist 4mA e 0 gt 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA 0 gt 4000 0 gt 4000 6 Analog input Analog input Digital input Digital input Y The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC Insulation A The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output 3 method x lt Channels are not insulated from each other amp S Number of I O 0 points 3 points occupied This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC gt u e U ES SS K gt Y gt U ae A 35 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output 4 3 2 FX2N 5A 1 Analog input Specifications FX2N 5A Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC 100mV to 100mV DC Input resistance 200kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 2500 Absolute maximum input 15V 30mA 10V to 10V DC 32V to 5V DC a 100mV to 100mV DC UA 320mV to 50mV DC 10V to 10V DC Gain 5V to 32V and Gain Offset gt 1V 10mA to 32mA and 100mV to 100mV DC 50mV to 320mV a
337. e 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC D8268 0 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected Ww sua UOWWOJ gt D8268 1 mm The temperature measurement data S of channel 2 is outside the specified SE range or disconnection is detected 3 D8268 2 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified D8268 3 range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 4 EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 ae i i Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O PTW ADP hardware error in 1st adapter D8268 7 A PTW ADP communication data error in 1st adapter var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 ds gt a d MLld AYY NEX4 day J 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K21 Numeric data type Decimal K When the PTW ADP is connected model code 21 will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register ist 2nd 3rd Ath D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code Descr
338. e If the compensating lead wire is very long the wire may be easily affected by noise etc It is therefore recommended for the length of the compensating lead wire to be 100 m or less 3 5 Wiring of Thermocouple Wiring depends on the thermocouple type selected Refer to the following wiring diagrams 3 5 1 Wiring of thermocouple type K Terminal block OPEN 1 emperature compensating circuit Thermocouple Compensating type K lead wire grounding LO LO call Orepresents the channel number 1 Itis not necessary to connect lines to the J type terminals Leave these terminals disconnected 2 Keep the thermocouple away from inductive noise commercial power etc L 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 6 Caution Regarding Wiring A 3 5 2 Wiring of the thermocouple type J 7 T gt Y Terminal block 32 DA Thermocouple Compensating type J lead wire x a gt ee TELI P Ba ee e UoHONsU Cid 88 ONS grounding LO LO chU Orepresents the channel number 1 To use a J thermocouple type be sure to connect the thermocouple to these terminals In addition select J
339. e connection 3 To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover off the C 2 wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection e r z 0 22N mto Rod terminal with insulation sleeve a Rod terminal 0 3MM to 0 5mm 0 25N m recommended terminal with A SA na Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact insulation ai ti e a termina Caulking tool 2 sleeve i its es eum CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact e following figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact D a P N gt P es U e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable TerminationoF cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude E 72722222 E Do not solder plate the end of the cable gt 9mm E 0 35 9 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve insulationsieeve Contactarea If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into Crimp area the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while F referring to the external view 0 31 i m Manufacturer Model Caulking tool oy ES gt E CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 55 o E gt Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 U 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in S the figure to the right og Note ES If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening to
340. e diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or ne eee an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm gt 2 0 01 0 09 C 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line 2 3 o Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4AD ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 3 1 To connect to the FX3G FX3U Series PLC B 1 To use an External power supply 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC xx SS 4AD ADP FX3G FX3u Series 4AD ADP FX3G FX3u Series bS 15V PLC Main unit 15V PLC Main unit 2 25 T gt E gt o U Terminal block Terminal ro block 5 8 Class D Class D 24VDC grounding grounding E Caution regarding connection of the power supply line 3 e Groundthe terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 1002 or less together with the S grounding terminal of the PLC main unit e For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Seri
341. e e ignored and data is output at point 1 in output pattern 5 Pattern 1 Time Table output start Change from output pattern 1 to output pattern 5 5 Check the table output completion flag BFM 89 initial value H0000 The value in BFM 89 indicates whether the table output from each channel has been completed After data is output at the final point in the last cycle of a pattern the table output completion flag is turned on When the table output BFM 80 is set to be stopped the table output completion flag is turned off HOOOO oa Dem Value for each A channel Table output completion flag 0 Table output uncompleted 1 Table output completed E 49 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nex4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 Table Output Function 6 5 Details of table output error 6 5 Details of table output error When an error related to the table output function occurs the error code is stored in BFM 90 and the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the error is stored in BFM 91 1 Error code table and details of error source numbers Error code Detalleatertor Table output error source number BFM 90 BFM 91 The number of patte
342. e es cado ea cdo BA ten K 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ooooconoccccnncccccnnnccccconnnncnnonnncnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnannnnnnnns K 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number oooooccccccoccccnonoccnonononononnnncnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns K 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccccceeessceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeecesesenaeeeeeeeessneeeeeees K 5 2 Specifications K 6 2 1 Generic Specifications siea a a r r a apee a e a eiia K 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications cccesssccccceeeseessseeeeeceesceseeeeeesceeeeteeeaueeeeeeeeseeeseaeeeeeesssseeeeeeeess K 6 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccccccceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeeecaceeeseeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseeeeeseueeteneeees K 7 2 4 VD 7s 6 97 1112 TIMO K 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC ooooococinnoccccccccooconccnconnnnncnnonannnnnnncnonnnncnnnnanan cnn nr nanannnncnnns K 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC oooonoocccccccococccocononononnncnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn nan nnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnannnnninnnes K 9 2 5 Temperature MeaSurementt cccccccccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeceeeececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess K 9 3 Wiring K 10 3 Terminal Layout ui a a iii K 11 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque ooooocccononccccononcccnonoccnnnnnnncnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnno K 12 3 3 Power Supply Line cio is K 13 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3U Series PLC ooccocooconcono
343. e for channel 2 data da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data is stored to the special data register var nex4 MI e Ifthe averaging time is set in the range from 2 to 4095 the average value will be calculated to conform to the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the special data register e After turning the PLC power on the current data is stored to special data registers until the number of data items reaches the set averaging time After this the average data will be stored Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range an error signal will be output Ifthe averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 2 Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sets the averaging time for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to 1 ag var oexa G dav varnexs TI Sets the averaging time for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to 5 ddv Vve nexs dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day H 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog
344. e of error status data If a 3A ADP hardware error b6 or 3A ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program e FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC M8000 MOV D8288 K4MO Normally ON M8002 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter 7 b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 3rd analog status register b7 OFF communication data error 4 1st for the FX3G PLC FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error ST D8268 6 M8002 on RST D8268 7 Error status of 1st analog status register b7 OFF communication data error H 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 10 Error Status 2 Program Example 1 FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC D8288 K4MO Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 3rd 1 adapter Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 3rd 1 adapter dvvr onexs Qvp nexs Output data setting error of the 3rd adapter EEPROM error in 3rd adapter Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter Hardware error in 3rd 3A ADP Communication data error in 3rd 3A ADP da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 1st for the FX3G PLC 3 Program Example 2 FX
345. e output function of each channel is started 1 After output of the final point in the last cycle 0 will be automatically written Other than above Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K33 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K80 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on E 48 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function 4 Cautions regarding table output e When BFM 99 data table transfer command is not H0000 the table output function cannot be started When an error occurs during transfer of data table start the table output after setting the correct data table e While the table output completion flag BFM 89 is ON output of a new table cannot be started The table output function is valid only while the PLC is in RUN mode e While even a single channel is outputting data table BFM 80 is not H0000 it is prohibited to change BFM 0 5 9 to 17 19 20 32 to 35 38 41 to 48 50 to 54 and 60 to 63 e The pattern can be changed during output as shown below The change is invalid while the table output completion flag BFM 89 is ON Output value Pattern 5 SS y ae The data output in pattern 1 is ta
346. e read out to D200 to D299 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 3 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D300 to D399 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 4 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D400 to D499 The watchdog timer will be refreshed After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 again The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM Therefore even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid If a large amount of history data is read out the scan time of the PLC will be become longer If the scan time exceeds 200 ms the CPU error indicator lamp will illuminate and the PLC will stop Insert WDT instruction watchdog timer refresh between BMOV instructions B 60 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 4 Initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default 7 4 Initialization Program for 4AD Factory Default Execution of the following program will reset the input mode BFM 0 offset data BFM 41 to 44 gain data BFM 51 to 54 etc to the factory default status Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a 1 Conditions The s
347. e setting range the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern number of data items 1 The condition after output at the final point in a pattern can be set to continue to output the output signal at the final point or output the offset signal The setting is shown in the following table Set value Condition after output at final point KO Continuing to output the output signal at the final point K1 Outputting the offset signal Other than above Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 5 Point number of data items 3 Data output point The data indicating a point consist of output data output update time output update time unit and point to point interpolation method Each pattern can have up to 99 points 6 Output data number of data items 1 Digital value corresponding to the analog signal to be output at the point The setting range depends on the output mode and offset gain setting 7 Output update time number of data items 1 Output time to the next po
348. e to 1 000 ms 1 second or more 1 Maximum error U The maximum error of the sampling time Ts is from one operation cycle 1 ms to one operation o cycle ae F S 1 When the sampling time Ts is a small value OS gt Fluctuation of the maximum error described above may cause a problem In such a case execute the PID instruction in the constant scan mode or program it in a timer interrupt routine 2 When the sampling time Ts is shorter than one operation cycle of the PLC A PID operation error K6740 occurs however when PID operation is executed the sampling time Ts is equal to the operation cycle of the PLC In such a case use the PID instruction in a timer interrupt 16 to 18 and clear CS3 7 just before executing the PID instruction gt For a detailed description refer to FX3U FX3uc FX3G Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition S3 7 is reset X000 When the interrupt routine is executed for the first time the register for internal processing is cleared by the pulse generation command FNC 88 1610 The PID operation is executed FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 2 Operation setting ACT S3 1 Setting range OFF forward operation ON backward operation 1 Forward operation or backward operation 1 bit 0 S
349. e wire directly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable 0 22Nem to 0 25Nem To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable and then twist the core before connection To connect a single wire cable just peel the cover off the cable before connection Rod terminal with insulation sleeve recommended terminal Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Caulking tool CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Termination of cable end Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude T E Do not solder plate the end of the cable 9mm 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve Insulation sleeve Contact area If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer Phoenix Contact 3 Tool Al 0 5 8WH Caulking tool 2 6mm Crimp area 0 1 CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 55 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following
350. easured with a thermocouple or platinum resistance thermometer sensor FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Temperature data Temperature data Li Analog data Temperature Digital value 0 sensor input special function E block or special Measure the temperat f th equipment BR using the PLC Check the temperature gt To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products FX3u Series Temperature sensor input products e FX3U 4AD PT ADP gt For detailed description refer to Section I e FX3U 4AD PTW ADP gt For detailed description refer to Section J FX3U 4AD PNK ADP gt For detailed description refer to Section K e FX3U 4AD TC ADP gt For detailed description refer to Section L Other Series Temperature sensor input products FX2N 8AD e FX2N 2LC FX2N 4AD TC e FX2N 4AD PT gt For a detailed description of the other temperature sensor input products refer to the corresponding manuals A 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1 Types of Analog Products 2 Description of Analog Products 2 1 Types of Analog Products Analog input output products are required to perform analog control using the FX Series PLC There are 3 types of input output products the expansion board speci
351. easurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M2 Yo02 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified M3 range or disconnection is detected 7003 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M4 7002 EEPROM error in 3rd adapter M5 005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter M6 008 TC ADP hardware error in 3rd adapter M7 007 TC ADP communication data error in the 3rd adapter 41 1st for the FX3G PLC L 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 7 Error Status 3 Program Example 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 7 T 5 D8268 0 43 The temperature measurement data z of channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 1 The temperature measurement data x of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected gt D8268 2 LE The temperature measurement data Se of channel 3 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected ee e D8268 3 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected D8268 4 UoHONsU Cid 88 ONS EEPROM error in 1st adapter D8268 5 Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter D8268 6 TC ADP hardware
352. eceeeeesecaeeeeseeeeeeseneeeeseeneeees H 16 4 2 List of Special Devices es ioien i a i aiaa na aaae a iaa ai H 17 4 3 Switching of Input MOde ceccecceeceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeceeeeeeeaeesetsneeeeessieeeeenseeetees H 18 4 4 Switching of Output Mode c cc ccccccccecssssseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeessseesseeeeeeesseeesaeeeeeeesstsaeess H 19 4 5 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting ccccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeneeees H 19 4 6 Setting whether or not a Channel iS used cccccccnonococcconnncnononononnnnnccnnnnnnonnnnnnncnnnnn nro nnnnnnnnannnnnnos H 20 420 Input Datars ieteuts testa nsstesta SE SAR SS wise SEES SENERE SEER chee snes tasasdeheleeaepeanscacdehdesanureast E H 21 4 8 Output Setting Data i a re ne anden hue tee edge as dne EL nag H 22 4 9 AVOraging MB atacan H 23 AROSA aia H 24 A Model A e o E ae H 26 4 12 Basic Program Example oooooooccccccocccoocoooooooonoonnnnnnononnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnos H 27 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics H 29 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input CharacteristiCS ooooonnncoccooccccnncccnonaononnnnnnnnnnananrnnnnnnno H 29 5 2 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics ooooooconicccinnccccnnnccccnonccccconnncnnnonnnncnnns H 32 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 6 Troubleshooting H 34 6 1 PLC Ver
353. eck that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel J 27 avenexa UU swey uowwog gt avvr onexs da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav var nex4 TI var nex4 m da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O dav Ld CWp NX4 mmm dav ve nexd la Mld dWy NEXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PTW ADP hardware error b6 1 2 Description of error The PTW ADP does not operate properly Remedy Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PTW ADP Also check that the PTW ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 PTW ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the PTW ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the PTW ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office J 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input ANd OVt NEXA dav FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers day lt S oLan rm uoponysu did User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3u 4AD PNK ADP 4 c
354. ection 1 3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 6 2 Checking installation Confirm that the 1DA BD is attached correctly to the main unit Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp of the 1DA BD is lit correctly ES gt For a detailed description of installing refer to FX3G User s Manual Hardware Edition iS gt 6 3 Wiring Check F Check the following items for wiring 7 1 Analog output line S Use the 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the 3 U analog output line from other power lines or inductive lines For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 r 2 6 4 Special Device Check is gt Check whether the special devices for the 1DA BD are being used correctly 3 1 Output mode switching H Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set a Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode g gt E 2 Output setting data K Check that the special device is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel 3 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 1DA BD gt If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs 53 TU gt For a detailed description of special devi
355. ectly or use a rod terminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude Do not solder plate the end of the cable Termination of cable end berer USS CML 9mm 0 35 To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer Model Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area Caulking tool Phoenix Contact 3 Tool Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX ZA 3 0 1 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm Type Manufacturer The head should be straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 0 4m gt 2 5mm 0 01 0 09 1 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line A 3 3 Power Supply Line 2 C
356. ed However the characteristics can be changed as those in the output mode 1 or 4 by setting the following offset and gain data in the output mode 0 or 2 Offset data Gain data Change characteristics from output mode 0 to 1 0 16000 Change characteristics from output mode 2 to 4 0 16000 The offset and gain data should be set before the value write command BFM 9 is executed The resolution cannot be increased by changing the output characteristics When the value specified as the output mode BFM 0 is changed the initial value of offset and gain data in each output mode will be automatically written Even if the output characteristics are changed the actual valid output range will not be changed 10 V to 10 V for the voltage output mode and 0 mA to 20 mA in the current output mode For a detailed description of output characteristics change refer to Chapter 7 BFM 19 Data change prohibition of setting change Setting range K3030 or other than K3030 Initial value K3030 Numeric data type Decimal K Setting in the following buffer memory areas is prohibited BFM 0 output mode setting Output mode setting BFM 5 output setting upon PLC stop BFM 9 offset gain setting value write command BFM 10 to 13 offset data BFM 14 to 17 gain data BFM 20 initialization function BFM 32 to 35 data to be output upon PLC stop BFM 38 upper lower limit function setting BFM 41 to 48 upper and lower
357. ed or KO to K32762 for the expansion registers RO to R32767 because at least six points are occupied Example When the data table is set starting from D1000 set K1000 in BFM 98 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code K21 is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K98 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Start transferring the data table BFM 99 initial value H0000 Transfer the data table from the PLC to the FX3u 4DA using the data table transfer command BFM 99 Invalid e Data table transfer command Invalid Register type Data table transfer command Set value Transfer command 0 No processing 1 Execution of transfer of data table Other than above Invalid values Register type Set value Register type Transfer of data table from data registers D1000 to 7999 Transfer of data table from expansion registers RO to 32767 0 1 Other than above Invalid values When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the number of the buffer memory K99 that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on Example When K1000 is written in the head device number of data table BFM 98 and H0001 is written in the data tab
358. ed and only the data output just before the occurrence of the error is held Execute the data table transfer command BFM 99 as a pulse execution type instruction During transfer of the data table the scan time increases by up to about 10 ms The standard data table transfer time is obtained by the following formula Number of data table items Transfer time Scan time x __ x number of FX3u 4DA units connected to main unit 64 Fractions omitted Example e Scan time 50 ms including increase in scan time caused by data table transfer e Number of data table items to be transferred 2991 items when the number of patterns is 10 and the number of points in each pattern is 99 e Number of units connected to FX3u 4DA 8 units 2991 Transfer time 50 ms x x 8 units 64 18800 ms E 47 ave nexg DY sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a MLld AYY NeX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function 6 4 Procedures for executing table output function After setting the output patterns for the channels BFM 81 to 84 and the number outputs for the channels BFM 85 to 88 turn on the table output function start stop command BFM 80
359. ed in the above data registers as the input data E gt For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 5 5 gt i 1 Caution regarding input data ES Input data is for reading only Do not change rewrite the input data using sequence program indicator or device monitor of the 5 programming tool ES gt gt 2 Program Example g M8000 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the channel 1 input data E MOV of the 1st analog board in the D100 Normally y ON amp K Stores the channel 2 input data 2 FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV Even if the input data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter set value or in a PID instruction of the 1st analog board in the D101 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a MId TV NEXd day D 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the 2AD BD the average data will be stored as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers Special data register Description 1st board 2nd board D8264 D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 Averaging time for channel 2 data
360. eeeeceeeeececeeeeeeaeeeeesneeeseeeeeeeseseeeeseaeees M 5 2 2 Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto TUNiNg c cceceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees M 6 3 Parameter M 7 3 1 Parameter List SITO SIFF 28 ck aa din et M 7 3 2 Details of Parameters 2 t ec 24 eee ele ee i ee ee ea M 9 3 2 1 Sampling time TSIUS Ni M 9 3 2 2 Operation setting ACTAS Divina Es pene M 10 3 23 Input filter AJA SIE cra ada dede M 12 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP SIA 9s nesine cda e a edb Ear M 13 3 25 Integral time TIAS FA iii M 13 3 2 6 Differential gain KD S3 5 and lse sk hore ana kreeres Abner unde M 15 3 2 7 Differential time TD SZ B oooncnionicninnnncnconnnnncnccnnccncnn cnn M 15 3 2 8 Alarm output flag S3 424 ici iia iia M 17 4 Auto Tuning M 18 4 1 Limit Cycle Method occccccooocconcnnonononononnnnnnononnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnornnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnannnnnnnnnnns M 18 4 1 1 Parameters set in auto tuning of limit cycle Method oooooccooniccccccnonicocccnnacanononcconnnanoncnnnonn cnn M 18 4 12 Auto tuning procedure utilices dal M 19 4 1 3 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control limit cycle method M 20 4 2 Step Response Meth0d ccccccnncoooccconocononononcnonnncnonnnononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnrnnnnnnnnnnnnos M 21 4 2 1 Parameters to be set by auto tuning Step response method ooococociccccnnnnncccccccnccnoncnccnnnna nono M
361. el 1 input data R D8281 D8291 Channel 2 input data R i Section 4 4 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 input data R D8283 D8293 Channel 4 input data R D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 Special data register D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 i A son ES so Section 4 5 D8286 D8296 veraging time for channel 3 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 6 D8289 D8299 Model code 1 R Section 4 7 4 3 Switching of Input Mode Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the input mode of 4AD ADP between the current input mode and the voltage input mode To switch the input mode use the following special auxiliary relays FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay ar Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage input M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 ON Current input M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the input mode of channel 4 e FX3cG Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Ti Description ist 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage input M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of
362. elect the PID control direction forward or backward During auto tuning for the limit cycle method It is necessary to set the PID control direction forward or backward for auto tuning During auto tuning for the step response method The PID control direction forward or backward is not required as the direction is automatically set when auto tuning is complete Forward operation 1 bit0 0 As the measured value PV becomes larger than the target value SV the output MV increases For example cooling is a forward operation lt Cooling gt Measured value PV Temperature Target value SV gt Time Backward operation 1 bit O 1 As the measured value PV becomes smaller than the target value SV the output MV increases For example heating is a backward operation lt Heating gt _ TDL Target value SV Measured value PV Temperature gt Time Relationship between the forward backward operation and the output MV measured value PV and target value SV The relationship is as follows A Target value SV Forward operation Backward operation Output MV gt Measured value PV M 10 3 Parameter 3 2 Details of Parameters FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 2 Alarm setting for input variation and output variation CSs 1 bit 1 and bit 2 Setting range OFF ON The inp
363. ence program described in this section is created under the following conditions 1 2 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC Input mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage input 10V to 10V gt 32000 to 32000 Channels 3 and 4 should be set to mode 3 current input 4mA to 20mA gt 0 to 16000 Averaging time For channels 1 to 4 the averaging time should be set to 10 Digital filter function For channels 1 to 4 the digital filter function should be disabled default Device assignment Device Description DO A D converted digital value for channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value for channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value for channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value for channel 4 2 Example of sequence program For FX3u FX3UC Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 43300 UONGO Input modes of channels 1 SUN ae MOV B to 4 will be specified 1 M8000 Cia ye TO FNC 16 K1 2 K4 FMOV fl ai m For channels 1 and 2 the averaging time will be set to 10 The digital filter function of channels 1 and 2 will be disabled The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After specifying the input mode if the sa
364. ent refer to Section 4 2 e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC communi High speed cation i FXsu 4DA FX3u 4DA FX u 4DA special FXau 4DA Put Output ADP ADP ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI A A Special data registers D8270 to D8279 Special auxiliary relays Special devices Special auxiliary relays D A fT OD Seca ae D8260 to D8269 Fy Special auxiliary relays DIA M8270 to M8279 D A M8280 to M8289 0 Bf speciel data registers D8280 to D8289 a Special auxiliary 0 ray A gt gt e U M8290 to M8299 pA PT LU special data registers G D8290 to D8299 Es HEM z The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the 9 next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on In this case however do not include the high 0 speed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CF card special adapter ait ray F gt gt U m 2s E gt p 53 U a Mld TVt NEXd day F 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data FX3G Series PLC Communi cation Connector FX3u 4DA special FX3u 4DA conversion ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3G Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Sequence Special auxiliary re
365. ent temperature er 0 7 C E 0 to 55 C 0 7 C 1 digit for full scale Cold junction temperature compensation error Time required for conversion 1 0 C 2 0 C if the input value is in the range from 150 C to 100 C 3 0 C if the input value is in the range from 200 C to 150 C 500ms Sampling period Input characteristics When type K input mode 2 When type K input mode 4 is set is set 2400 33 D Ds a as 100 C 100 F 0 gt 1300 C Temperature 0 gt 2400 F Temperature Insulation method e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC e The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 For FX2N 2LC the rated temperature range digital output value and resolution depend on the selected sensor and mode 2 Accuracy is not guaranteed for the temperature range of 0 C to 399 C 0 F to 799 F of the thermocouple B input and for the temperature range of 0 F to 32 F of the PL II and WRe5 26 inputs A 46 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Version Number Common Items 5 1 PLC Main Unit 5 Version Number 5 1 PLC Main Unit 5 1 1 Manufacturer s serial nu
366. entire system 4 Up to 7 units can be connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC 2 This function is just available for FX3U and FX3UC PLCs E 3 Ww sua UOWWOJ gt dvr onex4 dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdar nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting to use the FX3U 4DA follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4DA Refer to Chapter 1 e Outline of system e Version number of compatible PLC e Version number of compatible programming tool Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Check specifications A Specifications e Operation environment Refer to the common e Performance specifications pages e Output characteristics System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the analog control common pages Refer to Chapter 3 e Selection of units Wiring e Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog data output test program Output mode specification e Output mode specification program for channel 1 to 4 Refer to Chapter 5 Buffer memory BFM check Buffer memory e Buffer memory read write method e List of buffer memories e Deta
367. equence program described in this section runs under the following conditions 1 System configuration The FX3U 4AD unit No 0 should be connected to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Device assignment Device Description X000 4AD initialization command 2 Example of sequence program For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs aVy NeX3 avvr onexs AAD initialization command X000 FNC 12 The 4AD will be initialized e will be initialized Mov E unGa BFM 0 to 6999 will be cleared e For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 4AD initialization command X000 aly FNC 79 KO K20 K1 K1 The 4AD will be initialized TOR BFM 0 to 6999 will be cleared 3 Cautions var nex4 MI It takes approximately 5 seconds to complete initialization Do not write any data to the buffer memory in this time When initialization is complete the value of BFM 20 will be reset to KO e Priority is given to the data change disable BFM 19 To initialize write K2080 to BFM 19 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day B 61 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 1 PLC Version Number Check 8 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error codes If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items
368. er PLC equipment PLC equipment BES equipment Lo d wa Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 4 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 3A ADP The 3A ADP may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications Conversion circuit driving 24V DC 20 15 90MA It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power line to the terminal block power Interface driving power 5V DC 20mA Since the internal power is supplied from the main unit of the FX Series it is not necessary to supply the power FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications Specifications Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Item Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current output ma Number of input 2ch Ich SS output points 2 4mA to 20mA DC a Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC OV to 10V DC output range Input resistance 198 7kQ Input resistance 250Q External load 5k to 1MQ External load 5002 or less Absolute 0 5V 2mA i i C maximum input 15V 30mA x Digital input i K output 12 bits binary 5 Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 5uA 16mAx1 3200 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4uA
369. er s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for TC ADP 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 4 SWOD5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later L 5 A ANd OVt NEXA dav OL dVb NEX4 adv d uojongsu did Sm 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the TC ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating Ambient temperature 55 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s m
370. er scale detection b6 eta etc re ded b2 Channel 3 over scale detection b7 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Channel 4 over scale detection b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a 4AD ADP hardware error b6 or 4AD ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program For FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC M8000 m D8288 KAMO Normally ON Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 3rd analog status register b7 OFF communication data error M8002 la AER K4MO D8288 1 1st for the FX3G PLC For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Manoa Error status of 1st analog special adapter PR i RST D8268 6 b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog status register RST Decana b7 OFF communication data error C 21 Ww swe UOWWOD gt dvv onexs Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 mia day Mld ave nex4 Com dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 MOV D8288 K4MO MO 393000000 41 1st for the FX3G PLC 3 Pr
371. eraging is not set for the selected channel 9 Abrupt change detection value setting error b12 1 Description of error The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the abrupt change detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out of the range correct it 10 Upper lower limit detection setting error b13 1 Description of error The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Check that the upper lower limit error detection value is in the range specified for the selected input mode If the value is out of the range correct it 11 Addition data setting error b15 1 Description of error The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program If the remedies above cannot solve the problem initialize and then check the conditions of the 4AD using the test program For a detailed description of 4AD initialization program refer to Subsection 7 4 gt For a detailed description of the test program refer to Chapter 4 B 64 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt OVy INEXY FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable
372. eraging time or the digital filter function is set for the same channel It is not possible to set both functions for the same channel FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 4 Error Status Check 8 4 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 4AD the corresponding bit of BFM 29 error status buffer memory will turn on To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a Bit No Items Bit No Items bO Error detection b8 Data setting error detection x x b1 b9 E b2 Power supply error b10 Averaging time setting error 59 b3 Hardware error b11 Digital filter setting error b4 A D conversion error b12 Abrupt change detection value setting error b5 b13 Upper lower limit detection setting error b6 BFM reading writing impossible b14 b7 b15 Addition data setting error 1 Error detection b0 1 Description of error If any bits from b2 to b4 are turned on this bit bO will turn on 2 Power supply error b2 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 Description of error The 24 V power is not being supplied properly 2 Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supplied voltage var nex4 MI 3 Hardware error b3 1 Description of error 4AD may be defective 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 4 A D c
373. eration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y Shock resistance and Z Raise resistance Using noise simulator of Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise ins Cycle 30 to 100Hz aie withstand 500 y AC for 1 min Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5MAQ or more using 500V DC Insulation resistance insulation resistance meter Class D groundin rounding resistance 100 Q or less Grounding E E g a 3 3 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude lt 2000m 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If PNK ADP is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Other PG equipment RES equipment Be equipment rol MA Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 7 4 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the PNK ADP The PNK ADP may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications A D conversion circuit driving power 24V DC 20 15 45mA It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not necessa
374. eration Half amplitude Hz m s mm me 0357 0055 Tests 10 times in each Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z resistance 57 150 4 9 axis directions Total E 10 to 57 0 075 80 min each Direct Mounti ii 57 to 150 9 8 z Shock E i i i wee 4 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less 9 lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working 4 altitude lt 2000m 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If 4AD ADP is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Other PEC equipment BEG equipment PLG equipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 4 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 4AD ADP The 4AD ADP may malfun
375. eries PLC including the other analog expansion board analog special adapters 2 Either voltage input or current input can be specified for each channel 3 A D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3G Series PLC System Point and section to be referred to 2 maximum including other analog expansion oe analog special adapters FX3G Series PLC 7 ra Number of connectable units o To check the connectable pama pama eee PLC model number refer lo 7 q Ftan 40M to Section 1 3 Connected to the option connector 1 Connected to the option connector 2 Analog data For a detailed KETENE description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 Flowmeter pressure sensor etc me ontents 7 5 For a detailed description Transfer direction Special devices of special devices refer to eAnalog data SS fF 1st board M D8260 to M D8269 Chapter 4 eSwitching of input mode e 2nd board M D8270 to M D8279 eSetting of averaging time For a detailed description of a basic program refer to Section 4 8 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type
376. erminal 6 3mm 0 25 or more 6 2mm 0 24 or less 3A Terminal 6 3mm 0 25 or more FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 3 Cable FX3uc 4AD Use the following cables to connect with counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded single wire directly or use the rod terminal with insulation sleeve To directly terminate end of stranded single wire cable Terminate the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires cannot protrude WH Do not solder plate the end of the cable z z Wire size stranded Tightening Termination xx single wire torque S T 0 3mm to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable 56 Single wire AWG22 to 20 and then twist the core before connection o as se ii To connect a single wire cable peel the cover off the Double wire 0 3mm AWG22 cable before connection C 0 3mm to 0 5mm 0 22Nem to Rod terminal with insulation sleeve x Rod terminal AWG22 to 20 0 25Nem recommended terminal E with Refer to the external Al 0 5 8WH Manufactured by Phoenix Contact gt insulation view of rod terminal Caulking tool
377. ermometer sensor Pt100 da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O ko 2 O oO E Q 0 cb a Oo 6 N SE O ko a Cc S w 5 5 5 eN N co je 2 ou var nex4 MI For a detailed description of the connectable special function blocks and system configuration gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3U Series PLC gt FX Series Type Z Analog special function blocks for 5 the FX3U FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA G Analog special function blocks for FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA FX2N 5A the FX2N FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC x a Analog special function blocks for gt the FXON FONA gt mn gt w ce gt s U mn x lt E gt E 3 U gt E gt a gt U 32 A 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 3 2 FX3uc Series PLC 3 2 1 Connection of special adapters 1 FX3uc D DSS Series PLC 5 E O O 8 v o i S N fn D E o ho Ku ra D o a D O E o 470 connect the special function blocks or the conversion adapters BD i refer to Subsection 3 2 2 1 o eet ete Soe keen eee ee eb ee Ree oC eee represent the co
378. es PLC 4AD ADP FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FXa2nc Series PLC Input extension block ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Power z Power Power crossover y E connector connector connector E P gt iw TU Terminal block 2s E A gt L Class D 24VDC grounding 53 TU Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line a For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit Mld TVt NEXd day C 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 4 Analog Input Line 3 4 Analog Input Line For analog input voltage input or current input can be selected for each channel If current input is selected 4AD ADP Terminal block a power supply line 7 24 avoe ET fa 8 Class D grounding VO I chO represents the channel number 1 Use the 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog input lines and separate the analog input lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 If current input is selected be sure to short the line between the VL terminal and the I terminal
379. es PLC 200us Data updated every scan time FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time Time required for conversion ag dyz X4 J ddv avr nexs O Input characteristics 255 C 491 F 0 gt 250 C 500 Temperature var nex4 MI 580 Temperature The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 0 points This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC ddv ve nex4 s da Vd1 9 x4 O dav var nexs TI day avi nex4 Ga dav Mld A 39 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 2 FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points Input signal 4ch JIS C 1604 1997 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s Rated temperature range 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Digital output Resolution 1000 to 6000 0 2 C to 0 3 C 1480 to 11120 0 4 F to 0 5 F Overall accuracy e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 for full scale e Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 1 0 for full
380. es of Power Supply Circuit 3 3 1 FX3u 4AD Below are shown examples of circuits for using the 24V DC service power supply of the FX3G FX3U Series PLC 1 Sink input common wiring AC power 100 to 240 V Class D grounding FX3G FX3U Series PLC main unit Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the 24V terminal 2 Source input common wiring AC power 100 to 240 V FX3G FX3U Series PLC main unit Connect the S S terminal of the main unit to the OV terminal B 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 3 3 2 FX3UC 4AD Terminal block Terminal block Q jo 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FXanc Series PLC Input extension block 2 FX3uc 4AD FX3uc 4AD 15V dvp nexs 15V dvv onexs 15V 15V a Power A ower ower ENET Power crossover eee connector connector connector connector Power connector connector connector Black Red Black ed Class D FX2Nc 10BPCB1 FX2Nc 10BPCB1 grounding Power crossover cable Power crossover cable da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 24V DC FX2nc 100BPCB Power cable 4 The FX3UC MT D and FX3UC 32MT LT 2 are supplied together with power cable 2 The FX2NC EX DS and FX2NC 16EX T
381. eseeaeeesesaeeeeeseaeeeesenesessneeeees J 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications cccccecccceeeccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeesenaeeseeceeeeeseneeeesseueeeeneees J 7 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccceccecccceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeeecaceceseneeeeeseeeeeescaeeeesecusessneeeees J 7 2 4 A D Conversion Time cocida J 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC ooonnocccccnnncccnnnnancnonononananononaccnnnnanannnononanano conca nano nananinns J 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLCS isiin niai e e Eee eee ai edeu ven J 9 2 5 Temperature Measurement cceecceenceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeneennaeeeeegs J 9 3 Wiring J 10 Sil PenminalE yOur rat seis oa a SDS ie et ete erate J 11 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeesaees J 12 3 3 Power Supply LING ER ashe estas dada dada J 13 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3U Series PLC 1 W W W Xu u usssssseseeereree eee nen ennen kernerne cnn cnn renerne ken ee ennen nes J 13 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3UC Series PLC 22222220 ager beer eee eee ede end bede fok diedi dut ede ders J 13 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensol ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesteeeeseeeees J 14 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor cccs eccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeees J 14 316 Grounding ius Oe ik cee ek een ed a te
382. et value of 1 V set 1000 mV gt For a detailed description of the offset data refer to Subsection 5 4 6 Determine the gain data Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 16000 Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode and the analog output value in pA for the current output mode Example To set the gain value of 3 V set 3000 mV 5 1 2 1 3V 3000 mV gt For a detailed description of the gain data refer to Subsection 5 4 6 E 54 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Changing Output Characteristic FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics 6 Create a sequence program To change the output characteristics write the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 17 in the sequence program and then turn on the corresponding bit of BFM 9 for the corresponding channel Example Program for changing the output characteristics of channels 1 and 2 For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs FNC 12 Cancellation of setting change MOV EJ K3030 U0 G19 prohibition mode FNC 12 MOV Ey HFFOO UOIGO X000 Output mode specification for channels 1 to 4 Setting of offset data channels 1 and 2 Setting of gain data channels 1 and 2 FNC 16 K3000 U0 G14 K2 row 2000 voeta e FNC 12 i i H0003 UO G9 Offset gain setting value write command FNC 12 KO U0IG19 PES
383. ethod 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control 5 2 Program example of auto tuning step response method and PID control Initi M8 PID control is started after auto tuning X010 al pulse 002 MOV K70 z D515 wit Auto tuning ON flag PID control is started hout auto tuning Auto tuning setting flag X011 Mo e gem ERICA y FNC 12 goa K3000 D510 a FNC 12 MOV SET FNC 12 1800 D502 MOV M1 FNC 12 MOVP K500 D510 Initial pulse M8002 Ly FNC79 Ko KO H3303 K1 TO RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78 1k KO K 10 D501 K1 FROM Initial pulse M8002 HH 3 RST D502 PID control is PID control is started auto tuning without auto tuning X010 X011 PID control is started without auto tuning X11 1 FNC 88 D500 D501 D510 D502 PID control is PID started after auto tuning X10 O The target value is set to 50 C The input filter constant a is set to 70 The differential gain KD is set to 0 The output value upper limit is set to ON for 2 sec The output value lower limit is set to ON for 0 sec The auto tuning setting is started Auto tuning ON flag The sampling time Ts for auto tuning is set to 3 sec Operation setting ACT Auto tuning is started The output value for auto tuning is set to ON for 1 8 sec The sampling time Ts for normal oper
384. exs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale day Mld avy nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 5 Changing of Input Characteristics Use the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 for the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to change the input characteristics FX3G Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction Use sequence programs to change the input characteristics gt For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction Edition 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics In the example explained in this section the voltage input data 1 to 5 V Digital output value 400 to 2000 is changed to the digital output value 0 to 10000 1 Input characteristics Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed Z product specifications Y axis 24000 ES i 10000 q 5 5 i 2 i Sy i ES 2 i D i OB x E A i 382 2000 il gm 5638 i 400 PA i X axis 0 4v 5V gt 10V 0 400 1V 2000 5V Analog input SS Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion C 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of I
385. ff when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected gt Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To connect to the FX3uc Series PLC FX2NC Series PLC Input extension block PNK ADP FX3uc Series PLC Main unit Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding Cautions regarding connection of the power supply line For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit K 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of the Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt1000 Ni1000 2 wire or 3 wire sensors resistance thermometer sensor 3 5 Wiring of the Resistance Thermomester Sensor Wiring depends on the resistance thermometer sensor type selected Refer to the following wiring diagrams Resistance thermometer PNK ADP wiring ev 3 wire sensors M Terminal 47kQ type Shield wire block
386. ffset and gain data BFM 10 to 17 1 Description of error 24 V power is not correctly supplied 2 Remedy Check the wiring condition or the supply voltage asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI Hardware error b3 1 Description of error FX3U 4DA may be defective 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office dav ve nex 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the functions setting value for setting output upon PLC stop is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the setting value of output data upon PLC stop BFM 32 to 35 dav a M1d dVb NeX4 day E 65 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 5 FX3U 4DA Initialization and Test Program 9 5 6 Upper lower limit function value setting error b6 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the upper lower limit function is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the lower limit BFM 41 to 44 and upper limit BFM 45 to 48 settings value of the upper lower limit function 7 Error in corrective function setting by load resistance b7 1 Description of error The bit will turn on when the setting value of the corrective function by load resistance is not correctly set 2 Remedy Check the output mode BFM 0 and the load resistance values BFM 51 to 54
387. figuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 FX3G Series PLC e Connect the special function block s to the right side of the FX3G Series PLC Up to 8 special function blocks can be connected PLC Analog special function block for FX3U and FX2N MITSUBISHI W FXao 40M DAA Up to 8 special function units blocks can be connected excluding the special adapters gt For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition A 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 2 Description of Analog Products 2 2 List of Analog Product Models Refer ence Refer 2 2 List of Analog Product Models The analog input output products compatible with the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC are described below 2 2 1 Expansion board FX3G Series PLC Type Noor Range Resolution Function yP channels 9 Voltage current input Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits i FX3G 2AD BD ch g Combined use of voltage and Current 4mA to 20mA DC 8yA 11bits current inputs is possible Voltage current output Voltage OV to 10V DC 2 5mV 12bits FX3G 1DA BD 1ch Voltage and current output Current 4mA to 20mA DC 8uA 11bits 2 2 2 Special adapter Type No of Range Resolution Function yP channels 9 Voltage current input ence FX3U 4AD ADP 4ch
388. ftware Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 4 SWOD5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later K 5 ANd OVt NEXA dav day lt S Lava rm uoponysu did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the PNK ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating Ambient temperature 55 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm 7 E gt Tested 10 times in Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting E each direction X Y resistance 57 150 4 9 and Z axis directions i ae 10 to 57 z 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 98 4 147 m s2 Accel
389. g FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Error Status For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error RST D8268 6 RST Initial pulse Error status in the 1st analog special adapter D8268 7 b7 OFF communication data error 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 MOV D8288 K4MO MO 000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified M1 range or disconnection is detected D The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M2 7002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified M3 range or disconnection is detected 7003 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M4 7002 EEPROM error in 3rd adapter M5 7005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter M6 7006 PNK ADP hardware error in 3rd adapter M7 7007 PNK ADP communication data error in the 3rd adapter 1 1st for the FX3G PLC K 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 7 Error Status 3 Program Example 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC D8268 0 ANd OVt NEXA dav The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outsi
390. g version number is used programming will not be possible 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later J 5 ave nexg OU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 ed day Mld dWy NEXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the PTW ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o 3 i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm PERS EET 1035 Tested 10 times in each Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z resistance 57 150 4 9 axis directions Total E 10 to 57 0 075 80 min each Direct Mounti ii 57 to 150 9 8 z Shock E i i i wee 4 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z resistance Noise Using noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise wi
391. ge R W to 4095 D8286 D8296 Unused Do not use D8287 D8297 D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 10 D8289 D8299 Model code 50 R Section 4 11 4 3 Switching of Input Mode Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the input mode of 3A ADP between the current input mode and the voltage input mode To switch the input mode use the following special auxiliary relays e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF Voltage input M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON Current input e FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 OFF Voltage input M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 ON Current input Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC To switch the channel input mode create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the input mode of channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the voltage input mode M8001 M8260 Normally OFF 2 To switch the input mode of channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter to the current input mode M8000 1520 Normally ON H 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 4 Switching of Output Mode 44 Sw
392. ge output mode To switch the output mode use the following special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relay 1st board 2nd board Description M8260 M8270 Program Example To switch the output mode create a sequence program as follows Switches the output mode To switch the channel output mode of the 1st analog board to the voltage output mode M8001 M8260 Normally OFF OFF Voltage output ON Current output FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting g 3 o This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data OV for voltage output mode 4mA for current output mode when the PLC stops 2 To cancel or set the output holding function use the following special auxiliary relays B Special auxiliary relay i Description XX 1st board 2nd board Se OFF Holds the analog data output S Cancel output holding function just before stop of the PLC eens Meara setting ON Outputs the offset data at stop of the PLC 1 Program Example To set or cancel the output holding function create a sequence program as follows To set the output holding function for the 1st analog board M8001 M8264 Normally OFF ag dyz 9 X4 J ddv avr nexs O 4 5 Output Setting Data E Z 2s Nume
393. h as specifications USER S GUIDE product q i and installation and also describes various programs Analog input output unit PASUSA ADP JY997D35601 Supplied with Ben eae eee oh ee alee USER S MANUAL product PS Pek P i P and installation FX2N 5A Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 5A analog input output JY997D11401 special function block hardware such as specifications USER S MANUAL product 2 3 and installation and also describes various programs FAON A JY992D49001 Supplied with Bye ed as A E R USER S GUIDE product P p and installation and also describes various programs A 52 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment 6 2 Description of Related Manuals Manual type Temperature sensor unit Document number Supplied with product or supplied separately Description This manual describes the FX3Uu 4AD PT ADP platinum FX3U 4AD PT ADP Supplied with q USER S MANUAL JY997D14701 product resistance thermometer input special adapter hardware such as specifications and installation EX3u 4AD PTW ADP Supplied with This manual describes the FX3U 4AD PTW ADP JY997D29101 platinum resistance thermometer input special adapter USER S MANUAL product mage i A hardware such as specifications and installation PRISA PICADA JY997D29201 Supplied with Io ende oo ee rans USER S MANUAL
394. hannel 4 FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay re TA Description M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 OFF Voltage output M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 ON Current output M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 F 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 4 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC To switch the output mode of a channel create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the channel output mode of 2 To switch the output mode of channel 2 channel 1 of the 1st analog special of the 1st analog special adapter to the adapter to the voltage output mode current output mode U sua UOWWOJ gt M8001 M8000 M8260 x Normally OFF Normally ON 44 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting dvvr onexs aVy NeX3 This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data OV for voltage output mode 4mA for current output mode when the PLC stops To cancel or set the output holding function use the following special auxiliary relays FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Cancel output holding function M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 setting for channel 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv
395. hannel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 88 ONS Foreword This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD PNK ADP special adapter 4 channel resistance thermometer data input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION K 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermocouple Data Input FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter describes the outline of FX3U 4AD PNK ADP referred to as PNK ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4AD PNK ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD PNK ADP to the FX3G FX3u FX3UC Series PLC to read the data from the 4 channel resistance thermometer 1 Up to 4 PNK ADP units can be connected to the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Up
396. hannel number assignment to each bit of BFM 9 Bit No Description bO Channel 1 offset data BFM 10 and gain data BFM 14 writing b1 Channel 2 offset data BFM 11 and gain data BFM 15 writing b2 Channel 3 offset data BFM 12 and gain data BFM 16 writing b3 Channel 4 offset data BFM 13 and gain data BFM 17 writing b4 to b15 Not used The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time Set HOOOF to write the data of all the channels in the EEPROM On completion of writing H0000 bO to b3 OFF will be set automatically 2 Cautions regarding giving offset gain setting value write command While changing the setting the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted e Ifthe analog value specification mode mode 1 or 4 is used the offset gain cannot be changed When other output mode has been set it is possible to change to same characteristics as those in the output mode 1 or 4 e If the write command is not executed the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM e When b1 of the error status BFM 29 is set to ON the offset and gain data will not be stored in the EEPROM For a detailed description of offset and gain setting refer to Subsection 5 4 6 E 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual
397. haracteristics 3 Example of program 2 For FX3G Series PLC For example create the following program to change the digital input data D110 of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 M8280 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode M8000 OV to 10V FNC 12 D8288 K4MO MOV su i Error status b6 OFF Ma Error status b7 OFF FNC 12 a KAMO D8288 i M8000 FNC 12 Sets the averaging scaling to 1 MOV K1 D8284 for the channel 1 data M8000 FNC 12 D8280 D110 MOV FNC 230 D110 K400 FNC 237 D110 K2000 M10 Check to make sure the digital LD gt AND lt value D110 is in range M10 FNC 21 D110 K400 D111 i Calculation for changing input ive a D111 K10000 D112 characteristics ae Stores the operation result in D100 FNC 23 DDIV D112 K1600 D100 4 Cautions regarding programming GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 Ifthe A D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 C 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting E This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the fol
398. he average i value will be calculated and the channel data will be updated Average data 401 to 4095 Each time the A D conversion data reaches the averaging E time the average data will be calculated and the channel data will be updated Average data 4096 will be set and the averaging 4096 or more Each time the A D conversion is performed the channel time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will data will be updated occur 1 Application If the measurement signal contains comparatively reduced ripple noise such as supply voltage frequency averaging will result in obtaining of stable data 2 Cautions regarding averaging time setting e To use the averaging function be sure to set the digital filter of the corresponding channel to 0 Digital filter setting BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 To use the digital filter function be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 Averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 If the averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and the digital filter BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter setting error 611 of BFM 29 will occur If one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels e Ifthe averaging time is out of the setting range the averaging time setting error b10 of BFM 29 will occur e Ifthe averaging time is set the data history function
399. he specifications wiring and operation method for the FX3G 1DA BD analog output 3 expansion board 1 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward g it to the end user E 5 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent 93 licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ae rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Mld dWy NEXW4 day G 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output G 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3G 1DA BD referred to as 1DA BD 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3G 1DA BD is an analog expansion board Which is connectable with the FX3G Series PLC to output the voltage current data for up to 1 channel 1 Upto 2 units of 1DA BD can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC Including other analog expansion boards analog special adapters 2 Either voltage output or current output can be specified 3 The D A con
400. hermometer Data Input ave nexd UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 M ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Foreword dav ve nexa mia This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4AD PT ADP special adapter 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user 1d dWy NEXW4 day This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property a rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION M1d dVb NeX4 dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter descr
401. his chapter describes how to create programs that can read out the analog data using the TC ADP Loading of A D Conversion Data 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Subsection 4 2 e FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Communi High speed cation input output FXsu 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD i FX3u 4AD speciel Special FXsu FXsuc Series PLC TC ADP TC ADP TC ADP adapter TC ADP Siapter Special devices Special auxiliary relays M8260 to M8269 A D Special data registers D8260 to D8269 AN Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 AD Bo Special data registers D8270 to D8279 Sequence program Special auxiliary relays AID M8280 to M8289 OO E D8280 to D8289 Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 ecial data registers The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter communication special ad
402. ibes the outline of FX3U 4AD PT ADP referred to as PT ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4AD PT ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD PT ADP to the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC to read the temperature data from the 4 channel platinum resistance thermometers 1 Up to 4 PT ADP units can be connected to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Up to 2 1 PT ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC including other analog special adapters 2 After connection of the platinum resistance thermometer Pt100 measurement of temperature will be possible 3 The temperature measurement data will be automatically written to the special data registers of the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Point and section to be FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 2 maximum Number of connectable i i ial adapters o units eee other analog special wee EXau FX3uc FX3e Series PLC To check the connectable SSG PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 lo 00 00 lo000000000 lo 00 00 lo000000000 lo 00 00 lo 000000000 lo0000 lo000000000 4th 3rd 2nd 1st ao adapter adapter adapter adapter oar For a detailed inns description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC For a detailed des
403. iled description of the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 refer to Subsection 5 4 9 1 If BFM 126 K208 initial value Specified data register Description D208 Upper lower limit error status data in BFM 26 2 Cautions regarding upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 and the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 The data written to BFM 126 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 44 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 23 BFM 127 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register specification Q jo 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K209 Numeric data type Decimal K ma Use this function to automatically transfer the abrupt change detection status data BFM 27 to the data SS
404. ils 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value setting Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in BFM 91 to 94 the system will judge SS that the channel data is changed abruptly ES The result of abrupt change detection will be written to BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data ge The abrupt change detection value setting range depends on the set input mode BFM 0 as shown in the following table Input mode BFM 0 c Set ane Setting range Initial value ES Description value 5 w Voltage input 3 0 tov to 10V 32000 to 32000 Tio B2rer 3209 E Voltage input D 1 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 ene 400 a x lt Voltage input fo 2 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 10000 1000 3 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 1 to 8191 800 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 4000 1 to 2047 200 E Current input x 5 Analog value direct indication mode 1 to 8191 800 E 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 gt Current input 6 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 110 16383 1600 F Current input i 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 1404095 400 x Cc Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 1 t
405. ils of buffer memory Refer to Chapter 6 When the table output function is used Table output function e Preparation of data table e Transfer of data table to buffer memory e Execution of table output function Refer to Chapter 7 e Output characteristics change procedure Refer to Chapter 8 Program edit Program edit e Basic program e Convenient function program If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting E 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 2 3 o FX3U 4DA is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later from the first product B FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later August 2004 and later xx SE FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later from the first product Res gt U 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s
406. in D1 Data to be output to channels 1 to 4 are stored in Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2 DO to D3 Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3 TO Data BMF 1 to 4 to be output to channels 1 to 4 are transferred from DO to D3 Unit number step 1 1 Use the FROM and TO instructions in FX3G PLCs 4 Transfer of sequence program and analog output signal check 1 Transfer the sequence program and start the PLC 2 Check that analog signals appropriate to the set output data are output gt If analog signals are not output correctly refer to Chapter 9 Troubleshooting FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 5 Buffer Memory BFM This chapter describes the buffer memory incorporated in FX3U 4DA 5 1 Assignment of Unit Numbers and Outline of Buffer Memory 1 Assignment of unit numbers Unit numbers from 0 to 7 will be assigned to the special function units blocks starting from the left one When the units blocks are connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC unit numbers from 1 to 7 are assigned When connected to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC D DSS Series PLC Unit number 0 Input output Main unit extension Special block function block function block When connected to the FX3UC 32MT LT 2 PLC Unit number 0 Incorporated Un
407. ing Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When the bits bO to b2 of BFM 60 are turned on the assigned functions see the table below are valid When the bits are turned off the functions are invalid 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 60 Bit No Description Reference When the value of the error status BFM 29 changes bO the status value is transferred to the data register specified by BFM 61 When the value of the upper lower limit function status b1 BFM 39 changes the status value is transferred to the data register specified by BFM 62 When the value of the disconnection detection status b2 BFM 28 changes the status value is transferred to the data register specified by BFM 63 b3 to b15 Invalid setting values unchanged Subsection 5 4 10 Subsection 5 4 19 Subsection 5 4 14 Subsection 5 4 20 Subsection 5 4 9 Subsection 5 4 21 2 Cautions regarding the status automatic transfer function e While changing the settings the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output will be restarted 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will also be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing
408. ing CHECK cise feet eee tac A A bea sage secetec ua A A K 29 5 3 Special Device Check ccccccceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeeseeaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeseseaaeeseseeeeeeseeeeeessneeseseeees K 29 SA Program Cheek cctecs ett tak ia dnd K 30 5 5 Error status Check iii rt hee Le ed K 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents FX3u 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 1 Outline L 3 14 Outlineof FUNCHONS siie 48a do eos ado ea codo dd do L 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ooooconnocccinncoccconnccccconnnccnnnnncnnnnnnncn conan nn nnnnnn cn nannnnnnnns L 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number oooooccconcoccccnococcnnnononononnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns L 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number cccceececeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeseneeeseeees L 5 2 Specifications L 6 2 1 Generic Specifications a i a a a e T E pe a A a EEF L 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications ccccceeccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeseneeeeeseeeeeesceeeesseneenseeeeees L 6 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccccececcceeeeeceeeeceeeeceeeaeeeeeceeeeeeccaeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseneeteneeeees L 7 2 4 AID COMVErSiON TMG ecto E L 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC ooocccccnncncccccoconoconcnoccnnnononononononnncnnnonononnnnononononancnnnrnnnnna L 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC
409. ing the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with following version numbers to create programs for the 3A ADP 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 9 SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G var nex4 MI If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 2 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3uc for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs dqy a Mld dWy NEXW4 day H 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 2 Specifications 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power suppl
410. int The output update time for the n th point is the output time between the n th point and the n 1 th point When the pattern is repeated the output update time at the final point is used as the output time between the final point and the first point When the pattern is not repeated the output update time for the final point is ignored The setting range is 1 to 32767 For the unit refer to Item 8 When a value out of the setting range is set the error code is stored in the table output error code BFM 90 the device number or the buffer memory that has developed the table output error is stored in BFM 91 and b8 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on E 40 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 8 Output update time unit and point to point interpolation method number of data items 1 Set the unit of the output update time and the point to point interpolation method for each point The output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method for the n th point are applied between the n th point and the n 1 th point When the pattern is repeated the output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method are applied between the final point and the first point When the pattern is not repeated the output update time unit and the point to point interpolation method for the final point are ignored
411. ints is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC A 42 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 445 FX2N 4AD PT 5 3 3 o FX2N 4AD PT Specifications 3 Centigrade C Fahrenheit F z Number of input points 4ch B 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor s DIN43760 Input signal Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 1mA Constant current system davr onex4 dvr nexs Input signal current Rated temperature range 100 C to 600 C 148 F to 1112 F Digital output 1000 to 6000 1480 to 11120 Resolution 0 2 C to 0 3 C 0 36 F to 0 54 F Overall accuracy 1 0 for full scale Time required for da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O 60ms 15msx4ch conversion 6000 A u5 75 22 ime 03 a3 Input characteristics 100 C 148 F 0 gt 600 C 4 Temperature 0 gt 1112F Temperature var nexa MI The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Count either the input or output points of the PLC ddv ve nex4 s da Vd1 9 x4 e dav var nexs TI
412. ion MLd V 7 NEX4 dady E 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 3 4 Analog Output Wiring 3 4 Analog Output Wiring The analog output mode voltage output or current output can be selected for each channel 1 2 33 4 5 FX3U 4DA External power supply wiring 15V 15V Class D grounding If voltage output is selected chO O represents the channel number For FX3G FX3U Series PLC AC power type the 24V DC service power supply is also available Do nat connect any wires to the e terminal Use a 2 core twisted shield wire for analog output wire and separate it from other power lines or inductive lines If there is ripple or noise in the output voltage connect a capacitor of approximately 0 1 to 0 47uF 25V in the vicinity of the signal receiving side Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1002 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure gt For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series Other Other Other
413. ion S shaped interpolation a a Point 1 Point 3 BV da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O Time Output update Output update Output update time at point 1 time at point 2 time at point 3 1800 ms 2600 ms 500 ms vdar nexs 6 Caution when preparing the data table e Prepare the data table in continuous data registers in the PLC main unit or continuous expansion registers Prepare data without spaces between patterns or points If data has spaces the data cannot be transferred normally to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA For a detailed description of data table errors refer to Section 6 5 asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa dqy a MId TV NEXd day E 43 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory The data table prepared in the data registers D1000 to D7999 in the PLC or the expansion registers RO to R32767 are transferred to the buffer memory in FX3U 4DA The transfer procedures are shown below Specify the head device number of the data table to be transferred BFM 98 initial value K1000 Specify the head device number of the data table in BFM 98 The setting range is K1000 to K7994 for the data registers D1000 to D7999 because at least six points are occupi
414. ion 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 4DA ADP referred to as 4DA ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3U 4DA ADP is an analog special adapter Which is connectable with the FX3u FX3uc and FX3G Series PLC to output the voltage current data for up to 4 channels 1 Up to 4 units of 4DA ADP can be connected to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Up to 2 1 units of 4DA ADP can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Either voltage output or current output can be specified for each channel 3 The D A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Point and section to be FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 2 1 maximum a of connectable includi th ial adapt units all A e baa FX3u FX3uc FX3G Series PLC Al L To check the connectable reise PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 i lo 0000 0 000000000 lo 00 00 o000000000 lo 0000 o000000000 lo 0000 o000000000 i 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Bee adapter adapter adapter adapter oar For a detailed ee description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 For FX3u FX3uc
415. ion 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 48 BFM 20 Initialization function resetting to factory default status 9 3 3 Setting range KO or K1 3 Initial value KO 3 Numeric data type Decimal K When K1 is set in BFM 20 all functions and all buffer memory BFM 0 to 3098 will be initialized to the B default status lt gt When BFM 20 is not KO or K1 this function is invalid The settings will not be changed and the functions SE will not be initialized DE U 1 Cautions regarding initialization function e During initialization output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of initialization the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted e It takes approximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data Do not set write data in the buffer memory during this period e Priority is given to the setting of the value change prohibition mode BFM 19 At the completion of initialization the value of BFM 20 will automatically change to KO da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 5 4 9 BFM 28 Disconnection detection status only in current output mode Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H When a wire break is detected the bit corresponding to the relevant channel will turn on vdr nex4 1 Assignment to each bit of BFM 28 Bit No De
416. ion Good condition Not allowed e The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm e The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible G 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data E 2 3 3 4 Programming z ee This chapter describes how to create programs that can output the analog data using the 1DA BD B SE ng Ce 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data BE U 1 The input digital data will be converted into analog data and then output to the terminals 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the output mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned respectively to the analog expansion board connected to the option connector 1 and the analog expansion board connected to the option connector 2 in this order gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 e FX3G Series PLC FX3G Series PLC Sequence Program da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relays a M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279 33 Special data register Special data register E D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279 g 4 Option connector 1 mm Option connector 2 F FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 1DA BD y 4 w 1st 2nd E
417. ion blocks 2 Each channel has either Voltage Output or Current Output specification 3 The block converts the digital values stored in the FX3u 4DA buffer memory BFM in FX3u 4DA to analog signals voltage current 4 A predetermined output pattern is set as data table and analog signal can be output according to the data table Point and section to be Up to 8 units connect to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC including other types of special function blocks sees Number of connectable units FX3G FX3u Series PLC MITSUBISHI E E r7 E PIET sggggeggenesenss To check the connectable PLC eeeeee model number refer to Section 1 3 steel sen Fora detailed description of Inverter etc wiring refer to Chapter 3 LP For a detailed description of analog data output programs refer to Chapter 4 7 and 8 For a detailed description of seers the buffer memory refer to Eutenmenoni Section 5 3 and Section 5 4 Program e FROM FNC 78 Transmission direction BFM 0 e TO FNC 79 A To use FROM TO instruction i E or to directly specify the BFM e BFM direct gt BFM 3098 refer to Section 5 2 specification ULNGOy Refer to the system configuration shown in the FX3G FX3U FX3UC User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the
418. ion of hardware error refer to Section 6 5 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for the 4DA ADP of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 9 SWOIDSC GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C e SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 2 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 1 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later F 5 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvv onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav vd nex4 dOv VE NeX4 oe dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual
419. ipment Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 6 4 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the PT ADP The PT ADP may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Items Specification A D conversion circuit driving power 24V DC 20 15 50mA It is necessary to connect a 24V DC p ower supply to the terminal block Interface driving power 2 3 5V DC 15mA necessary to supply the power Performance Specifications Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not Items Specifications Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Input signal 3 wire platinum resistanc e thermometer sensor Pt100 JIS C 1604 1997 Rated temperature 50 C to 250 C 58 F to 482 F range Digital output 500 to 2500 580 to 4820 Resolution 0 1 C 0 18 F Total accuracy 0 5 for full scale when ambient t 1 0 for full scale when ambient t emperature is 25 C 5 C emperature is in the range from 0 to 55 C FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 200s The data will be updated at every scan time A D con
420. iption FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8289 D8299 Model code Description Use the special data registers above to check whether PTW ADP is connected or not 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC FNC224 D8269 K21 Foto Checks the model code of the 1st LD analog special adapter J 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 8 Basic Program Example 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data e For FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 MOV D8288 K4MO Ww sw UOWWOJ gt avvr onexs Qvp nexs Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error paa ACA K4MO D8288 Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 var nex4 MI
421. is set for auto tuning to 1 second 1000 ms or more It is recommended that the sampling time is set to that it is considerably longer than the output change cycle 3 Setting to ON bit 4 of Css 1 operation setting ACT to start auto tuning When the variation from the measured value at the start of auto tuning to the target value reaches 1 3 or more auto tuning is completed And bit 4 of CS3 1 operation setting ACT is automatically set to OFF 1 Important point Start auto tuning while the system is stable If the system is unstable when auto tuning is started auto tuning may not be executed normally M 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Auto Tuning PID Instruction FNC 88 4 3 Cautions on Auto Tuning Execution 4 23 Reference How to obtain three constants in PID control step response method For acquiring satisfactory control results during PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable for the control target This paragraph explains the step response method to obtain three constants in the PID control proportional gain KP integral time TI and differential time TD What is the step response method In this method by giving stepped output from 0 to 100 to the control system three constants in the PID control are obtained from the operation characteristics maximum ramp R and dead time L and the input value variation
422. istory of all the channels will be MOV E HOF00 UO G199 temporarily stopped Temporarily stop data history FNC 12 H0000 U0 G199 ewig Hoot unex FNC 15 BMOV U0 G200 D100 K100 X001 FNC 15 BMOV U0 G1900 D200 K100 FNC 15 BMOV U0 G3600 D300 K100 FNC 15 U0 G5300 D400 K100 Temporary stoppage of data history will be canceled for all the channels da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 Channel 1 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D100 to D199 var nex4 MI The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 2 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D200 to D299 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 3 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D300 to D399 The watchdog timer will be refreshed Channel 4 history data 100 data samples will be read out to D400 to D499 asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI The watchdog timer will be refreshed H er ray 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each amp setting s After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time 5 TO K50 again 2 The set input mode and the sampling time are retained in the 4AD EEPROM Therefore even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid x 3 Ifa large amount of history data is read out the scan time
423. it CC Link LT number 1 Main unit Input output FX3uc 32MT extension Special LT 2 block function block function block Input output extension Input output extension Unit number 2 Special block function unit Unit number 3 Special block function unit E 15 avr nexa DY sway uowwo gt vr onex4 da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa dqy a Mld AYY NEX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 2 Outline of buffer memory The digital values set in FX3U 4DA will be converted to analog signals To switch the output mode between voltage output and current output or to adjust the offset or gain numeric data will be sent from the main unit and written set in the FX3U 4DA buffer memory To read write data from into the buffer memory of FX3U 4DA the buffer memory can be directly specified using FROM TO instructions or an applied instruction Using this function sequence programs can be easily created FX3u FX3UC e BFM direct Series PLC eon FX3u 4DA specification e TO instruction e BFM direct specification e TO instruction Sequence program A e BFM direct specification e FROM instruction e BFM direct specification e FROM instruction
424. it value and output lower limit value are 6748 ee upper limit set value lt PID outputI wer limit exchanged for each other gt PID operation is continued gt Check whether the target settings are correct 6749 Abnormal PID input variation alarm set value or output lt Alarm output is not given gt PID operation is continued gt variation alarm set value Set value lt 0 Check whether the target settings are correct lt Auto tuning is finished gt PID operation is started gt The deviation at start of auto tuning is 150 or less lt Step response method gt The deviation at end of auto tuning is 1 3 or more of the 6750 SR Improper auto tuning result deviation at start of auto tuning Confirm the measured value and target value and then execute auto tuning again lt Auto tuning is forced to finish gt PID operation does not started gt The operation direction estimated from the measured value at 6751 lt Step response method gt the start of auto tuning was different from the actual operation Auto tuning operation direction mismatch direction of the output during auto tuning Correct the relationship among the target value output value for auto tuning and measured value and then execute auto tuning again FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes Error Error description Action uw code P ES lt Auto tuning is finishe
425. itching of Output Mode g 3 oa Turn the special auxiliary relay on off to switch the output mode of 3A ADP between the current output mode and the voltage output mode El To switch the output mode use the following special auxiliary relays e FX3U FX3UC Series PLC B ma Special Ti 7 SS pecial auxiliary relay SON 22 1st 2nd 3rd 4th bS E U M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode OFF Voltage output ON Current output FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay ist 2nd Description OFF Voltage output M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode ON Current output 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC To switch the output mode of a channel create a sequence program as follows 1 To switch the channel output mode of channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter to the voltage output mode M8001 E Normally OFF 45 Output Holding Function Cancellation Setting da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 M This setting can hold the analog data output or to output the offset data OV for voltage output mode 4mA for current output mode when the PLC stops To cancel or set the output holding function use the following special auxiliary relays FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th OFF Holds the analog data output Cancel output holding just before stop of the PLC mene Meare M8286 MRE function setting ON Outputs the offset data at s
426. items is increased to the set averaging time Set the averaging time in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set value is outside the setting range the error signal will be output If the averaging time is set to 0 or smaller the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 1 If the averaging time is set to 4096 or larger the PLC will perform as if the averaging time is set to 4096 gt For a detailed description of error status refer to Section 5 5 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the averaging time to 5 for the channel 2 data of the 1st analog special adapter J 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status If an error is detected in the PTW ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data FX3G Series PLC Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to
427. itten in BEM 6 BFM 0 Output mode setting BFM 5 Output setting upon PLC stop BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command BFM 19 Setting change prohibition BFM 20 Initialization function BFM 32 to 35 Data to be output from each channel upon PLC stop BFM 50 Corrective function setting by load resistance BFM 51 to 54 Load resistance for each channel BFM 60 Status automatic transfer function Setting BFM 61 vdr nexs Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status with automatic transfer to specified data register BFM 63 Disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register specification BFM 99 Data table transfer command a gt lt E gt gt U a gt lt E Y 83 U a Mld dWy NeXW day E 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 5 BFM 9 Offset gain setting value write command Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Channel numbers are assigned to 4 lower bits of BFM 9 If one of those bits is turned on the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 17 of the corresponding channel will be written in the internal memory EEPROM When written in the internal memory the data will be valid 1 C
428. jor accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When combining this product with other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulations with which the user should follow Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is using e Ifin doubt at any stage during the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the examples indicated by this manual technical bulletin catalog etc are used as a reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of the equipment and system Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e This manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement e The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however if you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor Registration e Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries The company name a
429. l 1 data Set the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the A D converted channel 1 digital data into D100 Stores the A D converted channel 2 digital data into D101 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored in D102 H 27 Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Qvr onex4 Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs day Mld Qyr NeXd Con dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 Programming 4 12 Basic Program Example e FX3U FX3uc Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 1st adapter to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 The program will also set voltage output for output channels and set the digital D A conversion output to D102 M8001 Normally OFF M8000 Normally ON M8001 FNC 12 D8260 D100 p ve veo y FNC 12 D8261 D101 FEER FNC 12 D102 D8262 Even if the input data is not stored into D100 or D101 the data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the timer counter setting value or in a PID instruction Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D102 M8000 Set the input mode of
430. l input Digital input Caution An area of dead band is located in the region of OV Therefore the output analog value may not represent the digital value accurately da Vd1 9 XxX4 Insulation method The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC H Numbers pi nO 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC g points occupied S g gt U m x gt 2 33 TU x E gt Y gt u E G 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 2 3 D A Conversion Time 2 3 D A Conversion Time This section describes the D A conversion time 1 D A conversion and special data register update timing D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of the END instruction the PLC writes the output setting data of the special data registers performs D A conversion of the data and updates the analog output data FX3G Series PLC Sequence Program END instruction D A conversion start command Digital value D A conversion writing start command Digital value writing conversion conversion 60us 60us 1ch 1ch FX3G 1DA BD FX3G 1DA BD ist 2nd 2 D A conversion during PLC stop If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function ca
431. larm output C33 24 i 0 Output variation incremental is 3 2 8 bit not exceeded 1 Output variation incremental is exceeded 0 Output variation decremental is bit3 not exceeded 1 Output variation decremental is exceeded The setting b elow is required when the limit cycle method is used when the operati on direction ACT b6 is set to ON PV value threshold Set it according to measured value They are occupied when operation direction ACT bit 6 is ON limit cycle method 25 hysteresis width SHPV PV fluctuation Output value upper limit Set maximum value ULV of output G3 26 ULvy value MV Output value lower limit Set minimum value LLV of output C3 27 yy value MV Wait setting from end of tuning CS 3 28 cycle to start of PID control 50 to 32717 Kw 4 ES 1 Chapter 4 CS3 20 to 24 become occupied only if bits 1 2 or 5 are set to 1 to determine the action ACT of M 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters A 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 1 Sampling time Ts S3 ANd AYY NEXA dav Setting range 1 to 32767 ms m Set the cycle time ms for the PID operation Inthe PID control E Set the sampling time longer than the operation cycle of the PLC gt In the auto tuning 353 U Set the sampling tim
432. lays M8290 to M8299 pia TS speciel cata registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter In this case however do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type F 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices g 3 o If 4DA ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table e FX3uU FX3UC Series PLC 2 R Read W Write B Special Device number HAr 7 k Description Attribute Reference FR device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th ee S M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 R W bS M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the output mode of channel 2 R W Section E M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of channel 3 R W 4 3 M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 Switches the output mode of channel 4 R W C Sets the cancel of the channel 1 output x M8264 M8274 M8284 M8294 p R W 2 holding function E Special gt auxiliary M8265 M8275 M8285 M8295 Sets the cancel of the channel 2 output RW
433. le Create the following basic program example to read out the temperature measurement data e For FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the 3rd adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 M8000 D8288 K4MO M8002 Ww sw UOWWOJ gt avvr onexs Qvp nexs Error status of 3rd analog special adapter Initial b6 OFF hardware error pulse Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data Stores the current value of the channel 1 temperature measurement data in the D100 var nex4 MI Stores the average value of the channel 2 temperature measurement data in the D101 ae FNC 12 D8280 D100 ewe cee ate FNC 12 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction 4 1st for the FX3G PLC For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will store the temperature measurement data C from channels 1 and 2 of the ist adapter to D100 and D101 respectively The averaging time is set
434. le transfer command BFM 99 the data table will be transferred from the data register D1000 E 44 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 3 Procedures for transferring data table to buffer memory 3 Buffer memory contents in FX3U 4DA after transfer The transferred data table is stored in the following buffer memory areas Ww sua uowwog gt BEM Description number P 100 y Number of points 101 aj Condition after output at final point in pattern Ey 102 2 Output data SE See ES 103 Point 1 Output update time Be Unit of output update time at each point and point to 104 ine point interpolation method C A gt lt E E gt 396 Output data e A A gt i o 397 Point 99 Output update time 2 Unit of output update time at each point and point to 398 point interpolation method D 399 Not used x ig gt Y uw iw 2800 Number of points 2801 Condition after output at final point in pattern 2802 Output data a mann A A 2803 Point 1 eu update time 9 2804 v Unit of output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method i F S 3 3096 Output data S i gt 3097 Point 99 a update time 5 3098 Unit of output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method G ra og Ea wo o dav ve nexa
435. learance of over scale data The upper lower limit error status data of each channel will be output to YOOO to YO07 The over scale status data of each channel will be output to YO10 to Y017 The error detection signal will be output to YO20 The setting error detection signal will be output to YO21 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After this if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 again 2 The set input mode convenient functions upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register number over scale status data automatic transfer to data register number and error status data automatic transfer to data register number are retained in the 4AD EEPROM For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid B 56 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 2 Program That Uses Convenient Functions e For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs o 3 Initial pulse 3 M8002 ENG 79 H3300 Input modes of channels 1 to 4 will be z RUN monitor TO specified M8000 C gt K50 TO aVy NeX3 The convenient functions will be set 2 FNC 79 The upper lower limit error status data automatic K126 K100 transfer to dat
436. line Refer to Chapter 4 Analog input line Programming Programming eDetails of special devices eExamples of basic programs If the error status data or the input analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 5 Troubleshooting K 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number PNK ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version number gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool having the following version number to create programs for PNK ADP 1 GX Developer So
437. ll be written to BFM 101 to 104 as the minimum peak value Subsection b3 function g and the maximum value of channel data written to BFM 10 to 5419 13 will be written to BFM 111 to 114 as the maximum peak a value If the automatic transfer to first data register is specified in BFM Subsection 17125 the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and the Peak value automatic 2 5 4 19 b4 i maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 will be automatically q transfer function oe f Subsection written to the specified data registers 8 points registers 5421 starting from the first data register specified o O N If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to Subsection b5 e tomate data register is specified in BFM 126 the upper lower limit error 5 4 16 status data BFM 26 will be automatically written to the Subsection transfer function y i specified data register 5 4 22 Abrupt change If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to Subsection b6 detection status data data register is specified in BFM 127 the abrupt change 5 4 17 automatic transfer detection status data BFM 27 will be automatically written to Subsection function the specified data register 5 4 23 Over scale status If the over scale status data automatic transfer to data register is Subsecci n b7 data automatic specified in BFM 128 the over scale status data BFM 28 will i A i i i 5 4 24 transfer function be automatically written t
438. log Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 2 2 Performance Specifications 2 2 Performance Specifications Specifications Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Item Voltage output Current output Analog output OV to 10 V DC 4mA to 20mA DC xx range External load 2kQ to 1MQ External load 500 or less SE gt Digital input 12 bits binary 11 bits binary 5 Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 8uA 16mA 2000 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C mm 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C 1 0 160A for 16mA full scale when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C Shipment adjustment is carried out by external Total accuracy load resistance 2kQ If external load resistance becomes larger than 2kQ the output voltage will increase slightly When the load is 1MQ the output voltage becomes about 2 higher than the correct da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O value D A conversion 60us The data will be updated at every scan time E time gt For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 S E oOo i gt 10V ON I 5 i I 5 3 Eo F 2 o I al 3 2 SE E Output ii g i E characteristics c lt gt lt 4mA i I 5 0 gt 4000 4080 0 gt 2000 2040 Digita
439. log input lines from the other motive power lines or inductive lines 2 To use the current input be sure to short circuit the line between the VE terminal and the terminal LO channel number 3 The SLD and terminals are connected to each other inside 4 Do not connect any lines to the e terminal 3 5 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI The grounding resistance should be 100Q or less e Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following H figure gt gt For details refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of each Series F gt Other Other Other 5 PEC equipment os equipment PLC equipment 3 Loo d a oe a Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed x Use the following grounding wire gt 53 FX3u 4AD AWG14 2mm2 7 qj FX3uc 4AD AWG22 20 0 3 to 0 5mm e The PLC grounding point should be close and all grounding wires should be as short as possible M1d dVb NeX4 day B 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Analog Input FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 4 1 Analog Input Procedures 4 Analog Input This chapter describes the minimum
440. lowed The grounding wire size should be AWG22 to 20 0 3 to 0 5 mm The grounding point should be close to the PLC and all grounding wires should be as short as possible D 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data E 2 3 3 4 Programming z ee a This chapter describes how to create programs that can read analog data using the 2AD BD B lt gt i i FE 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data S iw U 1 The input analog data will be converted into digital data and then stored in the special devices of the FX3G Series PLC C 2 If the data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be y specified E T 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned respectively to the 5 analog expansion board connected to the option connector 1 and the analog expansion board connected S to the option connector 2 in this order For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 e FX3G Series PLC z FX3G Series PLC X O 8 x Special auxiliary relays Special auxiliary relays amp M8260 to M8269 M8270 to M8279 Special data register Special data register 2 D8260 to D8269 D8270 to D8279 Option connector 1 Option connector 2 FX3G 2AD BD FX3G 2AD BD 1st 2nd The analog expansion board connected
441. lowing caution to wire the PT ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common g
442. lowing items e PLC version number Wiring Special devices Programs Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible Check the version number of the FX3UC Series PLC The version number should be 1 20 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The 4AD ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 4AD ADP is on 2 Analog input line Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to shortcircuit the line between the VL terminal and the terminal O channel number of the channel If the line is not shortcircuited data will not be converted into correct digital data For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 avr nexa DY sway uowwo gt vr onex4 da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia d
443. ltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed Make sure to properly wire the terminal block in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should follow the dimensions described in this manual Tightening torque should be between 0 5 and 0 8 Nem B 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 chan
444. lter s 5ms x number of selected channels e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the analog input area from the power supply unit Channels are not insulated from each other Insulation method Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3 mA lt Gain Offset lt 30 mA 4 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels B 7 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a dvr nexs OVy INEXY da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 Specifications 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 2 4 Input Mode Characteristics BFM 0 For the 4AD there are two types of input characteristics voltage 10 to 10V and current 4 to 20mA 20 to 20mA input characteristics The input characteristics depe
445. m r 4 a Tested 10 times in Vibration i DIN Rail Mounting g a each direction X Y resistance 57 150 49 and Z axis directions ae 10 to 57 E 0 075 Total 80 min each Direct Mounting 57 to 150 98 i 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y Shock resistance and Z Noise resistance Using noise simulator of Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz ae withstand 500 v AC for 1 min Between batch of all terminals and ground terminal 5MQ or more using 500V DC Insulation resistance insulation resistance meter Guiada Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less E lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude lt 2000m4 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If TC ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Other PLC equipment FLG equipment PLC equipment ae ee ae Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 7 4 Ifthe pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the TC ADP The TC ADP may malfunction 2 2 Power Supply Specifications Item Specifications A D conversion circuit d
446. m A D conversion start AID command conversion 200 us 4ch Digital value reading A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200 us 4ch MN Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters K 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3G Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion 250 us 4ch Digital value reading
447. mber check method The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked on the nameplate and LOT indicated on the front of the product 1 Checking the nameplate The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number SERIAL indicated on the label adhered to the right side of the product Example FX3U 48MR ES manufacture s serial number 930001 MITSUBISHI ea Right side MODEL FX3u 48MR ES A 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 40W OUT 30VDC 240VAC 2A COS4 1 MITSUBISHI EEE 9999 ETETETT kikik ETTET TLL Aus LISTED 80M1 IND CONT EQ CE a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN L Control number Month Example Mar 1 to 9 January to September X October Y November Z December Year Example 2009 Last digit of year 2 Checking the front of the product The year and month of production of the PLC main unit can be checked from the manufacturer s serial number LOT on the front at the bottom of the product The LOT indication is adopted for products manufactured at the following times Main unit LOT indication adoption time FX3u C Series PLC January 2009 and later FX3G Series PLC October 2008 and later Example FX3U 48MR ES ERROR CD 23 24 25 26 27 OOO00 MITSUBISHI ma oo
448. mber of connected os adapters J 2 x lt A gt P gt U FE FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output E 3 Wiring This chapter describes the 3A ADP wiring Observe the following caution to wire the 3A ADP WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt gt DANGER Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit highvoltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and
449. me input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 2 To use the default value set for the digital filter function it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program B 53 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a avv onexs aVy NeX3 da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav var nex4 TI var nex4 m da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O dav ve nexa ed dqy MLd V NEX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 7 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 7 1 Program That Uses Averaging Time For FX3G FX3U FX3uc Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 Input modes of channels 1 RUN monitor M8000 C gt K50 0 Th ll For channels 1 and 2 the averaging time will be set to 10 The digital filter function of channels 1 and 2 will be disabled The digital values set for channels 1 to 4 will be read out to DO to D3 1 After setting the input mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified input mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After specifying the input mode if the same input mode is used it is not necessary to set the input mode and waiting time TO K50 2 To use the default value set for the digital filter function it is not necessary to set the digital filter function in the sequence program B 54 FX3G
450. minal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed L 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout z S E The terminals of the TC ADP are arranged as follows i 5 gt Es FXsu 4AD TC ADP OL dVb NEX4 adv O POWER e Signal Application Sr U il Oj 24 External power S olf 24 2 oll pz Ground terminal ze Oj Unused gS OO gt Do not connect any lines ane OCI J type Switches the type between 5 OO J type type K and type J OU L1 Channel 1 thermocouple OO L1 sensor input a L2 Channel 2 thermocouple 3 olL L2 sensor input 5 OL L3 Channel 3 thermocouple 11 O O L3 sensor input OO L4 Channel 4 thermocouple O O L4 sensor input EA q L 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening cee stranded single wire torque Termination i 0 3 mm to 0 5 mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the
451. mperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified Wi range or disconnection is detected D The temperature measurement data of channel 2 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M2 7002 The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified M3 range or disconnection is detected 7003 The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected M4 7004 EEPROM error in 3rd adapter M5 oy 4 7005 Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter M6 7006 PT ADP hardware error in 3rd adapter M7 ies Y007 PT ADP communication data error in 3rd adapter 41 1st for the FX3G PLC 1 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status 3 Program Example 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC D8268 0 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detected Ww sua UOWWOJ gt D8268 1 The temperature measurement data 77 of channel 2 is outside the specified as range or disconnection is detected 3 D8268 2 fo The temperature measurement data of channel 3 is outside the specified D8268 3 range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of channel 4 is outside the specified range or disconnection is detecte
452. ms Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PT ADP of the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later i 4 SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G var nex4 MI If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 1 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3uc for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia id dVb Nex4 day a M1d dVb N X4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the PT ADP 2 1
453. n Temperature Output MV Changes caused by disturbance TD3 PID operation 7 a Target value SV PI operation without differential operation TD2 PID operation Tp1 PID operation To3 gt To2 gt TD1 Time Changes in output caused by disturbance 4 N TD3 PID operation LV To3 gt TD2 gt TD1 de Tp1 PID operation PI operation without differential operation Time Example 2 PID operation in cooling forward operation Temperature Output MV TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 PI operation without differential operation Changes caused by disturbance Tp1 PID operation Tp2 PID operation i Target value SV Tps PID operation Time TD3 gt TD2 gt TD1 1 7 Changes in output caused by disturbance i Tb2 PI operation a TD1 PID operation PI operation without differential operation 4 D3 PID operation Time M 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters A 3 2 8 Alarm output flag S3 24 E ES E When the input variation CS3 1 bit 1 is set to 1 9 gt U Gs Variation 2J L o m 5 E e g z 5 12 E Ba oO TU uoHONsU Cid 88 ONS Time gt Sampling time TS Alarm flag bitO 24 ON bit1 When the output vari
454. n PID Instruction FNC 88 Foreword This manual describes the control methods for using the PID instruction in combination with analog products and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION M 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 M 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 1 Outline of function A 1 Outline ANd OVt NEXA dav This chapter describes the outline of PID instruction FNC88 for the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC r 1 1 Outline of function OL dVb NEX4 gt G d The PID instruction requires the system to calculate the output MV value from the measured PV value Through combining the P proportional action integral action and D derivative action the target SV value can be obtained See diagram below 1 Alarm output function 3 The alarm function can be se
455. n channel 3 Turning on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 Start table output function channel 1 Stop table output function Turning off of M1 when output of table from channel 3 is stopped Restart of table output function channel 3 Turning on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 1 The output mode setting is retained in the EEPROM of the FX3U 4DA For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 3 Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction E 62 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default M1 Readout table output completion flag and table output error FNC 12 D101 K4M30 Completion of table output from channel 1 Output to YOOO Output to Y001 when table output error occurs 8 4 Program to Initialize FX3U 4DA Factory Default To initialize FX3U 4DA execute the following program This will return the output mode BFM 0 the offset data BFM 10 to 13 and the gain data BFM 14 to 17 will be to
456. n 5 2 gt For a detailed description of the buffer memory refer to Section 5 4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ed day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day B 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method 5 2 Buffer Memory Reading Writing Method To read or write to the 4AD buffer memory use the FROM TO instructions or buffer memory direct specifications However to use buffer memory direct specification software compatible with FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs is required 1 This function is supported only in FX3u FX3UC PLCs For a detailed description of software compatible with the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC refer to Section 1 4 5 2 1 Buffer memory direct specification FX3u FX3uc PLC only When directly specifying the buffer memory specify the following device in the source or destination area of the applied instruction as follows U ONG E Enter a numeric value in Unit number 0 to 7 e E Buffer memory number 0 6999 1 Example 1 If the following program is created data in buffer memory BFM 10 of unit 1 will be multiplied by the data K10 and then the multiplication result will be output to data registers D10 D11 READ command FNC 22 UnG10 k10 D10 MUL Unit number it EE Multiplication result Buffer memory number Multiplier 2 Example 2 If
457. n channel 4 The setting range depends on the output mode da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O Output mode BFM 0 Setting range 0 32640 to 32640 1 10200 to 10200 7 2 3 0 to 32640 E 4 0 to 20400 gt 1 Cautions regarding data output setting when PLC is in stop e While changing the settings the output is stopped and H0000 is automatically written in the output status BFM 6 After the completion of writing the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted The analog values to be output depend on the output mode When a value out of any of the above ranges is set b5 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on 2 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories H The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not F frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM ES g gt U ap E Y 83 TU a Mld dWy NeXW4 day E 29 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 13 BFM 38 Upper lower limit function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric data
458. n for channel 1 Program for setting scaling instruction data table CANE ption EE Device Number of points Sets the number of points D50 D51 i X Digital value of specified D51 i Start coordinate start point on X axis FNC 12 point Y Digital value of desired D A i a conversion start point D52 i X Digital value of specified end point Y Digital value of desired D A FNC 12 K2000 D54 FNO K200 FNC 259 The result of operation by scaling instruction will be stored F 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 3 Example of program 2 For FX3G Series PLC e For example create the following program to change the digital output data D100 of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 M8280 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode M8284 Sets the output holding function for channel 1 FNC 230 p100 KO FNC 237 D100 k10000 mo Check to make sure the digital LD gt AND lt value D100 is in range M10 FNC 22 D100 K1600 D101 MUL FNC 23 DDIV D101 K10000 D103 Calculation for changing output characteristics FNC 20 D103 K400 D107 Stores the operation result in D8280 ADD FNC 12 D107 D8280 KARJE 4 Cautions regarding programming GX Developer version 8 13P or later supports scaling instruction SCL FNC
459. n the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Turn on b2 of BFM 99 to reset the abrupt change detection error status Write H0000 in BFM 27 as the abrupt change detection status data Even if abrupt change is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will be continuously updated 3 Abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 If the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 127 the data in BFM 27 can be transferred to the specified data register ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI When abrupt change is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this H reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be 7 shortened Represents a numeric value 2 z z 5 convenient function Automatic data transfer function he setting Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from memory BFM 4127 KO BFM 22 b2 ON E BFM 22 b6 ON Ere D 3 53 U a Mld dWy NeXW4 day B 35 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 11 BFM 28 Over scale status 1 Initial valu
460. n to be FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 21 maximum Number of connectable da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O including other analog special adapters eee ee units E i FXsu FX3uc FX3c Series PLC E A Fl A AS e P P P o To check the connectable 5 3 F fa Mee I eile PLC model number refer gt ie ie NE NE SM CS ae RTT to Section 1 3 Lol L Lol bo Lo bo aL o a a a oF E xpansion 4th 3rd 2nd 1st board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed ee description of wiring Analog data A refer to Chapter 3 Platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 For FX3u FX3uc ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Series PLC For a detailed description Description Spegialdevices 2 eee o N refer to H Measurement Transfer direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 temperature For a detailed description a Seina sii i gt 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D8279 of a basic program refer to ES etting of temperature Section 4 8 y AaS 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 SSL g gt gt Setting of averaging time lt 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 g Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter
461. nalog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status 1 Description of setting If an error is detected on 4DA ADP the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data e FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Ww sua UOWWOD gt avv onexs Qvp nexs Special data register 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Description FX3G Series PLC Special data register 1st 2nd D8288 D8298 Stores the error status data Description Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors da dv2 9 xX4 J dav avr nexs O Bit Description bO Channel 1 output data setting error E b1 Channel 2 output data setting error x b2 Channel 3 output data setting error gt b3 Channel 4 output data setting error b4 EEPROM error b5 Unused b6 4DA ADP hardware error Power supply error included 3 b7 to b15 Unused S 1 The 4DA ADP is supported from June 2009 and later 5 For using the 4DA ADP it is necessary to use a main unit whose version supports this function For the applicability of each combination of 4DA ADP and main unit refer to
462. ncellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins 3 If two analog expansion boards are connected During execution of the END instruction data in all the connected boards will be subject to D A conversion and then output in the order of 1st board gt 2nd board 4 D A conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data will be subject to D A conversion which takes 60us after which the analog data will be output END instruction execution time will be 60us x number of connected board G 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output E 3 Wiring oJ sw uowwog gt This chapter describes the 1DA BD wiring Observe the following caution to wire the 1DA BD WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER dvvr onexs Qvp nex4 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the produ
463. nd Description D8289 D8299 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether 4DA ADP is connected or not 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Checks the model code FNC Led D8269 7007 of the 1st analog special LD adapter 4 8 Basic Program Example da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI Create the following basic program example to output D A converted analog data For FX3G FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will set channel 1 of the 3rd adapter to the voltage output mode and channel 2 to current output mode and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D A conversion 3 K M8001 2 Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage x output mode 0 V to 10 V g Sets the output holding function for channel 1 G M8000 ray Sets the output mode of channel 2 to the current Q output mode 4 mA to 20 mA y gt 8 Cancels the output holding function for channel 2 M8000 ENC 12 H Ly Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored gaa pale REO I in D100 for channel 1 x FNC 12 Performs D A conversion with the digital data stored D101 D8281 H in D101 for channel 2 gt U Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 1 st for the FX3G PLC 3 re 2 53 U a Mld TVt NEXd dady F 23 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Co
464. nd Gain Offset gt 10mA Gain Offset gt 1 mA Digital input output 10V to 10V DC With sign 16 bits binary 100mV to 100mV DC With sign 12 bits binary With sign 15 bits binary 312 51 V 20Vx1 64000 1 254 A 40mAx1 32000 DION 501 V 200mVx1 4000 101A 40mAx1 4000 10V to 10V DC 3 Ambient temperature 0 3 60mV for 20V full scale 0 3 120uA for 40mA full scale g 25 5 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 2 0 5 1mV for 200mV full scale TOV to 10V DC y Ambient temperature 0 5 100mV for 20V full scale 0 5 200pA for 40mA full scale 6 0 55 C 100mV to 100mV DC Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA input 1 0 2mV for 200mV full scale Time required for conversion I O characteristics 1ms x number of selected channels When the input mode is set to 0 10 240V 10 240V eWhen the input mode is set to 2 32767 32000 9 7 20 480mA 20mA 0 1 20mA Xi El oi O s Si Qi i DE Aa 32000 32768 When the input mode is set to 1 32767 32000 A 36 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output 2 Analog output 2 mA FX2N 5A Specifications 3 Voltage output Current output Number of output points ich 3 OmA to 20mA DC Analog outpu
465. nd on the set input mode as described below For each input range there are 3 input modes 1 Voltage input characteristics 10 to 10V Input mode 0 to 2 Set input mode 0 Input type Voltage input Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 32000 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 1 Input type Voltage input Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 4000 to 4000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 2 Input type Voltage input analog value direct indication Analog input range 10 to 10V Digital output range 10000 to 10000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Digital value 32640 3 32000 Input voltage 10V 0 10 2V f 32000 SES 32640 Digital value 4080 7 4000 Input voltage Digital value 10200 7 10000 7 Input voltage 2 Current input characteristics 4 to 20mA Input mode 3 to 5 Set input mode 3 Input type Current input Analog input range 4 to 20mA Digital output range 0 to 16000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 4 Input type Current input Analog input range 4 to 20 mA Digital output range 0 to 4000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set input mode 5 Input type Current input analog value direct indication Analog input range 4 to 20 mA Digital output range 4000 to 20000
466. nd the product name to be described in this manual are the registered trademarks or trademarks of each company FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents Table of Contents SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Q cccsccccnsccceccscescccnscncnscacascsccsccsnscncnscacescnscssnsnacasescssecsescnsnseacasees 1 Common Items 1 Introduction A 1 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control cccccecccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeceaceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseneeeeseaees A 1 1 1 1 Analog input COMO nico A ir E done RL ae A 2 1 12 Analog OUtput control aaa ET re nr as ahaa en eG ahaa eet at A 3 1 1 3 Temperature sensor input control cece ceeeeceeeeceenaeeeeceseaaeeceeeceaaeeceeeseaaeaeesesnaeesessaeaeess A 4 2 Description of Analog Products A 5 2 1 Types of Analog Products cccccccceeeecceeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeesceeeeeseeeeeeseneessneeeees A 5 PAN EXPANSION DOAN MAA A AE EEN E DE E E E een A 5 PS E E A A O AAN A 6 2 1 3 Special function block a ea ita A 8 2 2 List of Analog Product Models oooooooocccccccccooooooononnnnnnncnonnnononcnnnnnnn non nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn rn nrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnns A 9 2 2 1 Expansion O A ii A 9 2 2 2 Special adapter A A eee A 9 2 2 3 SpecialfunctionblOCK uc iii in A 10 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products A 12 3 4 EXGU Series PLC ee e ed A 12 3 1 1 Connection of special adapters ceccceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeee ee
467. ndition of the workpiece or equipment Voltage or i Analog input current special function e block special adapter expansion board Output the current or voltage data from the flux rate or the pressure FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC A D conversion data ES Check the flux rate using the PLC gt To determine whether or not a unit can be connected to the PLC refer to Chapter 3 System FX3uc Series Analog input products e FX3uc 4AD FX3u Series Analog input products FX3u 4AD FX3U 4AD ADP FX3U 3A ADP FX3G Series Analog input products e FX3G 2AD BD Other Series Analog input products e FX2NC 4AD e FX2N 4AD e FX2N 8AD e FX2N 2AD Configuration Drawings of Analog Products For detailed description refer to Section B For detailed description refer to Section B For detailed description refer to Section C gt For detailed description refer to Section H gt For detailed description refer to Section D e FX2N 5A e FXON 3A gt For a detailed description of the other analog input products refer to the corresponding manuals A 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Introduction Common Items 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 1 2 Analog output control Output the voltage current signal from the PLC to an inverter etc to control the inverter frequency etc
468. ne nen nere nere nen nn rr rin B 34 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection Status oooococonnncccnnnncnnoncconannncnnnn nan nrn cnn nn nnc nano carr n cnn rra B 35 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents 5 4 11 BFM 28 Over scale Status sirain iniaa enaa aada aain aarian B 36 54 12 BFM 29 Error status us BEEN s aaie e a a ere nen ae Ni adr B 37 54 13 BFM 30 Model Code sitosti an en aea A E eE B 38 5 4 14 BFM 41 to 44 Offset data BFM 51 to 54 Gain data ooocoiniccncconoccccccconnnnoncnancnannnanc nn erne B 38 5 4 15 BFM 61 to 64 Addition data cecceccceecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeaeeeeeesaeeeeeeseneesaeseeeesieeseeeenees B 39 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting B 40 5 4 17 BFM 91 to 94 Abrupt change detection value Setting u X u ssssssseeeren renen rr ennen ens senee B 41 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data B 42 5 4 19 BFM 101 to 104 Minimum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Maximum peak value B 42 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting B 43 5 4 21 BFM 125 Peak value automatic transfer to first data register specification B 43 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification B 44 5 4 2
469. nel Analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD VI VI Signal Vit 11 COM1 SLD V2 12 COM2 SLD V3 13 COM3 SLD V4 14 COM4 SLD HiH Application 24V DC power supply Ground terminal Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input Application Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input Do not connect any lines Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input Ground terminal B 11 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a avvr onexs aVy NeX3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa mia dav ae Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 1 Power cable FX3uC 4AD The power crossover cable type C shown in the following table is supplied with the FX3uc 4AD To connect the power cable refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC main unit There are 3 types of power cables as shown in the following table Types A and B are supplied with the main unit and type C is supplied with the input extension blocks or the special function blocks f
470. nel analog Output 4 5 Output Setting Data 4 5 Output Setting Data Numeric data type Decimal K The 4DA ADP performs D A conversion on the output setting data digital data into analog data and outputs the analog data Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special data register ist 2nd 3rd Ath od D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data FX3G Series PLC Special data register ET nd Description D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 Normally ON FNC 12 D100 D8260 MOV FNC 12 D101 D8261 MOV Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D100 for channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D101 for channel 2 of the 1st analog special adapter Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D100 and D101 F 20 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual A
471. ng noise simulator of resistance Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise 1ns Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter Groundin Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 or less g lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt 3 sno Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dust Working 4 altitude 2000r 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 The direct mounting method cannot be used with FX3UC 4AD When this block is connected to the FX3UC Series PLC the direct mounting method cannot be used 3 Other Other Other PUG equipment PLC equipment Beg equipment I I a a Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of grounding refer to Section 3 5 4 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 4AD 4AD may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 2 2 Power Supply Specifications 2 2 Power Supply Specifications FX3u 4AD Item Specifications A D conversion 24V DC 10 90MA circuit drive power It is necessary to supply 24V DC from the terminal block
472. ng of averaging lt lt o 3rd adapter M D8280 to M D8289 Section 4 6 me 4th adapter M D8290 to M D8299 Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the 14 point and 24 point type main unit 2 The expansion board is not required when connecting with the FX3uc D DSS PLC For the FX3G Series PLC a connector conversion adapter is used C 3 Ww sua UOWWOD gt vr onex4 dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa abe dady Mld Qyr NeXd Ga day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation Before starting analog input using the 4AD ADP follow the procedure below to set up the system FX3U 4AD ADP Refer to Chapter 1 Outline of system e Compatible PLC version number e Compatible programming tool version number Outline Refer to Chapter 2 Specifications check Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications Refer to the e Input characteristics common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e
473. ng range 1 to 4095 R W Basin E Averaging time for channel 3 4 5 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W 3 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 AVeraging time for channel 4 R W 3 Setting range 1 to 4095 D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W pri D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 20 R SER ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI gt Q T gt o U 1d QYp NEX4 day Mld ave nex4 Com day l 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Programming 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W Section 4 3 Special auxiliary relay M8281 to M8291 to UA M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use 7 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature R measurement data D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature R measurement data Ch 131 r Section 4 4 D8282 D8292 annel 3 temperature R measurement data D8283 D8293 Channel 4 temperature R measurement data i i D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 R W Special data register Setting range 1 to 4095 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 R W Setting range 1 to 4095 i K namer ER E Section 4 5 veraging time for channe Beene 102 Setting range 1 to 4095 AN Averagi
474. ng time for channel 4 D928 poaa Setting range 1 to 4095 RW D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 6 D8289 D8299 Model code 20 R Section 4 7 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit To switch the temperature unit of the PT ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit F for Centigrade C To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC or OFF Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd Selection of temperature unit M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C for the 1st adapter M8001 M8260 Normally OFF 2 To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit F for the 2nd adapter M8000 Normally ON 1 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Temperature Measurement 44 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in the PT ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table FX3U FX3
475. nge Lower limit value Upper limit value l Description Channels 1 to 4 Channels 1 to 4 yauc BFM 71 to 74 BFM 81 to 84 Voltage input 0 10V to 10V 32000 to 32000 32768 to 32767 32768 32767 Voltage input 1 10V to 10V 4000 to 4000 4095 to 4095 4095 4095 Voltage input 2 Analog value direct indication mode 10200 to 10200 10200 10200 10V to 10V 10000 to 10000 Current input 4mA to 20mA 0 to 16000 11010383 1 16383 4 Current input 4mA to 20MA 0 to 4000 1 to 4095 1 4095 Current input 5 Analog value direct indication mode 3999 to 20400 3999 20400 4mA to 20mA 4000 to 20000 Current input 6 20mA to 20mA 16000 to 16000 16384 to 16383 16384 16383 Current input i 20mA to 20mA 4000 to 4000 4096 t0 ai 4096 4095 Current input 8 Analog value direct indication mode 20400 to 20400 20400 20400 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 1 Cautions regarding upper lower limit error setting To use the set upper lower limit error data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit error detection function b1 of BFM 22 e To use the data addition function bO of BFM 22 together with this function be sure to add the addition data channels 1 to 4 BFM 61 to 64 to the upper lower limit values to be set In addition observe the data setting range B 40 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Deta
476. nnecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC Refer to the FX3UC Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Analog input eFlowmeter European terminal block ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc FX3u 4AD ADP Analog output European terminal block elnverter etc Analog input eFlowmeter European terminal block ePressure sensor eSignal converter etc FX3u 3A ADP Analog output elnverter etc Temperature sensor input 7 eThermocouple e European terminal block types K and J eResistance thermometer FX3u 4AD TC ADP sensor Pt1000 and FX3u 4AD PNK ADP Ni1000 FX3u 4AD PT ADP ePlatinum resistance FX3u 4AD PTW ADP thermometer sensor Pt100 A 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products 3 2 FX3UC Series PLC 2 FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC 5 2 o o is fe 3 o He G S N pes D D o y ho 5 ra D o no D 2 amp o 2 o 4 D FX3u BD 1 To connect the special function blocks or the conversion adapters B refer to Subsection 3
477. nnel 1 Output to Y000 H Output to Y001 when table output error occurs J w 6 Execute the data table transfer command as a pulse execution type instruction v a gt lt gt Ea 23 TU x lt E gt gt U E E 61 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs Initial pulse Mgooz FNC 79 KO KO HF2F0 K1 Ba ee le RUN monitor M8000 19 FNC 79 KO K81 K1 K1 em fe kt wt FNC 79 KO K83 K2 K1 em e FNC 79 KO K85 K5 K1 Me ms ko kt FNC 79 KO K87 KO K1 om fer kt FNC 79 KO K98 k5000 K1 Pa e ros uso ka FNC 79 KO k99 HO0001 K1 Pa e mo ka FNC 78 KO K99 D100 K1 FROM FNC 12 D100 K4M10 M10 ser wo X000 M1 ENC 79 H0101 Pa e reo Horor a Z994 M1 TENC 79 oer to teo H KN Continued Specification of output modes of channels 1 to 4 Channel 1 output pattern Channel 3 output pattern Number of repetitions of output of table from channel 1 Number of repetitions of output of table from channel 3 Number of head device in data table Data table transfer command Readout of data table transfer command Turning on of MO At the completion of transfer of data table Start table output functio
478. nnn nro nnnnnnnnnnnn nn nnnnnnnnnnnnn EEEE EnEn L 18 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit ooooocconncccconncccccnnnnccnnonnocnnonnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn naar nn nnnnnn cn nnnnnnnnnnn L 19 4 4 Selection of Type K OF J ar AR REE re ERE ERE ES DRE Pe KEE fer Ar EGE HERRER L 20 4 5 Temperature Measurements sgu s agnes pasatan L 21 4 6 Averaging Time ert Ren eee hape ar aea hike ER notando par aee hiketa perire sidad L 22 Ar7EMOr Status sets cn det he ae re dre a ol lie e De e e ak hd e L 23 AE Model O ode RE de ai ake aes L 26 4 9 Basic Program Example usos de L 27 5 Troubleshooting L 29 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 2 ccccceccceeeenceeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeecaceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeeessueeeeseeees L 29 9 25 WIPING CHECK EE ha ta tet et E L 29 5 3 Special Device Check c ccccceececcceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseaeeeeecaaeeeeseaeeseseaaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaeeeeeseeeseneeeess L 29 5 4 Program Check sic Beis it a ee eS ae eee ats L 30 5 9 iE nrOr Status CHECK sivs 23st Dia each L 30 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents PID Instruction FNC 88 1 Outline M 3 11 Outline of function 2 i282 Has eta aa i a A ee Se a a ean M 3 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeenees M 4 2 How to Use PID Instruction M 5 2 1 Explanation of function and operation ccccccceceececeeeeecee
479. nput Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 2 Example of program 1 For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC For example create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode Ww sw UOWWOD gt 0 V to 10 V M8002 FA D8268 6 Error status b6 OFF 2 RST D8268 7 Error status b7 OFF o M8000 FNC 12 K1 Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data MOV a i Program for setting scaling instruction data table i 53 i i Q i Value Device i o i K400 Number of points Sets the number of points the number of points D50 i iz i X A D converted digital value i PNG Te D52 point Y Digital output value of changed D52 x i MOV coordinate X axis value start point i fa i X A D converted digital value end i 5 i point Y Digital output value of changed 4qq99 p54 S i FNC 12 K10000 D54 coordinate X axis value end point i They Kren 0 o M8000 ENC 259 nanan men Tina Ll rhe coor AI ated aa 3 D8260 D100 The scaling instruction operation results will be stored in D100 E U gt ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ed day Mld ave nex4 Com day C 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input Characteristics FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input C
480. nput response is bad Because the input filter a is effective to the target value SV all of the proportional operation integral operation and differential operation are affected Pulse input by noise Actual measured value PV Input amplitude Measured Input amplitude value PV processed by input filter processed by input filter IM 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters A 3 2 4 Proportional gain KP S3 3 gt lt Setting range 1 to 32767 E PID control Proportional operation 3 During the proportional operation the output MV increases in proportion to the deviation difference Es between the target value SV and the measured value PV This deviation is called proportional gain Kp and expressed in the following relational expression m Output MV Proportional gain KP x Deviation EV ES The reciprocal of the proportional gain KP is called proportional band 5 As the proportional gain KP is larger as shown in the example below the motion to let the measured value 33 U PV be nearer to the target value SV becomes stronger Example 1 Proportional operation P operation in heating backward operation U TS o A Target value SV 5 e se as Ds Measured value PV DE 3 3 ulk edi 5 o Kp3 Remaining deviation DE g
481. ns check Specifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications Refer to the common e Output characteristics pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Power supply line e Analog output line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Changing of output characteristics Method of output characteristics change e Convenient function program e How to use scaling instruction If the error status data or the output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting F 4 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Numbers The 4DA ADP is compatible with the following PLCs Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3U Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 20 or later After April 2004 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production 1 The FX3u FX3uc Series PLC version 2 61 or later and FX3G Series PLC version 1 20 or later supports hardware error check The FX3uc 32MT LT 2 PLC is due to be upgraded later gt For a detailed descript
482. nsion unit FX2NC Series extension unit and FXON Series extension unit The number of connectable units however depends on the type of the main unit To check the number of connectable units refer to the User s Manual Hardware Edition of the main unit to be used for your system FX2N Series extension unit Generic name for FX2N Series input output powered extension unit FX2N Series input output extension block FX2N Series special function unit and FX2N Series special function block FX2NC Series extension unit Generic name for FX2NC Series input output extension block and FX2NC Series special function block FXON Series extension unit Generic name for FXON Series input output extension block and FXoN Series special function block Special function unit block Generic name for FX3u Series special function block FX3uc Series special function block FX2N Series special function unit FX2N Series special function block FX2NC Series special function block and FXon Series special function block FX3u Series special function block FX3uc Series special function block FX3U 4AD FX3u 4DA FX3U 20SSC H FX3U 64CCL FX3UC 4AD FX2N Series special function unit FX2N 10GM FX2N 20GM FX2N 1RM E SET FX2N 1RM SET FX2N Series special function block FX2N 2321F FX2N 16CCL M FX2N 32CCL FX2N 32ASI M FX2N 2AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC FX2N 2DA FX2N 4DA FX2N 5A
483. nt values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program C 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 5 Error Status Check 6 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the 4AD ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 pete E EN sg ded b2 Channel 3 over scale detection b7 4AD ADP communication data error b3 Channel 4 over scale detection b8 to b15 Unused b4 EEPROM error To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Over scale detection b0 to b3 1 2 Description of error The input analog value voltage or current value is outside the specified range The digital value is out of the range specified for the voltage input mode 0 to 4080 or outside the range specified for the current input mode 0 to 1640 Remedy Check that the input analog value is within the specified range Also check the wiring 2 EEPROM error b4 1 2 Description of error The adjustment data which was set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or has been destroyed Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 2 Des
484. ntrol Edition 5 Changing of Output Characteristics FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics HS 5 Changing of Output Characteristics Use the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 for the FX3u FX3uc Series PLC to change the output characteristics FX3G Series PLCs do not support the scaling instruction Use sequence programs to change the output characteristics gt For a detailed description of scaling instruction refer to the FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic amp Applied Instruction 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 when analog output range is 1 to 5V to 0 to 10000 A specified digital value is inputted into D100 1 Output characteristics Voltage output characteristics amp Digital value characteristics product specifications 3 to be changed oO A 22 del 1 GO 5 i oe a i B lt 5 E a Y axis i 52o S i 22 E i 302 Z je BRD 2000 do o i gt a 5V i i 400 i 1V 0400 2000 4000 0 ae 10000 Digal value input Desired digital value D100 2 Example of program 1 For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC e For example create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog special adapter Sets the output mode of channel 1 to the voltage output mode Sets the output holding functio
485. num Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the PTW ADP are arranged as follows Ww sua UOWWOJ gt FXsu 4AD PTW ADP dvvr onexs Qvp nexs O Power Application External power Ground terminal Channel 1 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input Channel 2 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input oe EEN REE Channel 3 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Channel 4 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 00009 OC var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 oe gt a d Mld dWy NEXW day J 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cable and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below To connect the platinum resistance thermometer sensor use the cable supplied with the Pt100 platinum resistance thermometer or a twisted pair shielded cable 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size Tightening eer stranded single wire torque Termination Single wi 0 3mm to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable Em
486. nyo meros 8 points registers starting from the specified data register BFM 22 b4 0N BFM 101 to 104 DU to DUI 3 BFM 22 b3 0N BFM 111 to 114 z DO 4 to DLI 7 B 42 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 20 BFM 109 Minimum peak value resetting BFM 119 Maximum peak value resetting Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H BFM 109 can reset the minimum peak value BFM 101 to 104 and BFM 119 can reset the maximum peak value BFM 111 to 114 Channel numbers are assigned to the bits of BFM 109 and 119 to specify the channel to be subject to peak value resetting Turn on each bit to reset the peak value of the corresponding channel 1 BFM 109 119 bits Channel number assignment Description Bit No BFM 109 BFM 119 bO Channel 1 minimum peak value BFM 101 resetting Channel 1 maximum peak value BFM 111 resetting b1 Channel 2 minimum peak value BFM 102 resetting Channel 2 maximum peak value BFM 112 resetting b2 Channel 3 minimum peak value BFM 103 resetting Channel 3 maximum peak value BFM 113 resetting b3 Channel 4 minimum peak value BFM 104 resetting Channel 4 maximum peak value BFM 114 resetting b4 to b15 Not used Two or more bits can be turned on at a time 5 4 21 BFM 125 Peak value automatic
487. o ON Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in the D100 or the D101 the D8260 or the D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in D101 asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI gt Q T gt o U 1d QYp NEX4 day Mld ave nex4 Com day 1 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 5 Averaging Time 4 5 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the PT ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Special data register E Description 1st 2nd 3rd Ath D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data FX3G Series PLC Normally
488. o 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON Subsection E n 5 4 15 463 Channel 3 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 464 Channel 4 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 65 to 70 Not used E de Minimum digital 471 Channel 1 lower limit value error setting Valid if Value in input Decimal b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON P range Channel 2 lower limit value error setting Valid if From minimum Minimum digital F 72 b1 of BEM 22 is set to ON a a value in input Decimal digital value in range Subsection input range to vr iaa 5 4 16 73 Channel 3 lower limit value error setting Valid if upper limit value ane os Desa R b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON error setting value P range 474 Channel 4 lower limit value error setting Valid if Dok End Decimal b1 of BFM 22 is set to ON P range 75 to 80 Not used 1 If power failure occurs the EEPROM will retain its data 2 Use b0 to b7 3 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions Gain value Offset value gt 1000 4 The offset and gain values should satisfy the following conditions 30000 gt Gain value Offset value gt 3000 B 24 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 3 Buffer Memory List BFM BFM number Des
489. o 20000 2000 E 20mA to 20mA 20000 to 20000 3 1 Caution regarding abrupt change detection value setting G To use the abrupt change detection value be sure to turn on the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM x 22 P U J es U mn gt E gt gt U U mn gt E gt Ea S3 U gt E gt Y FE B 41 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 18 BFM 99 Clearance of upper lower limit error data and abrupt change detection data Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Three error data clearance commands lower limit error data clearance command upper limit error data clearance command and abrupt change detection data clearance command are respectively assigned to the 3 lower bits of BFM 99 Turning on each bit batch turning on for all channels will reset the corresponding error status flag 26 or 27 of BFM BFM 99 bits command assignment Bit No Description Buffer memory to be cleared bO Lower limit error data clearance command BFM 26 b1 Upper limit error data clearance command b2 Abrupt change detection data clearance command BFM 27 b3 to b15 Not used Two or more data clearance commands can be turned on at the same time Operation after resetting BFM 26 27 Each bit will turn off automatically 5 4 19 BFM 101 to
490. o R32767 It is convenient to prepare the data table on spreadsheet software and copy and paste the data to the device memory of GX Developer da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Setting item Device number in PLC assignment 1 Number of patterns x Device number specified in BFM 98 D 3 Number of points in pattern 1 n Device number 1 specified in BFM 98 Y 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern Device number 2 specified in BFM 98 a 6 Output data Device number 3 specified in BFM 98 5 AA 0 0 A __ gt __AAXXI X lt IN gt gt gt 5 Point 1 7 Output update time Device number 4 specified in BFM 98 x 7 7 A amp 8 Unit of output update Ume at cachi point Device number 5 specified in BFM 98 and point to point interpolation method 2 6 Output data J 5 Point n 7 Output update time E 8 Unit of output update time at each point gt and point to point interpolation method 5 7 ra N 3 Number of points in pattern X m Y 4 Condition after output at final point in pattern gt es e 6 Output data O 3 x 5 Point 1 7 Output update time H 8 Unit of output update time at each point z and point to point interpolation method Pa gt U 6 Output data I i 7 Output update time 5 Point m x 8 Unit of output update time at each point Device specified in BFM 9
491. o the specified data register Error status data If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is Subsection b8 automatic transfer specified in BFM 129 the error status data BFM 29 will be A i BA i 5 4 25 function automatically written to the specified data register b9 to b15 Not used B 32 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 2 Caution regarding convenient function setting Even if the data addition function is used the value before adding the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be checked to detect the over scale error Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a To use the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 To use the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the upper lower limit value detection function b1 of BFM 22 aVy NeX3 e To use the abrupt change detection status data automatic transfer function b6 of BFM 22 be sure to enable the abrupt change detection function b2 of BFM 22 OVy INEXY 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM gt For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Su
492. oes not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed J 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Plati
493. of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors Bit Description bO Output data setting error b1 to b3 Unused b4 EEPROM error b5 to b15 Unused 2 Program Example M8000 FNC 12 Normally ON MO m Output data setting error on 1st board M4 KAD EEPROM error on the 1st board 4 7 Model Code Initial value K4 Numeric data type Decimal K 1 Description of setting When the 1DA BD is connected model code 4 is stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code 1st board 2nd board Description D8269 D8279 Model code Use the special data registers above to check whether 1DA BD is connected or not 2 Program Example Checks the model code FNO 224 6260 70077 of the 1st analog board FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 4 8 Basic Program Example 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to output D A converted analog data The following program will set the 1st board to the voltage output mode and 2nd board to current output mode and will set digital data in D100 and D101 for D A conversion M8001 Sets the output mode of the 1st board to the voltage Norm
494. of voltage 100 C to 1200 C i current and thermocouple is possible Type J 0 1 C ible wi 100 C to 600 C Compatible with thermocouple FX2N 8AD 1 8ch types K J and T 2 The unit can be switched between Type T 0 1 C Centigrade and Fahrenheit 100 C to 350 C The sampling function is incorporated Type K 0 4 C Compatible with thermocouple 100 C to 1200 C types K and J gt FX2N 4AD TC 1 4ch i 2 Type J 0 3 C The unit can be switched between 100 C to 600 C i Centigrade and Fahrenheit Compatible with the platinum Pt100 resistance thermometer sensor FX2N 4AD PT 1 4ch ne 5 0 2 C to 0 3 C Pt100 or JPt100 2 100 C to 600 C The unit can be switched between Centigrade and Fahrenheit Example Compatible with thermocouple Type K types K J R S E T B N PL Il 100 C to 1300 C WRe5 26 U and L Compatible with the platinum resistance thermometer sensor Pt100 JPt100 0 1 C or 1 C The unit can be switched between FX2N 2LC 1 2ch Depends on the Centigrade and Fahrenheit 2 1 To connect this block to the FX3UC Series PLC either the FX2nc CNV IF or FX3Uc 1PS 5V is required Pt100 200 C to 600 C sensor input range 2 Refer to the instruction manual of the respective product The temperature adjustment function PID operation etc is incorporated The peak disconnection detection function is incorporated A CT sensor is needed
495. ogram Example 2 For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC D8268 0 D8268 1 D8268 2 D8268 3 D8268 4 D8268 5 D8268 6 D8268 7 Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 3rd adapter Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 3rd 1 adapter Detects over scale in channel 3 of the 3rd 1 adapter Detects over scale in channel 4 of the 3rd adapter EEPROM error in 3rd adapter Averaging time setting error in 3rd adapter Hardware error in 3rd 4AD ADP Communication data error in 3rd 1 4AD ADP Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 3 of the 1st adapter Detects over scale in channel 4 of the 1st adapter EEPROM error in 1st adapter Averaging time setting error in 1st adapter Hardware error in 1st 4AD ADP Communication data error in 1st 4AD ADP C 22 4 Programming 4 6 Error Status FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code S Initial value K1 g Numeric data type Decimal K El When the 4AD ADP is connected model code 1 is stored in the corresponding special data register B The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code ma e FX3u FX3uc Series PLC SS OB Special data register 5 Description j 1st 2nd 3rd 4th D8269 D827
496. oing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires
497. om 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened Convenient function setting Represents a numeric value Automatic data transfer function ON Valid Transfer from memory Transfer to data register specification BFM 129 KO BFM 22 b8 ON BFM 29 gt D B 37 Q o 3 5 o 5 gt 3 a dvp nexs dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dOv Ve Nex4 ole day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 13 BFM 30 Model code Initial value K2080 Numeric data type Decimal K K2080 fixed value is stored as the model code 5 4 14 BFM 41 to 44 Offset data BFM 51 to 54 Gain data Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K If the input mode is specified in BFM 0 the offset data and the gain data of each channel will be automatically stored The initial offset data and gain data are set for each mode as shown in the following table e Offset data Analog input value when the digital value is 0 reference offset value Gain data Analog input value when the digital value is equal to the reference gain value The
498. omatically written in the output status BFM 6 At the completion of change the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and output will be restarted 2 Caution regarding EEPROM writing e If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 19 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3uU 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 times Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data to the above buffer memories BFM E 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 4 BFM 6 Output status 9 3 3 Initial value H0000 3 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H 3 The output status information of channel 1 to 4 is stored B xx HOOOO DE ge ch4e Chi ch3 ch2 Value status HEX Description 0 Output updating is stopped 1 Under output updating The output conditions conform to the output setting upon PLC stop BFM 5 1 Cautions regarding use of output status The output status setting is valid only if the PLC is running When the PLC is stopped H0000 is automatically written da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O When the setting in any of the following buffer memory areas is changed output updating is stopped H0000 is automatically wr
499. on 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 Set item Setting Remarks Reference ee It cannot be shorter than operation Subsection Sampling time TS 1 to 32767 ms cycle of the PLC 321 0 Forward operation roa bitO 1 Backward operation Operation direction i 0 Input variation alarm is invalid bit1 e i 1 Input variation alarm is valid bit 0 Output variation alarm is invalid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at 1 Output variation alarm is valid same time bit3 Not available Operation 0 Auto tuning is not executed Subsection 5 s i i Mil setting ACT Pit4 1 Auto tuning is executed 3 2 2 0 Upper and lower limits of output bit5 value are not valid Do not set to ON bit 2 and bit 5 at 1 Upper and lower limits of output same time value are valid bit6 sa e ee ache le Select auto tuning mode bit7 to bit15 Not available CS 2 Input filter constant a 0 to 99 When 0 is set input filter is not Subsection provided 3 2 3 3 Proportional gain KP 1 to 32767 ae Cs 4 Integral time TI 0 to 32767 x 100 ms ne itis handled as tea E ED s Differential gain KD 0 to 100 Stile set differential gain 1 ao CS3 6 Differential time TD 0 to 32767 x 10 ms hs EN i ot diferental isnot D rl ES 7 These devices are occupied for internal processing of PID operation Do not change data ES 19 M 7 dvr nexs A dav ANd
500. on 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 8uA 16mAx1 2000 Ambient temperature 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale Time required for D A conversion When the load is 1MQ the output voltage is about 2 higher than the correct value 25 5 C gt i o bli 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160A for 16mA full scale 5 0 to 55 C oO 8 Shipment adjustment is carried out by external load resistance 2kQ Reference If external load resistance becomes larger than y O 2kQ the output voltage will increase slightly 60us Data updated every scan time Output characteristics 10V Analog output 0 gt 4000 4080 Digital input Caution An area of dead band is located in the region of OV Therefore the output analog value may not represent the digital value accurately 20mA Analog output S 3 gt 2000 2040 gt Digital input Insulation method The analog output area is not insulated from the PLC Number of I O points occupied 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC A 34 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output 4 3 Mixed Analog Input Output SW9 UOWWOJ 4 3 1 FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 3A ADP B Specifications Voltage input Current input Voltage output Current ou
501. on 8 4 For a detailed description of the test program refer to Chapter 4 E 66 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output avenexa DY sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI gt lt E U ee gt U U mn gt lt 9 og J W U mn gt lt Foreword e A gt This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation method for the FX3u 4DA ADP special 3 adapter 4 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the l unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward y it to the end user E This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent 53 U licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual a 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Mld dWy NEXW4 dady F 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edit
502. on of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory is unreadable or is destroyed 2 Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 2 Remedy Check that the averaging time is correctly set for each channel K 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 5 Error Status Check 4 PNK ADP hardware error b6 J 1 Description of error T The PNK ADP does not operate properly 5 gt 2 Remedy Se Check that the 24V DC power is properly supplied to the PNK ADP L Also check that the PNK ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi x Electric distributor office E gt O 5 PNK ADP communication data error b7 353 1 Description of error A communication error is detected between the PNK ADP and the PLC M 2 Remedy Check that the PNK ADP is correctly connected to the PLC Z If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi 35 Electric distributor office gS K 31 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PNK A
503. onding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Ww sua UOWWOD gt Special data register Description 2S 25 1st board 2nd board SE D8268 D8278 Stores the error status data 56 Check the ON OFF status of each bit of the error status data register to check the description of the error C Errors are assigned to the bits as shown in the following table Create a program to detect errors gt For a detailed description of the error status refer to Section 6 5 x Cc E Bit Description Bit Description 5 gt bO Channel 1 over scale detection b5 Averaging time setting error S b1 Channel 2 over scale detection b6 2AD BD hardware error b2 Unused b7 2AD BD communication data error m gt b3 Unused b8 to b15 Unused fa N b4 EEPROM error 5 es E 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a 2AD BD hardware error b6 or 2AD BD communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program M8000 FNC 12 D8268 Kamo Normally ON MOV M8002 FNC 12 var nex4 MI Error status of 1st analog board b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog board b7 OFF communication data error ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale day Mld ave nex4 Com da
504. onexs Qvp nexs Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product WIRING PRECAUTIONS NC AUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out Do not wire vacant terminals externally Doing so may damage the product Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems
505. onnect the 24V DC power supply line of the PT ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3U Series PLC B 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC 38 FX3G F3u FX3G F3u E 5 Series PLC Main unit Series PLC Main unit Terminal block Terminal block da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit var nex4 MI For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected gt Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition gt Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3uc Series PLC FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FX2NC Series PLC Input extension block ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector dav ve nexa mia Terminal block L Class D 24V DC grounding 1d QYp NEX4 day Caution regarding connection of the power supply line a For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3UC Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100 or less together with
506. ons F 6 2 1 Genee SpeCifiCatlONn 22csegsce2c ae Eee DE En E ease F 6 2 2 Power Supply Specifications ccccesssecccceeesesssceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeteeesaeeeeeeeeseeseiseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeess F 7 2 3 Performance Specifications ccccccecceccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeceaeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeesseaeeeeesseeensneees F 7 24 DIA Conversion TE test eet ee ee se i Se tht ea F 8 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3U FX3UC PLC ooonocccccnnncccnnnnaccnnnnnoncncnononacnn ona nano nononara nn cnn ana nonananinns F 8 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC ooooococccccccococccononononocnnononnncnnncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnn nano nrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnannnnnnnnnes F 9 3 Wiring F 10 3 1 Terminal Layos dde F 11 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque oooococcnnncccnonccocononccnnonnoncnnnnnnconnnnnncnnonannnnnns F 12 3 3 Power Supply Line ccccccccceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeseaeeeeeseaeeceeaaeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeseeeaaeeeeseeeeesecaeeeeeseeeeseeeeees F 13 3 3 1 To Connect to the FX3G FX3U Series PLC oooononnonnccnoconccccconononocononnnnononononnononnconnnnnnonanonononnnnns F 13 3 3 2 To Connect To the FX3UC Series PLC W Wu u u u uwcseeeee erne renerne erne F 13 3 4 Analog Output Limes va r eee tees aed acens bebe bad eee es ato lado oe ae ela Ue eat eg F 14 A E E A E E E ee F 14 4 Programming F 15 4 1 Writing of D A Conversion Data cccccccceceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeesecaeeceseeeeeessaeeeeeseeesessneetsaees F 1
507. ontrol Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 4DA ADP are arranged as follows FXsu 4DA ADP O POWER Application External power 24 24 Grounding terminal EXTRA DODOD 00000 Channel 1 analog output Channel 2 analog output V3 COM2 12 V2 COM1 I1 Vit Channel 3 analog output Channel 4 analog output 900000 HUW COM4 M V4 COM3 13 F 11 Ww sua UOWWOJ gt dvvr onexs aVy NeX3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI da Vd1 9 Xx4 O dav vdv nex4 dav ve nexa mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Ca day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable end as shown below 1 Cable Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded single wire Tightening torque Termination 0 3mm to 0 5mm Single wire 9 AWG22 to 20 2 wire 0 3mm2 AWG22 0 3mm to 0 5mm Rod terminal i with AWG22 to 20 insulation Refer to the rod terminal sleeve external view shown in the following figure 2 Termination of cable end To terminate the cable treat the stranded singl
508. ontrol Edition 9 Troubleshooting FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 9 1 PLC Version Number Check 9 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error codes If the D A conversion data is not output or if the proper digital value is not output check the following items Wiring Program Error status 9 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3uc Series The version number should be 1 30 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible gt For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 9 2 Wiring Check Check the wiring as follows 1 Power FX3U 4DA needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the 24 V indicator lamp of FX3U 4DA is on 2 Analog output line Use the 2 core twisted shielded cable for the analog output line In addition be sure to separate the analog output line from the other motive power lines or inductive lines gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 9 3 Program Check Check the program as follows 1 Check the output mode and output data Check that data has been set correctly in BFM 0 to 4 2 Check the settings Check that the offset data BFM 10 to 13 gain
509. onversion error b4 1 Description of error The A D conversion value is abnormal 2 Remedy Check the over scale status data BFM 28 to localize the error channel After that check to make sure the input analog data is in the specified range ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 5 BFM reading writing impossible b6 1 Description of error While voltage input characteristics are being changed this bit will turn on If this bit b6 is on A D conversion data cannot be read out correctly or cannot be written to the BFM correctly 2 Remedy Check the sequence program and confirm that the input characteristics BFM 21 bO to b3 are not being written continuously dOv VE NeX4 mia 6 Data setting error detection b8 1 Description of error If any bits from b10 to b15 are turned on this bit b8 will turn on 7 Averaging time setting error b10 day 1 Description of error The averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 a M1d dVb NeX4 dady B 63 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 8 5 4AD Initialization and Test Program 8 Digital filter setting error b11 1 Description of error The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly 2 Remedy Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600 Also check that the av
510. op command of table output function BFM 81 to 84 output pattern setting of channels BFM 85 to 88 output execution cycle number of channels BFM 89 completion flag of table output function BFM 90 table output error code BFM 91 table output error source number BFM 98 data table head device number BFM 99 data table transfer command BFM 100 to 398 2800 to 3098 data table in patterns Table output function Sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the data table gt For a detailed description of the table output function refer to Chapter 6 E 37 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt OVy INEXY da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdar nexs asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dQv Ve NeX4 mia dav a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 1 Outline of Table Output Function 6 Table Output Function This chapter describes the table output function of FX3U 4DA 6 1 Outline of Table Output Function 1 Explanation of the function This function sets predetermined output patterns as data table and outputs analog signals according to the data table 2 Outline of procedures for table output function Refer to Section 6 2 i x Data table is prepared in the data registers Preparation of data table TTT D1000 to 7999 or the expansion regis
511. operly supplied to the PT ADP Also check that the PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 5 PT ADP communication data error b7 1 2 Description of error A communication error is detected between the PT ADP and the PLC Remedy Check that the PT ADP is correctly connected to the PLC If the problem cannot be solved even after the above check please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 1 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input avenexa UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 M asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI er gt lt gt Foreword gt AA TU This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3u 4AD PTW ADP special adapter 4 channel platinum resistance thermometer input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit z Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward E it to the end user gt U This manual confers no industrial property
512. or FX3UC Series Type Application Model Length Cable supplied with A Power cable for main unit FX2NC 100MPCB a 3 input naa 4 FX3uc Series PLC main unit nput power cable for inpu i m B extension block FANG I00BRCB 3 3 Input extension block for FX2NC Input power crossover cable for i 0 1m Series E input extension block ene 3 Special function block for FX3UC FX2NC Series The crossover cable type C can skip up to 4 16 point output blocks to connect units If more blocks should be skipped to supply power to an input block use cable type B lt Self made power cable gt To use self made power cables use the following wire rods and connectors Specifications model Wire size AWG24 0 2mm Crimp style terminal 1602 0069 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd mm For main unit 51030 0330 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd ousin For input extension block 51030 0230 manufactured by Molex Japan Co Ltd Supply the 24V DC power to FX3uc 4AD via the power supply connector 3 2 2 Cable FX3U 4AD The FX3U 4AD terminal block is designed for M3 screws The end disposal of the cable shows blow Tighten the terminal to a torque of 0 5 N m to 0 8 N m When one wire is connected to one terminal Terminal Crimp 3 2 0 13 screw terminal 6 2mm 0 24 or less 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 Terminal or less When two wires are connected to one terminal 4 3 2 0 13 6 2mm 0 24 7 Terminal Crimp or Jai 81 screw t
513. or a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 y w T T 4080 1640 5 40007 7 1600 G Input x npu o 5 3 characteristics a 2 ug 5 3 iS a E a i 5 j A Q 0 gt 10V 10 2V 0 4mA gt 20mA 20 4mA H Analog input Analog input z amp The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC g Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area 3 Channels are not insulated from each other ag Number of I O i 3 A 0 point This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC points occupied x 2 83 U x K gt Y gt u E C 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 1 This section describes the A D conversion time When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers DADA desir N FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start AID command conversion 200us 4ch Digital value reading A D conversion start
514. or conversion board Generic name for CNVBD CNVBD Special adapter Special adapter FX3Uu CNV BD FX2N CNV BD FX1N CNV BD Generic name for High speed input output special adapter communication special adapter CF card special adapter and Analog special adapter High speed input output special adapter Generic name for High speed input output special adapter 2HSY ADP FX3U 2HSY ADP 4HSX ADP FX3U 4HSX ADP Communication special adapter Generic name for communication special adapter 232ADP FX3U 232ADP MB FX2NC 232ADP FXoN 232ADP FX 232ADP 485ADP FX3U 485ADP MB FX2NC 485ADP FXon 485ADP FX 485ADP CF card special adapter Generic name for CF card special adapter CF ADP FX3Uu CF ADP FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual 3 Abbreviation generic name Description Analog special adapter Generic name for analog special adapter 4AD ADP FX3U 4AD ADP 4DA ADP FX3U 4DA ADP 3A ADP FX3U 3A ADP PT ADP FX3U 4AD PT ADP PTW ADP FX3U 4AD PTW ADP PNK ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP TC ADP FX3U 4AD TC ADP Special adapter connection conversion adapter or connection conversion adapter Generic name for CNVADP CNVADP FX3G CNV ADP Extension unit Abbreviation generic name Description Voltage current input Extension unit Generic name for the FX2N Series exte
515. or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed C 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the 4AD ADP are arranged as follows FXsu 4AD ADP POWER Application External power 24 24 0000000000 Grounding terminal Channel 1 analog input Channel 2 analog input V3 COM2 12 V2 COM1 M Vit Channel 3 analog input Channel 4 analog input 00000 ana nanan anna COM4 14 V4 COM3 13 Q C 11 avenexa UU sway uowwog gt OVy INEXY da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI var nex4 MI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 3 Wiring 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque 3 2 Applicable Cables and Terminal Tightening Torque Use the following cables to connect with the counterpart equipment Terminate the cable ends as shown below 1 Cables Applicable cable and tightening torque Wire size stranded Tightening Termination single wire torque Single wi 0 3mm2 to 0 5mm To connect a stranded cable peel the cover off the cable ee AWG22 to 20
516. or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed H 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout g 3 o The terminals of the 3A ADP are arranged as follows 3 FXsu 3A ADP B 33 POWER Ss amp DE U Signal Application il ONO 24 ole 54 External power C el ol O Grounding terminal 7 olL Do not connect any lines E off V1 gt i SI 11 Channel 1 analog input gt a
517. ored in the special devices of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 2 If data is stored in the special devices the averaging time can be set and the input mode can be specified 3 Special auxiliary relays 10 points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Communi High speed cation input output FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3Uu 4AD special FX3U 4AD special PTW ADP PTW ADP PTW ADP adapter PTW ADP adapter FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary relays a eG M8260 to M8269 Special data registers D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays M8270 to M8279 AID 0 ee O Special data registers J AID da dv2 9 x4 J ddv dvr nexs O var nex4 MI Sequence program Mm E il a Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Pf tt Special auxiliary relays i M8290 to M8299 AD MA IA speciai data registers The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CF card special adapter asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dav Ld CWp NX4 ma dav ve nex4 la MLld
518. orts scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 Ifthe A D converted digital value is out of the data table range specified by the scaling instruction SCL FNC 259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 H 31 Ww sua UOWWOJ gt dvvr onexs Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 5 2 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics 5 2 Example Changing of Voltage Output Characteristics This section describes an example of a program that can change the digital value range from 400 to 2000 when analog output range is 1 to 5V to 0 to 10000 A specified digital value is inputted into D120 1 Output characteristics Voltage output characteristics 5 Digital value characteristics product specifications 5 to be changed 2 0 10V 23 i TA 5 i gee 2 i O lt x 2 x 3 i a y Y axis D i v09 9 i 22s i GOD z A A E i gt 5V i 400 i 1V i 0 400 2000 4000 0 10000 X axis _3 gt Digital value input Desired digital value D120 2 Example of program 1 FX3u FX3uc Series PLC e For example create the following program to change the digital output of the 1st analog
519. ot used 26 Upper lower limit value error status Valid if b1 i 40000 Hexadeci Subsection of BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 9 497 Abrupt change detection status Valid if b2 of i H0000 Hexadeci Subsection BFM 22 is set to ON mal 5 4 10 28 Over scale status H0000 eee mal 5 4 11 429 Error status H0000 Mg oer Subsection mal 5 4 12 30 Model code K2080 K2080 Decimal ee 31 to 40 Not used 4171 Channel 1 offset data Unit mV or pA Voltage input KO at delivery Decimal i BFM 21 40000 to i i 42 Channel 2 offset data Unit mV or uA will be 9000 3 KO at delivery Decimal Subsection used for i 443 Channel 3 offset data Unit mV or A writing Current input KO at delivery Decimal 5 4 14 20000 to 441 Channel 4 offset data Unit mV or uA data 17000 4 KO at delivery Decimal 45 to 50 Not used 451 Channel 1 gain data Unit mV or uA e Voltage input K5000 at delivery Decimal BFM 21 9000 to 52 Channel 2 gain data Unit mV or A will be 10000 3 K5000 at delivery Decimal Subsection used for 53 Channel 3 gain data Unit mV or uA writing Current input K5000 at delivery Decimal 5 4 14 17000 to 4547 Channel 4 gain data Unit mV or pA 4ta 30000 4 K5000 at delivery Decimal 55 to 60 Not used 461 Channel 1 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 to 16000 KO Decimal is set to ON 62 Channel 2 addition data Valid if bO of BFM 22 16000 t
520. output Specification of analog value mV Analog output range 10 to 10V Digital input range 10000 to 10000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Output voltage V 10 2 b 10 Fro Digital 32640 Output voltage V 10200 10000 2 Current output characteristics 0 to 20mA Output mode 2 4 Set output mode 2 Output type Current output Analog output range 0 to 20mA Digital input range 0 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Set output mode 4 Output type Current output Specification of analog value uA Analog output range 0 to 20 mA Digital input range 0 to 20000 Offset gain adjustment Impossible Current output mA 0 32000 32640 Digital value Current output mA 0 20000 20400 Digital value 3 Current Output characteristics 4 to 20mA Output mode 3 Set output mode 3 Output type Current output Analog output range 4 to 20mA Digital input range 0 to 32000 Offset gain adjustment Possible Current output mA 20 32 q 20 5 i 4 i 0 32000 32640 Digital value E 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output E 3 Wiring Ww sua UOWWOJ gt This chapter describes wiring of the FX3U 4DA Observe the following cautions wiring the FX3U 4DA WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER dvvr
521. pecifications e Operation environment e Performance specifications e Input output characteristics Specifications check Refer to the common pages System configuration and selection System configuration Refer to the common pages for analog control e Selection of units Refer to Chapter 3 Wiring e Selection of sensor cable e Power supply line e Analog input output line Refer to Chapter 4 Programming e Details of special devices e Examples of basic programs Programming Refer to Chapter 5 Method of input output characteristics change e Convenient function program e How to use scaling instruction Changing of input output characteristics If the error status data or the input output analog value is abnormal refer to Chapter 6 Troubleshooting FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLCs and Version Number g 3 o The 3A ADP is compatible with the following PLC 3 Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 61 or later After July 2009 B FX3uc Series PLC Ver 2 61 or later After July 2009 38 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 20 or later After June 2009 S U 1 The FX3Uc 32MT LT 2 PLC is due to be upgraded later 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determin
522. peration synchronized with sequence program Output characteristics 10V 4095 Analog output 0 4000 Digital input N Analog output S gt 4095 S 3 gt 0 4000 Digital input If the input data consists of 13 bits or more only the lower 12 bits will be valid and the other bits will be ignored Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog output area from the PLC Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Use the adjustment volume to adjust the FX2N 2DA 2 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will change the resolution A 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 2 Analog Output 4 23 FX3U 4DA FX3U 4DA Specifications Voltage output Current output Number of output points 4ch Analog output range 10V to 10V DC External load 1k to 1MQ OmA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC External load 5000 or less Offset 10V to 9V 1 2 OmA to 17mA 1 9 Gain 9V to 10V1 2 3mA to 30mA 1 9 Digital input With sign 16 bits binary 15 bits binary Resolution 0 32mV 20Vx1 64000 0 63uA 20mAx1 32000 gt Ambient temperature 0 3 60uA for 20mA full scale O Of S 25 5 C EOS E6OMV for 20V fullS ale Same accuracy for
523. perature measurement data D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data gt For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 1 Caution regarding temperature measurement The temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC ur D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 Nov 28281 Drot Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction M8000 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 K 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Averaging Time 4 6 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K64 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the PNK ADP the averaged temperature measuremen
524. ple For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To switch the temperature unit to centigrade C for the 1st adapter M8001 M8260 Normally OFF 2 To switch the temperature unit to Fahrenheit F for the 2nd adapter M8000 ED Normally ON J 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Temperature Measurement 44 Temperature Measurement The temperature data input in the PTW ADP will be stored in the special data registers The special data registers that store the temperature data are shown in the following table FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Special data register wee xx Description SE 1st 2nd 3rd 4th R D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data FX3G Series PLC da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O Special data register e Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data
525. points and special data registers 10 points are assigned automatically 5 starting from the adapter nearest to the main unit S gt For a detailed description of special device assignment refer to Section 4 2 e FX3u FX3UC Series PLC D Communic High speed x FX3u 4AD FX3u 4AD FX3U 4AD aion FX3u 4AD input output P DE oe or adaptor dd Sach FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 5 es iw 3 E A oOo gt Special devices Special auxiliary relays AID Po Cd peca cala er D8260 to D8269 Special auxiliary relays AID M8270 to M8279 LA special data registers D8270 to D8279 lt gt Sequence program Special auxiliary relays M8280 to M8289 Special data registers D8280 to D8289 Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the high speed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CF card special adapter dav ve nexa mia dqy a Mld QAYY NEX4 dady C 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 1 Loading of A D Conversion Data FX3G Series PLC Communi cation Connector FX3u 4AD special FX3u 4AD conversion ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3G Series PLC Special devices Special auxiliary
526. ponding bit will turn on Bit Description bO Channel 1 output data setting error b1 Channel 2 output data setting error b2 Channel 3 output data setting error b3 Channel 4 output data setting error b4 EEPROM error b5 Unused b6 4DA ADP hardware error Power supply error included b7 to b15 Unused 1 The 4DA ADP is supported from June 2009 and later For using the 4DA ADP it is necessary to use a main unit whose version supports this function For the applicability of each combination of 4DA ADP and main unit refer to the table below ADA ADP FX3u FX3uc Series PLC FX3G Series PLC year and month of Former than Former than production Ver2 60 Ver2 61 or later Ver1 10 Ver1 20 or later ee Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable eras Not applicable Applicable Not applicable Applicable For confirmation of the version of the main unit and checking the 4DA ADP serial number refer to the following For details of confirmation of the PLC main unit version refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 For details of check of the 4DA ADP serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 2 1 To solve the problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Output data setting error b0 to b3 1 Description of error The specified digital value is outside the specified range Analog data will not be correctly output 2 Remedy Check that the spe
527. pproximately 5 seconds to initialize all the data e Priority is given to BFM 19 which prevents a data from being changed To initialize set K2080 in BFM 19 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 5 4 7 BFM 21 Input characteristics writing Initial value H0000 H Numeric data type Hexadecimal H z Channel numbers are assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM 21 If any of these bits are turned on the offset g data BFM 41 to 44 and gain data BFM 51 to 54 of the corresponding channel will be written to the internal memory EEPROM When written to the internal memory the data will become valid E 1 BFM 21 bits channel number assignment l Bit No Description 3 bO Channel 1 offset data BFM 41 and gain data BFM 51 writing 5 b1 Channel 2 offset data BFM 42 and gain data BFM 52 writing 53 b2 Channel 3 offset data BFM 43 and gain data BFM 53 writing b3 Channel 4 offset data BFM 44 and gain data BFM 54 writing J b4 to b15 Not used 3 A a The WRITE command can be given to two or more channels at the same time Set HOOOF to write all S channel data to the EEPROM When writing is complete H0000 b0 to b3 OFF will be set automatically E U B 31 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 8 BFM 22 Convenient function setting Initial value H0000 Numeric da
528. product sae DO Speci P such as specifications and installation FOUAD TO RDE JY997D14801 Supplied with eae sate Seo ae sich as USER S MANUAL product ee ee specifications and installation This manual describes the FX2N 4AD PT platinum FX2N 4AD PT JY992D65601 Supplied with resistance thermometer input special function block USER S GUIDE product hardware such as specifications and installation and also describes various programs This manual describes the FX2N 4AD TC thermocouple FX2N 4AD TC JY992D65501 Supplied with input special function block hardware such as USER S GUIDE product specifications and installation and also describes various programs EX2N 2LC Supplied with This manual describes the FX2N 2LC temperature i JY992D85601 adjustment special function block hardware such as USER S GUIDE product ON q i specifications and installation This manual describes the FX2N 2LC temperature FX2N 2LC JY992D85801 Supplied adjustment special function block hardware such as USER S MANUAL separately specifications and installation and also describes various programs A 53 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ dvr onex4 dvr nexs da dvz 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G davvar nexy TI dav Ve nexa mk day avi nex4 Co day Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 7 Generic Names and Abbreviations in This Manual T Generic Names and Abbreviations in
529. pter s Up to 4 analog special adapters can be connected SW9 UOWWOJ Analog special adapters Expansion board PLC UJ avr onex4 dvr nexs FX3u BD Up to 4 Analog adapters can be connected represents 422 232 485 CNV or USB gt For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 FX3G Series PLC Connect the special adapter s to the left side of the FX3G Series PLC A connector conversion board is needed to connect the special adapter s da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O Upto 21 analog special adapters can be connected Analog Connector conversion adapter PLC special adapters var nex4 MI MITSUBISHI FX26 40M FX3G CNV ADP Up to 2 Analog adapters can be connected gt For a detailed description of the system configuration refer to the PLC User s Manual Hardware Edition 4 Only 1 analog special adapter can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type When two analog expansion boards are connected to FX3G Series PLC 40 point or 60 point type analog special adapters are not available in the main unit ddv ve nex4 L da Vd1 9 x4 O dav var nexs TI day avi nex4 Co day Mld A 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Description of Analog Products Common Items 2 1
530. put line Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input output line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines 3 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to shortcircuit the line between the VL terminal and the terminal LQ channel number of the channel If the line is not shortcircuited data will not be converted into correct digital data gt For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 6 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the 3A ADP are being used correctly 1 Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode Turn on the device to set the input mode to the current input mode 2 Output mode switching Verify that the special device for switching the output mode is correctly set Turn off the device to set the output mode to the voltage output mode Turn on the device to set the output mode to the current output mode 3 Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog o
531. put mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode Turn on the device to set the input mode to the current input mode 2 Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel 3 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs D 21 avr nexa DY sway uowwo gt dvr onex4 dav avr nexs O da dv2 9 xX4 var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA de dav qj Mld CVt NEXd day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 6 5 Program Check 4 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 2AD BD If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 6 5 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Clearing of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devi
532. put resistance 194 KQ Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA Offset gt Impossible to change Impossible to change b Gain Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary E Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 1014A 16mAx1 1600 x gt w O i S tie Derm BELLE 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80A for 16mA full scale E 3 25 5 C gt O Ambient temperature O O E 0 to 55 C 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale 1 0 160pA for 16mA full scale F Time required for A D FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 200us Data updated every scan time ES conversion FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time gt 3 4080 1640 v gogga isco G T 3 El 8 Input characteristics 3 3 g g P D 3 a a 0 gt 10V 0 4mA gt 20mA H Analog input Analog input a x The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC E Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs E Channels are not insulated from each other 2 Number CU COIN 0 point This number is not related to the maximum I O points of the PLC occupied l x e E gt T 83 U x K gt Y gt U Se A 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 2 FX2N 2AD
533. put value for auto tuning to the output value CD z Set the output value for auto tuning to the maximum available output value multiplied by 0 5 to 1 for 33 the output equipment g 2 Setting the parameter target value SV etc that cannot be set in auto tuning according to the system Note that auto tuning may not be executed normally if the cautions described below are not fol lowed 1 Set items Set item and parameter Remarks The difference from the measured value PV should be 150 or more Target value SV For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below Sampling time TS 1 000 ms or more For the details refer to 2 Cautions on setting below Input filter a 2 Differential gain KD 5 When setting the input filter set the differential gain to 0 usually Others Set other items as necessary 2 Cautions on setting 1 Difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV If the difference between the target value SV and the measured value PV is less than 150 when auto tuning is started auto tuning is not executed normally Accordingly if the difference is less than 150 set the target value for auto tuning Set the target value again when auto tuning is completed Set item Setting in PID instruction Target value SV Make sure that the difference from the measured value is 150 or more when auto tuning is started 2 Sampling time Ts Make sure the sampling time
534. quired during the PID operation the operation error flag M8067 turns ON and a corresponding error code is stored in D8067 Error description Action code 6730 Incorrect sampling time TS TS lt 0 Incorrect input filter constant a oraz a lt 0 or 100 lt a a lt PID operation is stopped gt 6733 Incorrect proportional gain KP KP lt 0 A data error has occurred in the set value in a control parameter 6734 Incorrect integral time TI TI lt 0 or in the middle of PID operation Check the parameters 6735 Incorrect derivative gain KD KD lt 0 or 201 lt KD 6736 Incorrect derivative time TD TD lt 0 lt Auto tuning is continued gt 6740 Sampling time TS lt Operation cycle The operation is continued in the condition sampling time TS cyclic time operation cycle 6742 Variation of measured value exceeds limit APV lt 32768 or 32767 lt APV 6743 Deviation exceeds limit EV lt 32768 or 32767 lt EV 6744 Integral result exceeds limit me i Out of range from 32768 to 32767 lt PID operation is continued gt The operation is continued with each parameter set to the 6745 eae value exceeds limit due to derivative gain maximum or minimum value D 6746 Derivative result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 6747 PID operation result exceeds limit Out of range from 32768 to 32767 tat lt Output upper lim
535. qy a Mld QAYY NEX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 6 3 Special Device Check 6 3 Special Device Check 6 4 Check whether the special devices for the 4AD ADP are being used correctly Input mode switching Check that the special device for switching the input mode is set correctly Turn off the device to set the input mode to the voltage input mode Turn on the device to set the input mode to the current input mode Input data Verify that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connecting position and the channel Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs Error status Check that no error is detected in the 4AD ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Clearing of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program 2 Check of storage devices Verify that differe
536. r the result is improved lt Limit cycle method gt 6756 Abnormal result due to excessive auto tuning measurement time ton gt t ton lt 0 t lt 0 lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 gt PID operation is started gt The variation of the measured value PV is small compared with the output value Multiply the measured value PV by 10 so that the variation of the measured value will increase during lt Limit cycle method gt 6757 Auto tuning result exceeds proportional gain KP Out of range from 0 to 32767 auto tuning lt Limit cycle method gt lt Auto tuning is finished KP 32767 PID operation is 6758 Auto tuning result exceeds integral time started gt Ti Out of range from 0 to 32767 The auto tuning time is too long Increase the difference ULV LLV between the upper limit and lt Limit cycle method gt the lower limit of the output value for auto tuning set a smaller 6759 Auto tuning result exceeds derivative time value to the input filter constant a or set a smaller value to the TD Out of range from 0 to 32767 PV threshold SHPV for auto tuning and then check whether the result is improved Caution With regard to the measured value PV in PID normal measurement data should be read before PID operation begins Especially when the PID operation is executed to the input value in an analog input block pay attention to the conversion time M 29 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC U
537. r channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 M8002 1 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C M8001 Selects thermocouple type K Sets the averaging time to 32 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 128 for channel 2 data M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8264 JE FNC 12 K128 D8265 i MOV mene FNC 12 D8260 D100 E FNC 12 D8261 D101 MOV Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement temperature data to D100 Stores the current value of the channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 L 28 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC Wiring e Special devices Programs Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 20 initial version to the latest
538. r describes the outline of FX3U 4AD TC ADP referred to as TC ADP 1 1 Outline of Functions The FX3u 4AD TC ADP is an analog special adapter Connect the FX3U 4AD TC ADP to the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC to read the data from the 4 channel thermocouple 1 Up to 4 TC ADP units can be connected to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Up to 2 1 TC ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC Including other analog special adapters 2 Thermocouple types K and J can be connected However it s impossible to use both types K and J with 1 adapter 3 A D conversion data will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 2 maximum Number of connectable including other anal lladapters 8 asa units inelining other analog special adapters FX3uU FX3uc FX36 Series PLC s To check the connectable Po PLC model number refer a on to Section 1 3 lo 0000 lo000000000 loo 00 0lloo09000000 ooooolooooo00000 5 oF 57 4th 3rd 2nd 1st oe adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed NENS description of wiring Analog data refer to Chapter 3 Thermocouple temperature sensor type K or J For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC For a detailed description Description Transfer direction
539. r less to the grounding terminal on the main unit Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failure to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high voltage line or load line Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the ter
540. r of the programming tool 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 dnd D8260 D100 Normally ON FNC 12 D8261 D101 MEE Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data registers D8260 or D8261 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D100 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data of the 1st analog special adapter in the D101 L 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 6 Averaging Time 4 6 Averaging Time Setting range 1 to 4095 Initial value K64 Numeric data type Decimal K If the averaging time is set for the TC ADP the averaged temperature measurement data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Special data register ave Description ist 2nd 3rd Ath D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data FX3G Series PLC
541. r status BFM 29 is turned on The data set in BFM 61 will be retained in the EEPROM 3 Cautions regarding EEPROM writing If data is set in BFM 0 5 10 to 17 32 to 35 50 to 54 or 60 to 63 the data will be written in the EEPROM of FX3U 4DA Do not turn off the power immediately after writing values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 Therefore when creating a program do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM vdr nex4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a MId TV NEXd day E 35 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 20 BFM 62 Upper lower limit function status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value K201 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the upper lower limit function status data BFM 39 to the data register specified in BFM 62 Only when the value becomes more than the upper limit or less than the lower limit data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program to read data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the upper lower limit function status BFM 39 refer to Subsection 5 4 14 If
542. re to do so may cause fire equipment failures or malfunctions E Make sure to observe the following precautions in order to prevent malfunctions under the influence of noise z Do not bundle the power line or twisted shielded cable together with or lay it close to the main circuit high e voltage line or load line S Otherwise noise disturbance and or surge induction are likely to take place As a guideline lay the control line at least 100mm 3 94 or more away from the main circuit high voltage line or load line Ground the shield of the analog input output cable at one point on the signal receiving side However do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI dOv VE NeX4 mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3
543. recommended screwdriver or ane nead an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm i gt 2 0 01 0 09 F 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line 2 3 o Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the 4DA ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 3 1 To Connect to the FX3G FX3u Series PLC B 1 To use an External power supply 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC xx 4DA ADP FX3G FX3U 4DA ADP FX3G FX3u a Series PLC Series PLC El 15V Main unit 15V Main unit Terminal block Terminal block da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Class D Class D grounding grounding 24V DC Caution regarding connection of the power supply line var nex4 MI e Ground the terminal to class D grounded power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Refer to the FX3u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition x JE 3 3 2 To Connect To the FX3uc Series PLC a 3 ADA ADP FX3uc Series PLC FX2nc Series
544. relay holding function Section J i 4 4 M8266 M8276 M8286 M8296 Sets the cancel of the channel 3 output R W D holding function M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets the cancel of the channel 4 output R W holding function NS M8268to M8278 to M8288 to M8298 to Unused Do not use i i 5 M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 i o D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 output setting data R W E D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 output setting data R W Section D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Channel 3 output setting data R W 4 5 ES Special D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Channel 4 output setting data R W S data D8264to D8274 to D8284 to D8294 to i i register D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Unus d Domat use D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status rw Section D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 2 R fr T i oOo gt gt U mn gt 9 og J W iw mn gt gt gt U T gt Ea 33 U gt E gt Y Ss F 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA ADP 4 channel analog Output 4 Programming 4 3 Switching of Output Mode FX3G Series PLC R Read W Write r 3 Device number SAM p Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Switches the output mode of channel 1 R W M8281 M8291 _ Switches the output mode of channel 2 R W Section M8282 M8292 Switches the output mode of ch
545. relays M8280 to M8289 ecial data registers D8280 to D8289 S equence program Special auxiliary relays lm M8290 to M8299 ST ab LU special data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter However in this case do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type C 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices g 3 o If the 4AD ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table e FX3uU FX3UC Series PLC 2 R Read W Write B i Device number Special Description Attribute Ka Rx device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th ence Be 5S M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W bS M8261 M8271 M8281 M8291 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W Section a M8262 M8272 M8282 M8292 Switches the input mode of channel 3 R W 4 3 relay M8263 M8273 M8283 M8293 _ Switches the input mode of channel 4 R W M8264 to M8274 to M8284 to M8294 to Unused Do not use i i x M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 i T gt D8260 D
546. ribute Reference 1st 2nd M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W Section 4 3 Special auxiliary relay M8281 to M8291 to db i M8289 M8299 nused Do not use D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature R measurement data D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature R measurement data Ch at i Section 4 4 D8282 D8292 annel 3 temperature R measurement data D8283 D8293 Channel 4 temperature R measurement data E j D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 R W Special data register Setting range 1 to 4095 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 R W Setting range 1 to 4095 i A me TORR 13 Section 4 5 veraging time for channe D9496 D9296 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAN Averaging time for channel 4 BSAB D9297 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAW D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 6 D8289 D8299 Model code 21 R Section 4 7 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit To switch the temperature unit of the PTW ADP turn the special auxiliary relay ON for Fahrenheit F or OFF for Centigrade C To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays e FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd Selection of temperature unit M8280 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Program Exam
547. ric data type Decimal K T The 1DA BD performs D A conversion on the output setting data digital data into analog data and outputs S the analog data Use the special data registers shown in the following table for the output setting data Special data register mee F Description 1st board 2nd board ES D8260 D8270 Output setting data 5 gt gt U 1 Program Example M8000 Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D100 for the 1st analog board FNC 12 D100 D8260 oy Po Normally ON da Vd1 9 Xx4 ENG 12 Performs D A conversion using the digital data stored in the D101 for the 2nd analog D101 D8270 board H z ray Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be T output as analog data in D100 and D101 s 5 2 gt E gt E 353 TU M1d dVb NeX4 dady G 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 4 6 Error Status 4 6 Error Status 1 Description of setting If an error is detected on 1DA BD the error status data will be stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the error status data Special data register 1st board 2nd board D8268 D8278 Stores the error status data Description Check the ON OFF status
548. ring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 1 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 4 Program Check 5 4 Program Check g 3 o Check the following items for the program 3 1 Cancellation of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off B using the program 33 2 Check of storage devices SE Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by the other parts of the programs se 5 5 Error Status Check If an error occurs in the PT ADP the corresponding bit will turn on Bit Description Bit Description The temperature measurement data of bO channel 1 is outside the specified b5 Averaging time setting error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PT ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PT ADP communication data error E range or disconnection is detected a The temperature measurement data of ES b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused S range or disconnection is detected z b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem
549. riving power 24V DC 20 15 45mA It is necessary to connect a 24V DC power supply to the terminal block 5V DC 15mA Since the internal power is supplied from the FX Series main unit it is not necessary to supply the power Interface driving power FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications a gt z Ss Specifications ES Item o Centigrade C Fahrenheit F a Thermocouple type K or J z neue anal JIS C 1602 1995 E Rated temperature Type K 100 C to 1000 C Type K 148 F to 1832 F o range Type J 100 C to 600 C Type J 148 F to 1112 F ES o Type K 1000 to 10000 Type K 1480 to 18320 M igital outpu Type J 1000 to 6000 Type J 1480 to 11120 5 Type K 0 4 C Type K 0 72 F 2 Resolution zs Type J 0 3 C Type J 0 54 F 23 Total accuracy 0 5 full scale 1 C e FX3u FX3UC Series PLC 200us The data will be updated at every scan time AID conversion e FX3G Series PLC 250us The data will be updated at every scan time ti mg For a detailed description of data update refer to Section2 4 e Type K eType K 10100 O on ees 10000 18320 O a mene characteristics T J eType J A es yP 11300 doo e 41112
550. rminal with insulation sleeve e To directly terminate the end of a stranded single wire cable cannot protrude Twist the end of the stranded cable so that the barbed wires h Do not solder plate the end of the cable To terminate cable end using a rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable cover is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view Manufacturer Model or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact Termination of cable end 9mm 0 35 Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area Caulking tool 2 6mm Phoenix Contact 3 Tool Al 0 5 8WH CRIMPFOX ZA 3 or CRIMPFOX UD 6 e To tighten terminals use a small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not enea be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or shold be an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm 0 01 gt lt 0 09 H 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 3 3 Power Supply Line A 3 3 Power Supply Line 2 Connect the
551. rns in the data table that is held in Device number where the number of K111 the PLC does not meet the following requirement patterns is specified same as the head 1 lt Number of patterns lt 10 device number in the data table The number of points in the data table that is held in the Device number where the number of K121 PLC does not meet the following requirement ateme is Speed 1 lt Number of patterns lt 99 P P The number of points in the data table that is held in the Number of BFM Wide the numberof K122 buffer memory does not meet the following requirement Ponas S i points is specified 1 lt Number of points lt 99 The condition after output at final point in pattern Device number where the condition after K131 specified in the data table that is held in the PLC is not O the final point output point in pattern is or 1 specified The condition after output at final point in pattern Number of BFM where the condition after K132 specified in the data table that is held in the buffer FE FK ya output point in the pattern is specified memory is not 0 or 1 The output update time in the data table that is held in the i A Device number where the output update K151 PLC does not meet the following requirement time is specified 1 lt Output update time lt 32767 P The output update time in the data table that is held in the Number of BFM where the output update K152 buffer memory does not meet the following
552. rom each other x Number of I O 0 points amp points occupied This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC 3 U ai a P 23 U Mld dWy NEXW day J 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers FX3u 4AD PTW ADP FX3u 4AD PTW ADP n th 1st FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Sequence program A D conversion start command Digital value reading w A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 200us 4ch A Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the
553. rounding with heavy electrical systems Make sure to properly wire to the European terminal board in accordance with the following precautions Failure to do so may cause electric shock a short circuit wire breakage or damage to the product The disposal size of the cable end should be 9 mm 0 35 Tightening torque should be between 0 22 to 0 25 Nem Twist the end of strand wire and make sure there are no loose wires Do not solder plate the electric wire ends Do not connect more than the specified number of wires or electric wires of unspecified size Affix the electric wires so that neither the terminal block nor the connected parts are directly stressed 1 10 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 1 Terminal Layout 3 1 Terminal Layout The terminals of the PT ADP are arranged as follows Ww sua UOWWOJ gt FXau 4AD PT ADP OVy INEXY Qvp nexs O POWER Application External power Ground terminal Channel 1 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input Channel 2 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input osse Sooo Channel 3 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Channel 4 platinum resistance thermometer sensor input 00009 OC var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 2s T gt gt o d 1d
554. rque will not g The head be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or should be an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight H Manufacturer Model x Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm gL 0 01 gt lt 0 09 3 U mp gt lt gt 2 53 U a x lt E gt P gt I E G 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output 3 3 Analog Output Line 3 3 Analog Output Line If voltage output is selected i Terminal 1 Shield black 2 Class D grounding If current output is selected 2 Terminal 4 Shield block 1 Use 2 core shielded twisted pair cable for the analog output lines and separate the analog output lines from other power lines or inductive lines 2 Ground the shielded wire at one point on the signal receiving side 3 4 Grounding Grounding should be performed as stated below The grounding resistance should be 1000 or less Independent grounding should be performed for best results When independent grounding is not performed perform shared grounding as shown in the following figure For details refer to User s Manual Hardware Edition of the PLC Series Other Other Other PLC equipment PE equipment PUE equipment Dood D Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condit
555. ry to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 E 60 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 8 Examples of Practical Programs FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 8 3 Example of Program for Table Output Operation Pattern Output Operation TO FNC 12 K1 U0IG81 Channel 1 output pattern FNC 12 Channel 3 output pattern FNC 12 Number of repetitions of output of table MOV fy U0 G85 from channel 1 FNC 12 Number of repetitions of output of table MOV E UNG87 from channel 3 FNC 12 PONI K5000 U0 G98 MOV 5000 Number of head device in data table FNC 12 H0001 uoGgg Data table transfer command MOV B FNC79 ko k99 10100 K1 Readout of data table transfer command FROM Turning on of MO At the completion of transfer X000 FNC 12 H0100 UO G80 Turning on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 of data table X000 M1 me FNC 12 H0101 Uo Gs0 Start table output function channel 1 MOV EJ Srl M1 FNC 12 H0000 Uo G80 oJ sw uowwog gt dvv onexs dvp nexs da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv avr nexs O Start table output function channel 3 vdr nexs Stop table output function Turning off of M1 when output of table from channel 3 is stopped Restart of table output function channel 3 Turning on of M1 when table is output from channel 3 Readout table output completion flag and table output error asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI Completion of table output from cha
556. ry to supply the power Interface driving power FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 3 Performance Specifications 2 3 Performance Specifications 3 T gt Z S Specifications Item L Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Platinum resistance thermometer sensor 2 wire or 3 wire Pt1000 x nouten JIS C 1604 1997 E P g Nickel resistance thermometer sensor 2 wire or 3 wire Ni1000 vo DIN 43760 1987 83 TU Rated temperature Pt1000 50 C to 250 C Pt1000 58 F to 482 F M range Ni1000 40 C to 110 C Ni1000 40 F to 230 F Pt1000 500 to 2500 Pt1000 580 to 4820 5 Digital output EEEEEE EEEEE Ee a Ni1000 400 to 1100 Ni1000 400 to 2300 DE Of Pt1000 Pt1000 ae Resolution 0 1 C 0 2 F Ni1000 Ni1000 0 5 for full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C Total accurac 7 1 0 for full scale when ambient temperature is in the range of 0 to 55 C FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 200us The data will be updated at every scan time AID Conversion e FX3G PLC 250us The data will be updated at every scan time time ane For a detailed description of data update refer to Section2 4 Pt1000 Pt1000 9560 rn 4920 2500 a 4820
557. s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment Common Items 6 1 How to Use the Manuals 6 Manual Introduction Types Contents and Obtainment SW9 UOWWOJ This chapter describes the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC main unit instruction manual and the various manuals of analog products CVi INEXd dvr nexs 6 1 How to Use the Manuals Various analog products can be connected to the FX Series PLC to control the analog inputs and outputs PLC For PLC wiring and installation eHARDWARE MANUAL Supplied This manual is supplied with the product User s Manual Hardware Edition Supplied separately vain URE espegzaenesersy For sequence programs he eProgramming manual Supplied separately da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O var nexa MI Analog products Depending on the product type the Installation Manual or the User s Manual is supplied with the product For a detailed description refer to the separate manual User s Manual Analog Control Edition as described below For installation and parts identification eInstallation Manual L Supplied For a detailed description of the programming method refer to the separate manual Eor installation parts identification use and examples of programs User s Manual Supplied Necessary information is in
558. s User s Manual Hardware Edition 3 3 2 To Connect To The FX3uc Series PLC FX3uc Series PLC Main unit FX2NC Series PLC Input extension block Power Power crossover connector connector Power connector Terminal block L Class D 24V DC 7 grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line For the 24V DC power supply line be sure to use the same power as the FX3uc Series PLC e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the grounding terminal of the PLC main unit J 13 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dQv VE NeX4 ds day Mld QAYY NEX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor 3 4 Selection of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor Select the Pt100 3 wire platinum resistance thermometer sensor This thermometer will not be affected by voltage drop in the wiring area and will ensure accurate measurement 3 5 Wiring of the Platinum Resistance Thermometer Sensor PTW ADP Shield Twisted shielded cable Pt100 Class D grounding
559. s and error statuses If the A D conversion data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e PLC version number Installation Wiring Special devices Programs Error status o 1 PLC Version Number Check Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC The version number should be 1 10 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Checking Installation Confirm that the 2AD BD is attached correctly to the main unit Confirm also that the POW indicator lamp of the 2AD BD is lit correctly For a detailed description of installing refer to FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition o 3 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Analog input line Use 2 core twisted shielded pair cable for the analog input line In addition be sure to separate the analog input line from other power lines or inductive lines 2 Use of current input mode To use the current input mode for a channel be sure to shortcircuit the line between the VL terminal and the terminal Q channel number of the channel If the line is not shortcircuited data will not be converted into correct digital data For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 6 4 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the 2AD BD are being used correctly 1 In
560. s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with following version numbers to create programs for the 4AD ADP 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 1 SWOD5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used programming will not be possible 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later C 5 ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt dvvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD ADP 4 channel analog Input 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the 4AD ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o 3 i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Accel
561. s set Pra K 70 to 70 filter constant a is set cure gain KD is set BONER cee limit is set one ene limit is set PLS Auto tuning is started Auto tuning is started MO SET PID instruction operation m Initial pulse M8002 FNC 79 The mode of FX2n 4AD TC is set TO Ch 2 K type Ch 4 Unused RUN monitor M8000 FNC 78 Data is read from the channel 2 Auto tuning is started X010 RST D502 The PID output is initialized M1 PID operation M1 PE D500 D501 D510 D502 PID instruction FNC 12 Auto tuning operation is Dott K2M10 confirmed Auto tuning ON flag M14 PLF Auto tuning is finished Auto tuning is finished M2 H RST Auto tuning is completed M 26 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Example of Practical Programs for Step Response Method PID Instruction FNC 88 5 3 Program example of auto tuning step response method ray PID operation S Heater operation cycle timer 3 2 PA 2 sec nexa FT The heater operation cycle timer is preset oL dvry gt d PID operation FNC226 T246 D502 Heater output 3 LD lt S Error flag gt M8067 Error occurs M 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition PID Instruction FNC 88 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Error Codes 6 Troubleshooting 6 1 Error Codes Error When an error occurs in the set value of a control parameter or the data ac
562. scale Time required for conversion FX3u FX3ucC Series PLC 200us Data updated every scan time FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time Input characteristics O OO 77 35 92 53 o in 100 0 gt 600 C 1000 emperature 1 1B90 EY LO fi 33 E De EAT Ao pio i nc 48 F tae to 0 gt 1112 F 1480 emperature Insulation method e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 0 points This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC A 40 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications Common Items 4 4 Temperature Sensor Input 4 4 3 FX3u 4AD PNK ADP FX3U 4AD PNK ADP Centigrade C Fahrenheit F Number of input points 4ch Specifications SW9 UOWWOJ UJ Platinum resistance thermometer sensor 2 wire or 3 wire Pt1000 JIS C 1604 1997 mm S input tana Nickel resistance thermometer sensor 2 wire or 3 wire Ni1000 5 E DIN 43760 1987 gt o Pt1000 50 C to 250 C Pt1000 58 F to 482 F Rated temperature range Ni1000 40 C to 110 C Ni1000 40 F to 230 F Pt1000 500 to 2500 Pt1000 580
563. scription bO Wire break in channel 1 b1 Wire break in channel 2 b2 Wire break in channel 3 b3 Wire break in channel 4 b4 to b15 Not used 2 Cautions regarding use of disconnection detection status When any of b0 to b3 is turned on b11 of the error status BFM 29 is turned on e The disconnection detection status is valid only if the output mode BFM 0 is the current output mode mode 2 to 4 In other output modes each corresponding bit of BFM 28 stays off ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 3 Disconnection detection status automatic transfer function b2 of BFM 60 H If the disconnection detection status with automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 63 the data x in BFM 28 can be transferred to the specified data register amp Only when wire break is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3U 4DA to the PLC For this gt reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened TU gt For a detailed description of the status automatic transfer function refer to Subsection 5 4 18 x E 2 53 U a Mld dWy NeXW4 day E 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 10 BFM 29 Error status Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Error data is assigned each bit of BFM 29 1 Assignment to each
564. selected output channel after which the analog data will be output END instruction execution time will be 40us for each selected output channel x number of connected adapters H 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 2 4 Conversion Time 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 1 Conversion and special data register update timing A D and D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers The PLC writes output setting data to special data registers performs D A conversion and updates analog output values FX3U 3A ADP FX3U 3A ADP y 2nd ist FX3G Series PLC yi reh A D D A conversion selected input start command program channel ave nex4 OJ sway uowwog gt Qvr onex4 Digital value writing D A conversion A D conversion 50us for each Digital value reading 90us for each selected output selected input channel A D D A conversion i nd instruction channel start command D A conversion Digital value writing 50us for each i selected output ee Digital value reading channel da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O 2 Conversion during PLC STOP 1 A D conversion Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data regis
565. seneeesaees 1 18 4 4 Temperature Measurement ccooooonnccccnccnnnncnonccnnononnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn crecen n nan nnnn cnn nn nera nnnnc eran nena 1 19 E cures tite acs acetal toe Sa eel a ee Bs ace cast tee Ss eel as ee Os ee cast tes aos heel asd as Joe Frede 1 20 A ate atest ee ae Sa nhs Dee ee et le ee a Ce Sioa 1 21 All MECA a a ek ae eh a 1 24 4 8 Basic Program Example a r eaaa e a e a aa a a aa aaa e e E EE Ae EE 1 25 5 Troubleshooting 1 26 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 22 ccceccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeseneetees 1 26 5 2 Wiring Olea dada 1 26 5 3 Special Device Check AA 1 26 5 4 Program Check nociones a dd di idad 1 27 5 5 Error Status Check scce ie ida i n 1 27 15 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline J 3 1 41 Outlin of FUNCTIONS 22 idos J 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation ccccccccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeneeeeseneeess J 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 2 cccececceceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeenaeeees J 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number 2 cccceecceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenneeesnneees J 5 2 Specifications J 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ccccccccecescceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeceeeeeseeseaees
566. ser s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting PID Instruction FNC 88 6 1 Error Codes MEMO M 30 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Warranty SEU Warranty Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage en
567. serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use a programming tool with the following version number to create FX3U 4DA programs for the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later 4 SWOD5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting the model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting the model select FX3G vdr nexs If a programming tool with the wrong version number is used some instructions and devices cannot be used 4 For Ver 8 13P to 8 24A of GX Developer select FX3UC for the PLC type 2 FX 30P Model name Version number Remarks FX 30P Ver 1 00 or later ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ole dqy a Mld dWy NeXW4 day E 5 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 2 1 Generic Specifications 2 Specifications This chapter describes the general power supply and performance specifications for the FX3u 4DA 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative o 3 i humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceler
568. sion Number Check ccccsesccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeseaneeeeeeaeeeeeeaaeeeeseaaeeeseeaeeeeeseaeeeessneeeetnes H 34 6 2 Wiring CHECKE cualidad ah a eal Ghee sleet del Gree dedo H 34 6 3 Special Device Check torre rie er ree ne ea ERE eae teia apaa e raet H 34 6 4 Program Checky asseirai eea e ce ode col H 35 6 5 Error Status Check 00 7 04 Aw a ah as ee a Ae epa ipari iata H 35 14 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Table of Contents F X3u 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 Outline l 3 41 1 QU INE Of FUNCIONA iii l 3 1 2 Setup Procedure Before Starting Operation cccccceceececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeseeeeeeessneeeessaees l 4 1 3 Connectable PLC and Its Version Number 2 ccccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeceaaeeeeeeneeeeeesseeeeeaeeees 1 5 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number oooooocccononcccconcccnnononnnnnnnncononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns 1 5 2 Specifications 1 6 2 1 Generic Specifications ccccccccccceesssssseeeeeeeeeeceesneeeeeeeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeseesnsaeeeeeeeesseeaseeeeeeessaeeeeeeeess 1 6 2 2 Power Supply Specificati0NS ooccoonnooocccnncconoooononnnnnncnnnnanonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnncnnnnnon renere l 7 2 3 Performance Specifications cccccccceeccceeeeeceeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeceseaeeeescaeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeseieeeeeees l 7 2 4 A D Conversion Time sipasmi a aaa id 1 8 2
569. sion data cannot be read out correctly b7 b8 Data setting error detection If any bits between b10 and b15 are turned on b8 will turn on b9 MENE i The averaging time BFM 2 to 5 is not set correctly Dig Aver ging time setting error Set the averaging time again in the range from 1 to 4095 sss jigs E The digital filter value BFM 6 to 9 is not set correctly sd Digital filter setting error Set the digital filter value again in the range from 0 to 1600 Abrupt change detection The abrupt change detection value BFM 91 to 94 is not set piz value setting error alla 9 Correctly set the value again A A imiterer The lower limit error detection value BFM 71 to 74 or the upper b13 da i limit error detection value BFM 81 to 84 is not set correctly detection value setting error Correctly set the value again b14 b15 Addition data setting error The addition data BFM 61 to 64 is not set correctly 2 Caution regarding error status If the error cause is eliminated the error bit will turn off Do not directly write H0000 in BFM 29 using a sequence program Set the addition data again in the range from 16000 to 16000 3 Error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 If the error status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 129 the data in BFM 29 can be transferred to the specified data register When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred fr
570. sleeve shown in the following CRIMPFOX ZA 3 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact ly figure or CRIMPFOX UD 6 Manufactured by Phoenix Contact D P N gt P es U Termination of cable end To terminate cable end using rod terminal with insulation sleeve If the cable sheath is too thick it may be difficult to insert the cable into the insulation sleeve For this reason select an appropriate cable while referring to the external view 0 35 Insulation sleeve Contact area Crimp area oO 3 3 var nex4 MI Manufacturer Model Caulking tool 0 31 CRIMPFOX ZA 3 2 6mm Phoenix Contact Al 0 5 8WH or CRIMPFOX UD 6 0 1 0 55 3 Tool To tighten terminals use a purchased small sized screwdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the right figure Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or TRE noad an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm straight Manufacturer Model H Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4x2 5 0 4m 2 5mm m i gt 2 ru 0 01 0 09 C gt gt U ap gt lt gt Ea 23 TU 2 x lt E gt gt U FE B 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 3 3 Examples of Power Supply Circuit 3 3 Exampl
571. st Edition 2 2006 B FX3U 4AD is added to B FX3U 4DA is inserted to D Adding and revising the other descriptions 3 2006 C B 8 page 2 2 The Power Supply Specification for the FX3u 4AD regarding the A D conversion circuit drive power Revised from 24V DC 10 80mA to 24VDC 10 90mA 3 2007 D JIS Japanese Industrial Standards for temperature sensors are added e Clerical Error Correction 12 2007 E FX3uc D DSS Series PLC added e FX3U 4AD PTW ADP is inserted to G Clerical Error Correction 11 2008 F FX3G Series PLC added e FX3G 2AD BD is added to D FX3G 1DA BD is added to G FX3u 4AD PNK ADP is added to H Adding and revising the other descriptions 6 2009 G FX3U 3A ADP is added to H Explanation corrections for manufacture s serial number Adding and revising the other descriptions USER S MANUAL Analog Control Edition FX3G FX3u FX3uc SERIES PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLERS s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN HIMEJI WORKS 840 CHIYODA CHO HIMEJI JAPAN MODEL FX3U U ANALOG E MODEL CODE 09R619 JY997D16701G Effective June 2009 MEE Specifications are subject to change without notice
572. t Po Digital value reading channel 2 Conversion during PLC STOP 1 2 A D conversion Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers will be updated D A conversion If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected 1 2 1 A D conversion During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter D A conversion During execution of the END instruction data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D A conversion and then output in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter Conversion speed data update time A D conversion During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of 80us for each selected input channel and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 80us for each selected input channel x number of connected analog adapters D A conversion During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data per of 40us for each
573. t area from the PLC AO The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output area sul Channels are not insulated from each other E Number of I O 0 points 5 points occupied This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC 24 U x K gt Y Y Ss H 7 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 2 4 Conversion Time 2 4 Conversion Time 2 4 1 This section describes the conversion time When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 Conversion and special data register update timing A D and D A conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers The PLC writes output setting data to special data registers performs D A conversion and updates analog output values pace SAADE is ead FX3u FX3uc Series PLC A D conversion A D D A conversion Sequence 80us for each start command program selected input channel Digital value writing i D A conversion A D conversion 40us for each Digital value reading 80us for each selected output selected input channel A D D A conversion channel start command D A conversion EM Digital value writing 40us for each selected outpu
574. t data will be stored in the D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 The averaging time can be set for each channel Set the averaging time in the following special data registers FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Special data register P Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data FX3G Series PLC Special data register Description ist 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data D8286 D8296 Averaging time for channel 3 data D8287 D8297 Averaging time for channel 4 data Cautions regarding averaging time setting If the averaging time is set to 1 the immediate data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register If the averaging time is set to 2 or more the average value will be calculated in accordance with the set averaging time and the average value obtained will be stored in the temperature measurement special data register After turning the PLC power on the average data will be stored in the temperature measurement special data registers D8260 to D8263 D8270 to D8273 D8280 to D8283 and D8290 to D8293 until the number of data items is increased to the set averaging time
575. t for input variation measured value or output variation value antl Jd 2 Setting limit values 52 The upper limit and lower limit can be set for the output value ee 3 Auto tuning function The proportional gain KP integral time Tl and differential time TD can be set automatically for both the limit cycle method and step response method 4 Operation method of the PID instruction Both PID speed type operation and measured value differential type operation are executed FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Measured value PV Target value SV Controlled PID Instruction object Output value MV FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline PID Instruction FNC 88 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference 1 2 Basic Operation Expressions in PID Instruction Reference The PID instruction executes using the speed type or measured value differential type operation expression According to the contents of CSs 1 bit O operation setting ACT specified by in the PID control either for forward operation or backward operation is executed Each value required in the operation is specified by a corresponding parameter or later 1 Basic operation expression for PID control Operation direction ACT PID operation expression CS 1 b0 Ts AMV KP EVn EVn 1 e EVn Dn l Forward operation EVn PVni SV OFF D TD Spy pi KD TD 5
576. t from all the connected boards in the order of 1st board gt 2nd board 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of all 2 channels will be read out in 180us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 180us x number of connected analog boards D 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input PO HERE 3 Wiring Ww sw UOWWOD gt This chapter describes the 2AD BD wiring Observe the following caution to wire the 2AD BD RR PE WIRING PRECAUTIONS DANGER 58 Make sure to cut off all phases of the power supply externally before attempting wiring work Failure to do so may cause electric shock or damages to the product C 3 E WIRING PRECAUTIONS 3 CAUTION Connect the DC power supply wiring to the dedicated terminals described in this manual ES If an AC power supply is connected to a DC input output terminal or DC power supply terminal the PLC will be burnt out a Do not wire vacant terminals externally es Doing so may damage the product 2 Perform class D grounding grounding resistance 100Q or less to the grounding terminal on the main unit 5 Do not use common grounding with heavy electrical systems o When drilling screw holes or wiring make sure cutting or wire debris does not enter the ventilation slits Failu
577. t modes of channels 1 to 4 will be specified Upper lower limit function setting Setting of lower limit values for channels 1 and 2 Setting of lower limit values for channels 3 and 4 Setting of upper limit values for channels 1 and 2 Setting of upper limit values for channels 3 and 4 Corrective function setting by load resistance Setting of load resistance values for channels 1 and 2 Status automatic transfer function setting 1 The initial setting of destination data registers is used and the sequence program for this function is omitted Clearance of upper lower limit function status data Clearance of error status data Clearance of disconnection detection status data Transfer of data that will be output from channels 1 to 4 Output of upper lower limit error status of channels to Y000 to Y007 Disconnection detected in channels 3 and 4 Output to YO10 Error detected Output to Y011 1 The output mode setting setting of corrective function by load characteristics and status automatic transfer function setting are retained in the EEPROM of FX3u 4DA For this reason even if the sequence program is deleted the previously set functions will still be valid 2 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting After the output mode is specified and the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50
578. t of upper lower limit function K32640 Decimal 46 Channel 2 upper limit of upper lower limit function Depending on the K32640 Decimal Subsection 47 Channel 3 upper limit of upper lower limit function mode used K32640 Decimal 5 4 16 x 48 Channel 4 upper limit of upper lower limit function K32640 Decimal 5 gt 49 Not used 450 Corrective function setting by load resistance 4 40000 Hexadeci Subsection Valid only in voltage output mode mal 5 4 17 F 5171 Load resistance value for channel 1 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal Ti gt x lt 4521 Load resistance value for channel 2 Unit 2 K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal Subsection E 53 Load resistance value for channel 3 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal 5 4 17 z o 541 Load resistance value for channel 4 Unit Q K1000 to K30000 K30000 Decimal an 55 to 59 Not used F E i G 460 Status automatic transfer function setting 5 KO Decimal rer era x t GY Error status data BFM 29 automatic transfer F 5 A eee na i Subsection 7 4617 to data register specification Valid if b0 of BFM K200 Decimal 5 4 19 w 60 is set to ON ae Upper lower limit function status data BFM 39 KOTO 7908 BEM gt H igh ies 61 62 and 63 F Subsection 62 1 automatic transfer to data register specification miist have different K201 Decimal 5 4 20 Valid if b1 of BFM 60 is set to ON values x Disconnection detection status data BFM 28 i 5 4 y an F Subsection gt
579. t range eee ae se MQ 4mA to 20mA DC B External load 5002 or less 27 Offset 10V to 5V OmA to 10mA E Gain 9V to 10V and 3 mA to 30 mA or less and BE Gain Offset gt 1V Gain Offset gt 3mA Digital input output With sign 12 bits binary 10 bits binary Resolution 5mV 10Vx1 4000 2014 A 20mAx1 1000 C gt x Q Ambient temperature 0 5 2001A for 40mA full scale amp 0 5 T 3 255 C a OOM or a full stele Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output ig Ambient temperature cio 1 0 4001A for 40mA full scale W 0 55 C 21 0 200MV lle Same accuracy for 4mA to 20mA output D Time required for conversion 2ms x O When the output mode is set to 0 When the output mode is 4 X The dotted line is for mode 2 E U I O characteristics var nexa MI gt 320 Digital input 3 Other Specifications FX2N 5A e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input and output area from the PLC Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog input and output Channels are not insulated from each other aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Co day Mld A 37 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 3 Mixed Analog
580. ta registers will be updated 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4th adapter 4 A D conversion speed data update time During execution of the END instruction the A D converted data of all 4 channels will be read out in 200us and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 200us x number of connected adapters L 8 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 2 5 Temperature Measurement A 2 4 2 When connected to a FX3G PLC 7 E 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing 12 A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC En During execution of END instruction the PLC performs A D conversion reads out the A D converted data and then writes the data in the special data registers gt lt FX3u ae ADP FX3u mi ADP FX3G Series PLC E 0 33 Sequence program A D conversion start a command gt ae TS re Z5 Digital value reading OZ oS A D conversion start END instruction A D command conversion 250 us 4ch Lo Digital value reading 2 A D conversion during PLC stop Even if the PLC is stopped A D conversion will be performed and the special data registers
581. ta type Hexadecimal H Turn on each bit b0 to b8 of BEM 22 to enable the function assigned to each bit refer to the following table Turn off each bit to disable the function of each bit 1 Function assigned to each bit of BFM 22 Bit No Function Description Reference The channel data BFM 10 to 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 111 to 114 and data history BFM 200 to 6999 will be subject to change the addition data BFM 61 to 64 will be Subsection bO Data addition function added to the measurement data 5415 When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the Xs upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 add the addition data BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set If the A D conversion data of a channel is outside the range set b1 Upper lower limit by the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 and the upper limit Subsection detection function error data BFM 81 to 84 the result will be written to BFM 5 4 16 26 as the upper lower limit error status data When channel data BFM 10 to 13 is updated if the difference between the previous value and the new value is Abrupt change Subsection b2 detection function larger than the set abrupt change detection value value set in 54 17 BFM 91 to 94 the result will be written to BFM 27 as the mk abrupt change detection status data The minimum value of channel data written to BEM 10 to 13 Peak value holdin wi
582. tage input is 1 to 5V to the digital output range of O to 10000 1 Input characteristics da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O Voltage input characteristics Digital output value to be changed product specifications Y axis B 4000 qero i 10000 9 i 5 i 2 o i UD i 3 22 D GEPS a I Sac i i Zor i 2000 i p 588 E 3 i i i E i i i E i S 400 PA i X axis 0 4v 5V gt 10V 0 400 1V 2000 5V Analog input Se Digital value actually obtained by A D conversion ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs dqy a MLld V NEX4 day H 29 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Changing of Input output Characteristics FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 5 1 Example Changing of Voltage Input Characteristics 2 Example of program 1 FX3u FX3uc Series PLC For example create the following program to change the digital input data of the 1st analog special adapter M8001 Sets the input mode of channel 1 to the voltage input mode 0 V to 10 V M8002 Error status b6 OFF Error status b7 OFF Sets the averaging time to 1 for the channel 1 data a D50 Program for setting scaling instruction data table Device FNC 12 K400 D51 Number of points Sets the number of points D50 MOV X A D converted digital value 400 D51 i ENG 12 Start coordinate start point data i D52 point Y Digital output v
583. tails 5 4 26 BFM 197 Selection of cyclic data update function function for data history Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H Use this function to update the data history in BFM 200 to 6999 Channel numbers are respectively assigned to the 4 lower bits of BFM 197 Turn each bit on or off to select the data history update function ON If a bit is turned on the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data will be then overwritten in the buffer memories starting from the smallest BFM numbers OFF If a bit is turned off the corresponding data will be stored in the buffer memories in the order of the smallest BFM number to the largest BFM number but when 1 700 points of data are stored data storage will stop 1 Channel number assignment to each bit of BFM 197 Bit No Description History data stored in bO Selection of channel 1 data update function BFM 200 to 1899 1 700 points b1 Selection of channel 2 data update function BFM 1900 to 3599 1 700 points b2 Selection of channel 3 data update function BFM 3600 to 5299 1 700 points b3 Selection of channel 4 data update function BFM 5300 to 6999 1 700 points b4 to b15 Not used 5 4 27 BFM 198 Data history sampling time setting Use this function to set the data history sampling time
584. te Refer to device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Section M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W 43 Special a auxiliary M8261 M8271 M8281 m8291 Switches the thermocouple type RAW Section relay between type K and type J 4 4 M8262 to M8272 to M8282 to M8292 to Unused Do not use i i M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 i D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 SEER temperature measurement R D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature measurement R data Section E 4 5 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 SE 3 temperature measurement R D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 ER temperature measurement R i D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 R W o Setting range 1 to 4095 ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W ee Averaging time for channel 3 4 6 D8266 D8276 D8286 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W Averaging time for channel 4 D8267 D8277 D8287 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W D8268 D8278 D8288 D8298 Error status R W peas D8269 D8279 D8289 D8299 Model code 10 R ar L 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 3 Selection of Temperature Unit e FX3G Series PLC x R Read W Write E gt j Device number m 6 Special device Description Attribute Refer to y 1st 2nd Qs M8280 M8290 Selects the temperat
585. te of special auxiliary relays decides the PNK ADP s temperature unit as shown in the table below To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays FX3U FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Description Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd Selection of temperature unit M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC 1 To switch the temperature unit to 2 To switch the temperature unit to cee C for the 1st adapter Bee F for the 2nd adapter M8001 8000 18260 Normally OFF Normally ON K 19 ANd OVt NEXA dady day lt S oLan rm UOHONSU did 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PNK ADP 4 channel Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 4 Input sensor selection 4 4 Input sensor selection Turn on the Pt1000 type or off the Ni1000 type selection special auxiliary relay to select the Pt1000 or Ni1000 for PNK ADP The input sensor type will be selected for all the channels at the same time To select the input sensor type use the following special auxiliary relays FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay ate Description ist 2nd 3rd
586. ted The temperature measurement data of b1 channel 2 is outside the specified b6 PTW ADP hardware error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b2 channel 3 is outside the specified b7 PTW ADP communication data error range or disconnection is detected The temperature measurement data of b3 channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to 15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error To solve a problem refer to the troubleshooting method described below 1 Temperature measurement out of specified range or disconnection of line b0 to b3 1 Description of error The input temperature measurement value is outside the specified range The temperature measurement value is not in the range between 115 C to 615 C Or the line between PTW ADP and the platinum resistance thermometer sensor is disconnected Remedy Check that the input temperature measurement value is within the specified range Also check the wiring condition 2 EEPROM error b4 1 2 Description of error The adjustment data set in the EEPROM before delivery from our factory cannot be read out properly or is destroyed Remedy Please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor office 3 Averaging time setting error b5 1 2 Description of error The averaging time set for one of the channels channels 1 to 4 is outside the specified range 1 to 4095 Remedy Ch
587. ted to a FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 1 Up to 4 3A ADP units can be connected to the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC Up to 2 1 3A ADP units can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC including the other analog special adapters 2 The 3A ADP receives and outputs voltage current data 3 A D conversion data of each channel will be automatically written to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 4 D A conversion results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3U FX3UC FX3G Series PLC Point and section to be FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 4 maximum FX3G Series PLC 27 maximum including other analog special adapters FESTER Number of connectable units F FX3u FX3UuC FX3G Series PLC To check the connectable Pon PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 J loo 900 log00000000 a i 4th 3rd 2nd 1st Expansion board adapter adapter adapter adapter For a detailed Analog data Wp T description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 Flowmeter Inverter etc pressure sensor etc For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC For a detailed description T fer directi Special devices of special devices refer to ranster direction 1st adapter M D8260 to M D8269 Chapter 4 Switchi tas 2nd adapter M D8270 to M D827
588. ters RO to R32767 Refer to Section 6 3 Transfer of data table The data table is transferred from the PLC main unit to the relevant buffer memory of FX3u 4DA Refer to Section 6 4 Execution of output table _ Setting and execution e Output patterns BFM 81 to 84 of each channel e The numbers of table output execution cycle number BFM 85 to 88 of each channel e Start stop of table output function for each channel command BFM 80 It is possible to write the data table directly in FX3u 4DA using a program TO instruction etc E 38 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 2 Preparation of data table 6 2 Preparation of data table 1 Outline of data table The data table to be prepared in the PLC consists of the following items 1 Number of patterns 1 to 10 patterns 2 Each pattern 3 Number of points in each pattern 1 to 99 points 4 Condition after output at final point in each pattern 5 Points in each pattern 6 Data to be output at each point 7 Output update time at each point 8 Unit of output update time at each point and point to point interpolation method ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt 2 OVy INEXY 2 Preparation of data table Prepare the data table consisting of the following items in the data registers D1000 to D7999 in the PLC main unit or the expansion registers RO t
589. ters will be updated var nex4 MI 2 D A conversion If the output holding function cancellation setting is disabled by the special device the offset value will be output If the output holding function cancellation setting is enabled the output at switching from RUN to STOP will be latched Just after power on however the offset value will be output until operation begins 3 If two or more analog special adapters are connected 1 A D conversion During execution of the END instruction data will be read out from all the connected adapters in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 2 D A conversion During execution of the END instruction data in all the connected adapters will be subject to D A conversion and then output in the order of 1st adapter gt 2nd adapter 4 Conversion speed data update time 1 A D conversion During execution of END instruction the A D converted data of 90 us for each selected input channel and the data read out will be written to the special data registers END instruction execution time will be 90us for each selected input channel x number of connected ddv Ve nexs analog adapters 2 D A conversion Xx During execution of END instruction the output setting digital data per of 50us for each selected output T channel after which the analog data will be output i g END instruction execution time will be 50us for each selected output channel x nu
590. the 2nd analog special adapter However in this case do not include the connector conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type 1 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices 2 3 Oo If the PT ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table FX3u FX3uc Series PLC z R Read W Write B Special Device number ae Description Attribute Reference 323 device 1st 2nd 3rd 4th ee SE i E Special M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 Selects the temperature unit R W ral 36 ella M8261 to M8271 to M8281 to M8291 t rela O Q O 9 d M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use C D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature R z measurement data 2 E D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature R O measurement data Section 3 4 4 D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 CPannel 3 temperature R measurement data D D8263 D8273 D8283 08293 Channel 4 temperature R y measurement data amp Averaging time for channel 1 gt a D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Setting range 1 to 4095 R W p ata Averaging time for channel 2 register g D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Setti
591. the digital filter is set to a value other than 0 the digital filter setting error b11 of BFM 29 will occur f one of the channels uses the digital filter the A D conversion time will be set to 5 ms for all the channels e If the digital filter set value is not in the range from 0 to 1600 the digital filter setting error b11 of BFM 29 will occur dqy a MId TVw NEXd day B 29 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 4 BFM 10 to 13 Channel data Numeric data type Decimal K Use these buffer memories to store the A D converted digital values The channel data BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 and the data update timing will depend on the set averaging time BFM 2 to 5 for channels 1 to 4 or the digital filter setting condition BFM 6 to 9 for channels 1 to 4 as shown in the following table gt For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Subsection 5 4 2 For a detailed description of digital filter functions refer to Subsection 5 4 3 Averaging Digital filter Channel data BFM 10 to 13 update timing time function ae BFM 2 to 5 BFM 6 to 9 Channel data type Update timing haa Immediate data Each time the A D conversion is performed the Diaries 0 The digital filter 0 will be set and the data will be updated will not
592. the step output value before driving the instruction The MV value is not changed by PID instruction during auto tuning When auto tuning is not executed for the limit cycle method the same number of devices as those occupied in the step response method become occupied Relationship Between Parameter Setting and Auto Tuning 1 When auto tuning is not executed parameter setting It is necessary to write the set value of the parameters S3 to CS3 6 using MOV instruction in advance etc before starting the PID operation when auto tuning is not executed When data registers in the latch area are backed up against power failure the setting data is held even after the power of the PLC is turned OFF Therefore writing is not necessary when the power is turned back ON 2 When auto tuning is executed The proportional gain CS3 3 integral time CS3 4 and differential time CS 3 6 are important constants for executing the auto tuning function described later and for optimizing the PID control These constants can be set automatically For a detailed description of auto tuning limit cycle method refer to Section 4 1 For a detailed description of auto tuning step response method refer to Section 4 2 M 6 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 1 Parameter List S3 to S3 28 3 Parameter This chapter describes various parameters of PID instructi
593. ther automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data registers e Be sure to turn on the peak value automatic transfer function b4 of BFM 22 and the peak value holding function b3 of BFM 22 The data written to BFM 125 will be retained in the EEPROM B 43 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a dvp nexs dvvr onexs da Vd1 9 xX4 O dav var nex4 TI var nex4 m da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O dOV VE NEXA mia dqy qj M1d dVb NeX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 3 Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM gt For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 5 4 22 BFM 126 Upper lower error status data automatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K208 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the upper lower limit error status data BFM 26 to the data register specified in BFM 126 When the upper lower limit error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened For a deta
594. there are 3 types of analog control Voltage Current input Voltage Current output and Temperature Sensor input It is important to select products that are optimum for the purpose of use FX3U Series PLC FX3UC Series PLC FX3G Series PLC ere MET ee cegeggeneazese MTSUBISK mm Fxac 40M ag dyz X4 J ddv avr nexs O E Voltage current input EVoltage current E Temperature sensor control type output control type input control type eFX3U 4AD eFX3U 4DA eFX3U 4AD PT ADP eFX3uC 4AD eFX3U 4DA ADP eFX3U 4AD PTW ADP eFX3U 4AD ADP eFX3U 3A ADP eF X3U 4AD PNK ADP F X3U 3A ADP eFX3G 1DA BD eF X3U 4AD TC ADP eFX3G 2AD BD Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection Refer to Subsection var nex4 MI Thermocouple platinum resistance thermometer sensor i Flowmeter pressure sensor etc Inverter etc aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk In addition to the above applications the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC can be used for various purposes ld QYy NEXd mmm day avi nex4 Co dav Mld A 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 1 Introduction 1 1 Outline and Features of Analog Control 1 1 1 Analog input control Input the voltage current signal from a flowmeter pressure sensor etc to the PLC to monitor the co
595. tion block for FX2NC FX3uc 1PS 5V aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI D al e 4 Special function a block for FX3u FX2nc CNV F FX2N and FXON H For a detailed description of special function block connectability and system configuration Y Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition e Use the FX3uc 1PS 5V extension power supply unit if the capacity of the 5V DC power supply unit S incorporated in the FX3UC Series PLC is deteriorated 3 gt Refer to the FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition The analog special function blocks shown in the table below can be connected to the FX3uc Series PLC FX Series Type z Analog special function blocks for the FX3u FX3U 4AD FX3U 4DA E Analog special function blocks for the FX2NC FX2NC 4AD FX2NC 4DA 5 gt U Anal ial function blocks for the FX2N FX2N 8AD FX2N 4AD FX2N 2AD FX2N 4DA FX2N 2DA Se A DES O FX2N 5A FX2N 4AD PT FX2N 4AD TC FX2N 2LC J Analog special function blocks for the FXon FXON 3A gt e E gt Y gt U SE A 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 3 System Configuration Drawings of Analog Products 3 3 FX3G Series PLC 3 3 FX3G Series PLC 3 3 1 Connection of expansion boards special adapters 1 FX3G Series PLC 14 point 24 point type 3 g o c fe 2 o 2 i o n o E 2 y o
596. tions regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 47 Q o 3 5 o 5 gt 3 a OVy INEXY OaVy NeX3 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOv Ve NeX4 mia dav ae M1d dV NeX4 day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 28 BFM 199 Data history resetting stoppage Initial value H0000 Numeric data type Hexadecimal H The data history resetting function and the data history stoppage function are assigned to the bits of BFM 199 1 Data history resetting function b0 to b3 The sampled history data can be reset for each channel Turn on a bit to reset all the history data 1st to 1 700th of the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time When the data reset is complete the corresponding bit will turn off automatically 2 Data history stoppage function b8 to b11 Data sampling can be temporarily stopped for each channel Turn on a bit to temporarily stop sampling history data for the corresponding channel Note that two or more bits can be turned on at a time Turn off the bit to restart sampling of history data 3 Function assignment to each bit of BFM 199 TT BitNo Channel number Description gt bO ch1 b1 ch2 Data history resetting function
597. to 1 immediate data for channel 1 and 5 for channel 2 RST D8268 6 M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI Error status of 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Sets the averaging time to 1 for channel 1 data 5 T gt gt o d Sets the averaging time to 5 for channel 2 data M8000 3 FNC 12 D8260 D100 Stores the current value of the channel 1 MOV temperature measurement data in the D100 5 E l pu FNC 12 Stores the average value of the channel 2 8 cia D101 temperature measurement data in the D101 X Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored in D100 or D101 data register D8260 or D8261 can Es be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction ES gt LU FE 1 25 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Troubleshooting FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 5 1 PLC Version Number Check 5 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the troubleshooting methods and error status If the temperature measurement data is not input or if the proper digital value is not input check the following items e Version number of the PLC Wiring Special devices Programs Error status 5 1 PLC Version Number Check Any versions from Ver 2 2
598. to 4820 Digital output Ni1000 400 to 1100 Ni1000 400 to 2300 Pt1000 Pt1000 Resolution 0 1 C 0 2 F Ni1000 Ni1000 e Ambient temperature 25 C 5 C 0 5 for full scale Il al cua e Ambient temperature 0 C to 55 C 1 0 for full scale da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O Time required for FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 200us Data updated every scan time conversion FX3G Series PLC 250us Data updated every scan time Pt1000 Pt1000 2560 4920 se 2500 4820 i E mM 3 MEJO BEE e 120 1 12 gj iS EN igg S 50C o Pict 58 F 0 i it o i 250 C ui i 482 F avr 1 at AO eee 500 ah Z 580 ia TT 550 LLT 670 F Input characteristics ES Ni1000 Ni1000 amp 1150 A 2390 g 1100 de 2300 i gt E T 3 HEL igs G 40 C o VES 40 F 0 big zs o i 110 C a i 230 F O so Y 400 SL Y 400 w lt N Maa 450 lt N AA 490 e The photocoupler is used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC H ES Insulation method The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area Pas e Channels are not insulated from each other amp Number of I O points 0 points 3 occupied This number of points is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC ES x e E gt T 33 U ES
599. to E Setting not allowed F Channel not used Example Enter HFFOO in BFM to set output mode 0 for channels 1 and 2 and prevent use chan nels 3 and 4 Cautions regarding data setting e Ifa value 1 or 4 is set for a channel the output characteristics of the channel cannot be changed Set the optimum output mode for the analog signal to be output ave nexg OUJ sway uowwog gt dvr onex4 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdar nex4 ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia dqy a Mld TVt NEXd day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 7 Changing Output Characteristic 7 1 Procedure for Changing Output Characteristics 3 Determine the output characteristics to be changed Example Change to output voltage of 1 to 5 V with digital values 0 to 32000 Output mode 0 Output characteristics provided at the time of factory shipment Voltage output value 10 2V 10V f Digital 32000 0 value 32000 Se 10V pp 10 2V Determine the offset data Output characteristics newly provided Voltage output value luceros Digital value 0 32000 Determine the analog output value for the digital output value of 0 Set the analog output value in mV for the voltage output mode and the analog output value in pA for the current output mode Example To set the offs
600. to the FX3U Series PLC 2 Output mode Channels 1 and 2 should be set to mode 0 voltage output 10 V to 10 V Channel 3 should be set to mode 3 current output 4 mA to 20 mA Channel 4 should be set to mode 2 current output 0 mA to 20 mA For FX3u FX3uc Series PLCs Initial pulse M8002 FNC 12 H2300 UNGO Er RUN monitor Transfer H2300 to BFM 0 output modes of channels 1 to 4 ch1 and ch2 Voltage output 10 to 10 V output mode 0 Current output 4 mA to 20 mA output ch3 FNC 15 Data to be output to channel 1 is written in DO Data to be output to channel 2 is written in D1 Data to be output to channel 3 is written in D2 Data to be output to channel 4 is written in D3 K 4 mode 3 decis K50 ch4 Current output 0 mA to 20 mA output mode 2 Store the data to be output to channels 1 to 4 in DO to D3 in the following ranges DO and D1 32000 to 32000 D2 and D3 0 to 32000 DO gt BFM 1 output to channel 1 D1 BFM 2 output to channel 2 D2 gt BFM 3 output to channel 3 D3 gt BFM 4 output to channel 4 After setting the output mode set the data writing time waiting time to 5 seconds or more for each setting The specified output mode will be retained even if power failure occurs After the output mode is specified if the same output mode is used it is not necessary to set the output mode and the waiting time TO K50 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLCs Initi
601. to the option connector 1 is regarded as the 1st unit and the analog expansion board connected to the option connector 2 is regarded as the 2nd unit 1 The second analog expansion board is not available in the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia dqy a Mld TVt NEXd dady D 13 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 Programming 4 2 List of Special Devices 4 2 List of Special Devices If the 2AD BD is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table R Read W Write Device number Special device Description Attribute Reference 1st board 2nd board M8260 M8270 Switches the input mode of channel 1 R W i Section 4 3 G M8261 M8271 Switches the input mode of channel 2 R W Special auxiliary relay M8262 to M8272 to Unused Do not use i i M8269 M8279 i D8260 D8270 Channel 1 input data R i Section 4 4 D8261 D8271 Channel 2 input data R D8262 D8272 Unused Do not use D8263 D8273 D8264 D8274 Averaging time for channel 1 Setting R W i range 1 to 4095 i Special data register A e Section 4 5 D8265 D8275 veraging time for channel 2 Setting R W range 1 to 4095 D8266 D8276 Unused Do not use D8267 D8277 D8268 D8278 Error status R W Section 4 6 D8269 D8279 Model code 3 R Section 4 7 4 3
602. tomatic transfer to data register specification Setting range 0 to 7999 Initial value at delivery K211 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data BFM 29 to the data register specified in BFM 129 When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need any program for reading the data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened For a detailed description of the error status data BFM 29 refer to Subsection 5 4 12 If BFM 129 K211 initial value Specified data register Description D211 Error status data in BFM 29 Cautions regarding error status data automatic transfer to data register specification e Ifa data register is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register e Be sure to turn on the error status data automatic transfer function b8 of BFM 22 e The data written to BFM 129 will be retained in the EEPROM Caution regarding EEPROM writing If data is written to BFM 0 19 21 22 125 to 129 or 198 the data will also be written to the 4AD EEPROM For a detailed description of caution regarding EEPROM writing refer to Subsection 5 4 1 B 46 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory De
603. top of the PLC ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd y OFF Holds the analog data output Cancel output holding just before stop of the PLC a M8288 118236 function setting ON Outputs the offset data at stop 5 of the PLC 1 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC I E To set or cancel the output holding function for a channel create a sequence program as follows ES E 1 To set the output holding function for 5 channel 1 of the 1st analog special adapter U M8001 M8266 Normally OFF a Mld dWy NEXW4 day H 19 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 6 Setting whether or not a channel is used 46 Setting whether or not a channel is used The 3A ADP sets to ON or OFF special auxiliary relays to set whether or not each channel is used This setting can be used to disable or enable the input or output channels of the 3A ADP FX3uU FX3uc Series PLCs Special auxiliary relay Description 1st 2nd 3rd 4th M8267 M8277 M8287 M8297 Sets whether or not input channel 1 is used M8268 M8278 M8288 M8298 Sets whether or not input channel OFF Channel is used 2 is used ON Channel is not used M8269 M8279 M8289 M8299 Aeae or not output channel FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay
604. tput setting data e FX3U FX3UC Series PLC Special auxiliary relay ra Description ist 2nd 3rd 4th D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Output setting data FX3G Series PLC Special data register a Description ist 2nd D8282 D8292 Output setting data Program Example For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8000 FNC 12 Performs D A conversion using the digital D102 D8262 data stored in the D102 of the 1st analog Normally ON special adapter Using the indicator or the sequence program input the digital data to be subject to D A conversion to be output as analog data in D102 H 22 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 9 Averaging Time 4 9 Averaging Time F Setting range 1 to 4095 g Initial value K1 Numeric data type Decimal K B If the averaging time is set for the 3A ADP the average data will be stored as the input data The averaging time can be set for each channel xx Set the averaging time in the following special data registers SE FX3u FX3uc Series PLC 57 Special auxiliary relay ist 2nd 3rd Ath D8264 D8274 D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8265 D8275 D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 data e FX3G Series PLC Description Special data register Description 1st 2nd D8284 D8294 Averaging time for channel 1 data D8285 D8295 Averaging tim
605. tput uly Number of input ch ia output points LS U Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC output range Input resistance 198 7kQ Input resistance 250Q External load 5k to 1MQ Extemal load 5000 or less C Absolute 0 5V 2mA B i etl maximum input 15V 30mA ES ESTE E al 12 bits binary output 3 Resolution 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 51 A 16mAx1 3200 2 5mV 10Vx1 4000 4uA 16mAx1 4000 U 0 5 50mV 0 5 80uA 0 5 50mV 0 5 801A D DEG i for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale x ag e A DD Ale ee 1 0 100mV 1 0 1604A 1 0 100mV 1 0 1604A 5 P A i for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale for 10V full scale for 16mA full scale 3 3 0 to 55 C 3 If the external load E resistance Rs is less than 5kQ the accuracy x D increases as shown in the T following formula 2 Ref cd Increase 100 mV per 1 47x100 o Bora 09 FX3U FX3UCc Series PLC 80us for each selected input channel 40us for each selected output channel Time required Operation synchronized with sequence program for conversion FX3G Series PLC 90us for each selected input channel 50us for each selected output channel Operation synchronized with sequence program aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI 4080 7 o gt 4000 4 7 sup ey 10V ei Cy 2Ombq cec
606. trol Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number 1 3 Connectable PLC and lts Version Number PTW ADP is compatible with the following PLC Compatible PLC Version number Date of production FX3u Series PLC Ver 2 20 or later After May 2005 initial production FX3uc Series PLC Ver 1 30 or later After August 2004 FX3G Series PLC Ver 1 00 or later After June 2008 initial production 1 Version check Special data register D8001 contains information for determining the PLC version gt For a detailed description of the version check refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 2 2 How to look at the manufacturer s serial number The year and month of production of the product can be checked on the nameplate and on the front of the product gt For a detailed description of the How to look at the manufacturer s serial number refer to A Common Items Subsection 5 1 1 1 4 Compatible Programming Tool Version Number Use the programming tool with the following version number to create programs for PTW ADP of the FX3u FX3UC FX3G Series PLC 1 GX Developer Software Version number Remarks GX Developer Ver SW8 P or later i 4 SWOID5C GPPW J Ver 8 13P When selecting a model select FX3U C SWLID5C GPPW E Ver 8 72A or later When selecting a model select FX3G If a programming tool with the wron
607. type Hexadecimal H When any of the output data BFM 1 to 4 becomes less than the lower limit BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status BFM 39 is turned on The upper lower limit function can be set valid or made invalid by writing a 4 digit hexadecimal number HOOOO in BFM 38 HOOOO med Lem Set value Description 0 The upper lower limit function is invalid 1 The upper lower limit function without output limitation is valid 2 The upper lower limit function with output limitation is valid 2 Oiher than above Invalid setting values unchanged values 1 When any value becomes less than the lower limit BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status is turned on The value is output even if it exceeds The value is output even if it is below the lower limit 2 When any value becomes less than the lower limit BMF 41 to 44 or more than the upper limit BFM 45 to 48 the relevant bit of the upper lower limit function status is turned on In this setting analog values more than the upper limit and less than the lower limit are not output Analog value Values more than the upper limit are not output Upper limit S DE erence atone Lower limit penssan poo Sees Values less than the lower limit are not output E 30 FX3G FX3U
608. u Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3uc hardware manual Programming manual FX3uc Series User s Manual Hardware Edition FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programming Manual Basic and Applied Instruction Edition A 56 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input Q jo 3 3 o gt D avvr onexs aVy NeX3 FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series Programmable Controllers User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD 4 channel Analog Input FX3uc 4AD 4 channel Analog Input varnexa MMI agaveoexy O aav avr nexs O ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI gt lt w Foreword a _ _ _ _ _ TU This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3Uu 4AD FX3UC 4AD special extension block 4 channel analog input and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward x it to the end user E 5 53 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent 2 licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Mld dWy NEXW4 dady B 1
609. uc Series PLC Ww sw UOWWOJ gt Special data register wee xx Description SE 1st 2nd 3rd 4th R D8260 D8270 D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8261 D8271 D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8262 D8272 D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8263 D8273 D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data FX3G Series PLC da dv2 9 x4 J dav avr nexs O Special data register me pees ee ee Description 1st 2nd D8280 D8290 Stores the channel 1 temperature measurement data D8281 D8291 Stores the channel 2 temperature measurement data D8282 D8292 Stores the channel 3 temperature measurement data D8283 D8293 Stores the channel 4 temperature measurement data The immediate data or the average data data averaged in accordance with the specified averaging time will be stored in the above data registers as the temperature measurement data For a detailed description of the averaging time refer to Section 4 6 var nex4 MI 1 Caution regarding temperature measurement The special data registers for temperature measurement data are for reading only Do not change rewrite the current data using the sequence program indicator or device monitor of the programming tool 2 Program Example For FX3U FX3UC Series PLC mene FNC 12 D8260 D100 Normally FNC 12 D8261 D101 Fey ose o
610. uction SCL FNC259 e Ifthe input digital value for the D A conversion is out of the data table range specified by scaling instruction SCL FNC259 the FX Series PLC will detect an operation error error code K6706 H 33 Ww sw UOWWOJ gt avvr onexs dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI ddv Vve nexs day Mld ave nex4 Com day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Troubleshooting FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 6 1 PLC Version Number Check 6 Troubleshooting This chapter describes troubleshooting methods and error statuses Refer to the following items when conversion data is not input or output or when correct digital values are not input or output e PLC version number Installation Wiring e Special devices Programs Error status 6 1 PLC Version Number Check Check the version number of the FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The version number should be 2 61 or later Check the version number of the FX3G Series PLC The version number should be 1 20 or later For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 6 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The 3A ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the 3A ADP is on 2 Analog input out
611. uipment are as ee Independent grounding Shared grounding Common grounding Best condition Good condition Not allowed gt For a detailed description of the grounding refer to Section 3 5 3 If the pressure is higher than the atmospheric pressure do not use the 2AD BD The 2AD BD may malfunction FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 2 2 Performance Specifications 2 2 Performance Specifications Specifications Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Item Voltage input Current input Analog input OV to 10V DC 4mA to 20mA DC xx range Input resistance 198 7 kQ Input resistance 250 Q SE gt gt O Absolute input 0 5V 15V 2mA 30mA z maximum Digital output 12 bits binary 11 bits binary C Resolution 2 5mV 10V 4000 8A 16mA 2000 m x lt 0 5 50mV for 10V full scale 0 5 80uA for 16mA full scale when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C when ambient temperature is 25 C 5 C gt Total accuracy O 1 0 100mV for 10V full scale e 1 0 160uA for 16mA full scale 3 when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C when ambient temperature is 0 C to 55 C d A D conversion 180 us The data will be updated at every scan time time For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 ee A x N gt AD OR SSA ae 2040 E U AQOO0P 77 Y 2000 Input 5 a characteristics a 2 ES 5 o E o e
612. uiring satisfactory control results in PID control it is necessary to obtain the optimal value of each constant parameter suitable to the control target This paragraph explains the limit cycle method to obtain the amplitude a and vibration cycle T Ton of the input value and then calculate the proportional gain KP integral time T1 and differential time TD based on the expressions shown in the table below What is the limit cycle method Changes in the input value in two position control in which the output Upper Limit Value ULV and output Lower Limit Value LLV are switched according to the deviation are measured and then three constants in the PID control are obtained Operation characteristics in an example of backward operation During the tw period after the tuning cycle is finished the output value is held at the output Lower Limit Value LLV and then normal PID control is started The value Tw can be obtained by the expression tw 50 Kw 100 x T Ton and the wait setting parameter Kw can be set in the parameter 28 Setting range Kw 50 to 32717 When the abnormal range is specified tw is handled as 0 Output value ULV limit value LLV I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I limit value T I TE T 1 A TA i i gt i i i i i a 4 Time I I 1 l I I I I j I I I I I 1 I I I I f I I I I l I I I ji j I I I I l I I I I I I j I I I I I I I I I I I
613. unication data error The temperature measurement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a TC ADP hardware error b6 or TC ADP communication data error b7 is once detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status in the 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error MOV K4M0 D8288 1 1st for the FX3G PLC L 23 Cvi nNexd A ial U oz DA OL dVb NEX4 day uojongsu did Sm 88 ONS FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 7 Error Status For FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8002 Error status in the 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error RST D8268 6 D8268 7 Initial pulse Error status in the 1st analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 MOV D8288 K4MO MO 000 The temperature measurement data of channel 1 is outside the specified M1 range or disconnection is detected D The temperature m
614. unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter and so on However in this case do not include the highspeed input output special adapter communication special adapter and the CFcard special adapter H 16 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 3A ADP 2 channel analog Input 1 channel analog output 4 2 List of Special Devices FX3G Series PLC Communi cation Connector FX3u 3A special FX3u 3A conversion ADP adapter ADP adapter FX3G Series PLC Ww sua UOWWOJ gt Special devices mn Special auxiliary relays se i M8280 to M8289 gt Ss T Special data registers ES E D8280 to D8289 iS Sequence program Special auxiliary relays M8290 to M8299 Special data registers D8290 to D8299 The analog special adapter nearest to the main unit is counted as the 1st analog special adapter and the next adapter as the 2nd analog special adapter In this case however do not include the connecter conversion adapter and the communication special adapter 1 The second special adapter is not available in the 14 point and 24 point type FX3G PLC main unit 4 2 List of Special Devices da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O If the 3A ADP is connected special devices will be assigned automatically as shown in the following table
615. uration Drawings of Analog Products Common Items 3 3 FX3G Series PLC 2 FX3G Series PLC 40 point 60 point type EN El and A represent the connecting positions For a detailed description of installation refer to the following manual supplied with to your PLC SW9 UOWWOJ Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition Only either A or can be used as 2nd dvv onexs dvr nex4 European terminal Analog input block SD Flowmeter Pressure sensor Signal converter etc _ European terminal block European terminal block Analog output Inverter etc European i terminal FX36 1DA BD E LL block da dv2 9ex4 J ddv avr nexs O Any one can be E E selected l x I a 2nd T e _ European terminal Analog input block Flowmeter Pressure sensor European Signal converter terminal etc EIA block FX3G CNV ADP adapter European terminal block Analog output Inverter etc European terminal block FX3u 4DA ADP 5 E O D fe O o Q oO 2 D 2 eN fo o O D GE wn D O o gY fe Ko S 172 ES eN x O D O E N 2 Q aevaroexa G davvarnexy TI
616. ure unit R W Section 4 3 M M8281 M8291 Switches the thermocouple type R W Section 4 4 m Special auxiliary relay between type K and type J zx M8282 to M8292 to a gt M8289 M8299 Unused Do not use E ge D8280 D8290 Channel 1 temperature measurement R data M D8281 D8291 Channel 2 temperature measurement R data 5 Ga Section 4 5 gt D8282 D8292 annel 3 temperature measurement R m data 582 gs D8283 D8293 Channel 4 temperature measurement R amp data i Averaging time for channel 1 Special data register D949 D9235 Setting range 1 to 4095 A D8285 D8295 Averaging time for channel 2 R W Setting range 1 to 4095 A con E Section 4 6 veraging time for channe D8285 D8296 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAN Averaging time for channel 4 D828 D8297 Setting range 1 to 4095 RAW D8288 D8298 Error status R W Section 4 7 D8289 D8299 Model code 10 R Section 4 8 43 Selection of Temperature Unit The state of special auxiliary relays decides the TC ADP s temperature unit as shown in the table below To switch the temperature unit use the following special auxiliary relays FX3uU FX3uc Series PLC Special auxiliary relay 1st 2nd 3rd 4th Description Selection of temperature unit M8260 M8270 M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade C ON Fahrenheit F FX3G Series PLC Special auxiliary relay Description ist 2nd Selection of temperature unit M8280 M8290 OFF Centigrade
617. urement data b3 of channel 4 is outside the specified b8 to b15 Unused range or disconnection is detected b4 EEPROM error 1 Caution regarding use of error status data If a PT ADP hardware error b6 or PT ADP communication data error b7 is detected it is necessary to clear the error status with a program at the next power on of the PLC For this reason be sure to create the following program For FX3G FX3u FX3uc Series PLC M8000 n D8288 K4MO Normally Error status of 3rd analog special adapter S b6 OFF hardware error Initial pulse Error status of 3rd analog special adapter b7 OFF communication data error MOV K4MO 1 1st for the FX3G PLC D8288 1 21 Ww sw UOWWOD gt dvvr onexs Qvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI x Q T gt o U 1d QYp NEX4 day Mld ave nex4 Com dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 4 6 Error Status For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC M8002 Error status of 1st analog special adapter b6 OFF hardware error RST D8268 6 RST Initial pulse Error status of 1st analog special adapter D8268 7 b7 OFF communication data error 2 Program Example 1 For FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC M8000 MOV D8288 K4MO MO 7000 The te
618. use the upper lower limit error status data be sure to turn on the upper lower limit detection function b1 of BFM 22 e Perform one of the following operations to turn off the previously turned on bit Turn the power off and on Turn on b0 or b1 of BFM 99 to reset the upper lower limit error status Write H0000 in BFM 26 as the upper lower limit error status data Even if an error is detected channel data BFM 10 to 13 will be continuously updated Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer function b5 of BFM 22 If the upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register is specified in BFM 126 the data in BFM 26 can be transferred to the specified data register When the upper lower error is detected data will be automatically transferred from the 4AD to the PLC For this reason the PLC does not need the program for reading data and the scanning time of the PLC can be shortened Represents a numeric value Convenient function Automatic data transfer function setting Transfer to data register specification ON Valid Transfer from buffer memory BFM 126 KO BFM 22 b1 ON BFM 22 b5 ON BFM 26 B 34 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 10 BFM 27 Abrupt change detection status Initial value H0000
619. used to insulate the analog input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply from the analog inputs Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 8 points Taken from either the input or output points of the PLC 1 Adjustment of the offset or gain value will not affect the resolution In the direct indication mode however the offset gain cannot be adjusted 2 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 1V lt Gain Offset 3 The offset and the gain should satisfy the following condition 3mA lt Gain Offset lt 30MA 4 The resolution and the input output characteristics depend on the selected mode 5 If 1 or more channels use the digital filter s the time required for A D conversion will be 5 ms x number of selected channels A 23 SW9 UOWWOJ UJ OVy INEX dvr nexs da dv2 9ex4 J dav avr nexs O var nexa MI aevaroexa G dav var nexy TI dav ve nex4 mk day avi nex4 Co day Mld FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Common Items 4 Comparison of Performance Specifications 4 1 Analog Input 4 1 4 FX2N 4AD FX2N 4AD Specifications Voltage input Current input Number of input points 4ch Analog input range 10V to 10V DC Input resistance 200kQ 20mA to 20mA DC 4mA to 20mA DC Input resistance 250 Q Absolute maximum input
620. ut X000 Clearance of upper lower limit error data X001 Clearance of over scale data YOOO Output of channel 1 lower limit error data Y001 Output of channel 1 upper limit error data Y002 Output of channel 2 lower limit error data Y003 Output of channel 2 upper limit error data Y004 Output of channel 3 lower limit error data Y005 Output of channel 3 upper limit error data Y006 Output of channel 4 lower limit error data Y007 Output of channel 4 upper limit error data Y010 Output of channel 1 over scale lower limit data Y011 Output of channel 1 over scale upper limit data Y012 Output of channel 2 over scale lower limit data Y013 Output of channel 2 over scale upper limit data Output Y014 Output of channel 3 over scale lower limit data YO15 Output of channel 3 over scale upper limit data Y016 Output of channel 4 over scale lower limit data YO17 Output of channel 4 over scale upper limit data Y20 Output of error detection signal Y21 Output of setting error detection signal DO A D converted digital value of channel 1 D1 A D converted digital value of channel 2 D2 A D converted digital value of channel 3 D3 A D converted digital value of channel 4 D100 Upper lower limit error status data automatic transfer to data register D101 Over scale status data automatic transfer to data register D102 Error status data automatic transfer to data register B 55 Q o 3 3 o 5 gt 3 a aVy NeX3 Avy ONEXA da dv2 9 xX4 J ddv
621. ut characteristics change refer to Chapter 6 5 4 15 BFM 61 to 64 Addition data var nex4 MI Setting range 16000 to 16000 Initial value KO Numeric data type Decimal K If the addition data BFM 61 to 64 is set the set data will be added before storing the channel data BFM 10 to 13 peak data BFM 101 to 104 BFM 111 to 114 or data history BFM 200 to 6999 1 Cautions regarding addition data setting e To use the addition data be sure to turn on the data addition function bO of BFM 22 e When setting the lower limit error data BFM 71 to 74 or the upper limit error data BFM 81 to 84 add the addition data BFM 61 to 64 to the error data to be set ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dOV VE NEXA mia dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day B 39 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4AD FX3UC 4AD 4 channel Analog Input 5 Buffer Memory BFM 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 16 BFM 71 to 74 Lower limit error setting BFM 81 to 84 Upper limit error setting Setting range See below Initial value See below Numeric data type Decimal K Set the upper lower limit error data so that the upper lower limit error status BFM 26 can be detected The data setting range depends on the input mode set in BFM 0 The following table shows the data setting range for each input mode Input mode BFM 0 Initial value Set Setting ra
622. ut mode the output status BFM 6 will automatically change to H1111 and the output is restarted It takes approximately 5 seconds to determine the output mode For this reason after changing the output mode be sure to wait for 5 seconds or more and then write the other data e When the output mode is changed the settings in the following buffer memory are initialized according to the new output mode BFM 5 output setting upon PLC stop BFM 10 to 13 offset data 2 BFM 14 to 17 gain data 2 BFM 28 disconnection detection status BFM 32 to 35 output data upon PLC stop 2 BFM 38 upper lower limit function setting BFM 41 to 44 lower limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 45 to 48 upper limit values of upper lower limit function BFM 50 Setting of output corrective function by load resistance 1 FX3u 4DA initializes the corresponding bit to the channel where the user has changed the output mode 2 FX3Uu 4DA initializes the corresponding buffer memory to the channel where the user has changed the ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dv VE NeX4 ae dqy output mode x 3 These settings are initialized only when the output mode is changed from current output mode E mode 2 3 or 4 to voltage output mode mode 0 or 1 5 HFFFF use of no channels cannot be set 53 E 21 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog
623. ut variation and output variation can be checked arbitrarily These parameters can be set in 24 For the operation of upper lower limit alarm output for the input and output values refer to Subsection 3 2 8 Input variation 1 bit 1 OWy NeX4 A dav ANd L 7 i When using the input variation alarm it is necessary to set to ON the following bits and set the values to be a checked O 33 Set item Setting setting range v Operation setting sii ON Used ACT ES 1 bit1 Input variation alarm OFF Not used I Input variation 20 Input variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 ae alarm set value 21 Input variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 23 gs Output variation CS3 1 bit 2 When using the output variation alarm it is necessary to set the following bits to ON and set the values to be checked Set item Setting setting range Operation setting bit2 Output variation alarm beige ee ACT ie bits Output value upper lower limit setting Make sure to set it to OFF Output variation 22 Output variation incremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 alarm set value 23 Output variation decremental alarm set value 0 to 32767 Variation means Previous value Current value 3 Upper and lower limits for output value CS3 1 bit 5 Setting range OFF Setting is not provided ON Setting is provided The upper limit and lower limit of the o
624. utput 6 4 Program Check 4 Output setting data Check that the special device of the selected channel is correctly selected This special device should be selected depending on the connected position and the channel 5 Averaging time Check that the set averaging time is within the specified range The averaging time should be set in the range from 1 to 4095 If the set averaging time is outside the specified range an error occurs 6 Setting whether or not each channel is used Check whether each channel is set correctly Set a channel to OFF when using it Set a channel to ON when not using it ave nexg UU sway uowwog gt avvr onexs 7 Error status Check that no error is detected in the 3A ADP If an error is detected check the details of the error and then check the wiring and programs gt For a detailed description of special devices refer to Chapter 4 6 4 Program Check Check the following items for the program 1 Clearing of error status at power on When the power is turned off and then on again the error status should be cleared b6 and b7 should turn off using the program da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O 2 Check of storage devices Verify that different values are not being stored in the same device by other parts of the program var nex4 MI 3 Device for setting specified digital value Check that different values are not written to this device using other programs 6 5 Error Status Check If
625. utput value work as shown in the graph below The upper limit and lower limit of the output value can moderate the increase of the integral item in the PID control When using the upper limit and lower limit of the output value make sure to set 1 bit 2 is set to OFF Set item Setting setting range o ti tti bit2 Output variation alarm Make sure to set it to OFF eration settin ACT i CS 1 ACT bits Output value upper lower limit setting ON Used pp 9 OFF Not used Output value When the upper limit and lower limit of output value are not set 22 Output value upper limit Ss 23 Output value lower limit limit of output value are set When the upper limit and lower Se These values as not output These values Ka not output Time M 11 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Parameter PID Instruction FNC 88 3 2 Details of Parameters 3 2 3 Input filter a S3 2 Setting range 0 to 99 PID control Proportional operation integral operation and differential operation The input filter a is a software filter to reduce the fluctuation of the measured value PV caused by noise By setting this time constant of the filter according to the control target characteristics and noise level the effect of noise can be reduced Ifthe input filter value is too small the filter effect is small Ifthe input filter value is too large the i
626. value and the digital output value equal to the analog input value will be stored in the corresponding buffer memory BFM 10 to 13 for channels 1 to 4 Analog input value Digital output value ag dvyz 9 X4 J ddv avr nexs O The digital output value will follow the analog input value Set digital filter value var nex4 MI Set digital filter value Analog input value Converted into stabilized digital output value Fluctuation width is less than 10 times of sampling Time The relation between the set value and the corresponding operation is shown in the following table Set value Operation Less than0 Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur b11 of BFM 29 will be set to ON 0 Disables the digital filter function 1 to 1600 Enables the digital filter function 1601 or more Disables the digital filter function A setting error will occur b11 of BFM 29 will be set to ON ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI 1 Application If the measurement signal contains steep spike noise use the digital filter instead of the averaging function The digital filter produces more stabilized data results 2 Cautions regarding digital filter setting dOV VE NEXA ed To use the digital filter function be sure to set the averaging time of the corresponding channel to 1 Averaging time BFM 2 to 4 for channels 1 to 4 If the averaging time is set to a value other than 1 and
627. value just before the occurrence of the error is retained Table output errors BFM 90 and table output error source numbers BFM 91 are not retained They will be cleared when the next data table transfer command is given or the table output start function is executed E 51 avenexa DY sway uowwog gt avvr onexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O vdr nexs ae varoexa G dav varnexs TI dav ve nexa ale dqy a Mld dWy NeXW day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 6 Table Output Function FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 6 6 Examples uses of table output function 6 6 Examples uses of table output function Uses of table output function Inverter frequency setting servo speed control etc 1 Inverter frequency setting The output frequency can be controlled by inputting analog signals e g voltage from 0 to 10 V and current from 4 to 20 mA to inverter frequency setting signals The analog signals and output signals have the following proportional relationship Output frequency Hz 60 30 5 10V Analog signal To control the frequency as shown below where control the analog signal is proportional to the frequency use the table output function Output frequency Hz 60 30 Time Example of table output Output voltage V Point 2 Point 3 10 gt No interpolation S shaped S shaped interpolation interpol
628. values in these buffer memories The maximum number of EEPROM rewritable times is 10 000 When creating a program therefore do not frequently write data in the above buffer memories BFM E 34 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 5 Buffer Memory BFM FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 5 4 Buffer Memory Details 5 4 19 BFM 61 Error status data automatic transfer to data register specification 9 3 3 Setting range 0 to 7999 3 Initial value K200 3 Numeric data type Decimal K Use this function to automatically transfer the error status data BFM 29 to the data register specified in B BFM 61 2 When an error is detected data will be automatically transferred from FX3u 4DA to the PLC For this reason SE the PLC does not need a program for reading data and the scan time of the PLC can be shortened ge gt For a detailed description of the error status BFM 29 refer to Subsection 5 4 12 1 If BFM 61 K200 initial value Specified data register D200 Value of error status BFM 29 Description 2 Cautions regarding error status automatic transfer function setting If a data is already specified for the other automatic transfer functions do not specify the same data register This function is valid by turning on bO of the status automatic transfer function setting BFM 60 da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O When a value out of the above setting range is set b9 of the erro
629. varnexs TI Er gt lt Foreword gt _ __ _ _ _ mm U This manual describes the specifications wiring and operation methods for the FX3U 4DA special extension block 4 channel analog output and should be read and understood before attempting to install or use the unit ak Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward ES it to the end user w 53 U This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual O 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION M1d dWy NeXW4 dady E 1 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output E 2 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3U 4DA 4 channel Analog Output 1 1 Outline of Functions 1 Outline This chapter outlines the FX3U 4DA 1 1 Outline of Functions FX3U 4DA is an analog special function block which is connectable to the FX3G FX3U or FX3UC Series PLC to convert 4 channel digital signal from the PLC to analog signal voltage current 1 Up to 8 units can be connected to the FX3G FX3U FX3UC Series PLC including the other special funct
630. vely The averaging time will be set to 32 for channel 1 and 128 for channel 2 3 S M8000 T MOV D8288 K4MO 59 Normally e ON M8002 Error status of 3rd analog special adapter 3 Fr b6 OFF hardware error Initial g pulse Error status of 3rd analog special DE adapter Oe b7 OFF communication data error amp gt Sets the temperature unit to centigrade C Selects thermocouple type K Sets the averaging time to 32 for channel 1 data Sets the averaging time to 128 for channel 2 data M8002 FNC 12 K32 D8284 E FNC 12 i K128 D8285 ve FNC 12 D8280 D100 a FNC 12 l D8281 D101 Even if the temperature measurement data is not stored to D100 or D101 data registers D8280 or D8281 can be directly used in the arithmetic operation instruction or a PID instruction 41 st for the FX3G PLC Stores the current value of the channel 1 measurement temperature data to D100 Stores the current value of the channel 2 measurement temperature data to D101 L 27 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3U 4AD TC ADP 4 channel Thermocouple Data Input 4 9 Basic Program Example For FX3u FX3UC Series PLC The following program will select thermocouple type K and will store the temperature measurement data C of channels 1 and 2 of the 1st adapter in the D100 and the D101 respectively The averaging time will be set to 32 fo
631. version FX3G Series PLC 250us The data will be u pdated at every scan time tme For a detailed description of data update refer to Section 2 4 2550 gt 4910 7 25009 7 Ci 4820 7 i ilo Input E E isti iin gt characteristics 50 C ol NE 58F 0 Y oi 250 C ry 1482 E BI 500 SM 580 Pain 550 o A 670 Insulation method The photocoupler is used to insulate the ana log input area from the PLC The DC DC converter is used to insulate the power supply line from the analog input area Channels are not insulated from each other Number of I O points occupied 0 points This number is not related to the maximum number of input output points of the PLC Ww sw UOWWOJ gt avvr onexs dvp nexs da dv2 9 x4 J ddv avr nexs O var nex4 MI asvar oexa G dav varnexs TI x wo T gt o U 1d dWy NEX4 day Mld ave nex4 Com dady FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 2 Specifications FX3U 4AD PT ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 2 4 A D Conversion Time 2 4 A D Conversion Time This section describes the A D conversion time 2 4 1 When connected to a FX3u FX3uc PLC 1 A D conversion and special data register update timing A D conversion is performed at every scan time of the PLC During execution
632. version of the FX3U Series are compatible e Check the version number of FX3uc Series The version number should be 1 30 or later Any versions from Ver 1 00 initial version to the latest version of the FX3G Series are compatible For a detailed description of the version number check method refer to Section 1 3 5 2 Wiring Check Check the following items for wiring 1 Power The TC ADP needs driving power Verify that the power supply line is properly connected Also check that the POWER indicator lamp of the TC ADP is on 2 Thermocouple cable Use a non grounded type thermocouple and connect the thermocouple using the compensating lead wire In addition separate the cable of the thermocouple from the other power cables or inductive cables 3 To use thermocouple type J To use thermocouple type J shortcircuit the J type terminals If these terminals are not shortcircuited the temperature measurement data cannot be read out correctly For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 5 3 Special Device Check Check whether the special devices for the TC ADP are correctly used 1 Selection of type K or J Check if the special device for type K J selection is correctly set Turn off the device to select thermocouple type K Turn on the device to select thermocouple type J 2 Temperature measurement Check if the special device of the selected channel is correctly set This special device should be sele
633. version results will be automatically output as the values to the special data register of the FX3G Series PLC Point and section to be 4 2 maximum Number of connectable including other analog expansion i units boards analog special adapters FX3c Series PLC i 2nd 1st aa en ce MITSUBISHI To check the connectable Po PLC model number refer to Section 1 3 FX30 40M Analog data Connected to the option connector 2 For a detailed description of wiring refer to Chapter 3 For a detailed description f ial devices refer t For FX3G Series PLC vvv Chapter 4 iii Output mode Transfer direction For a detailed description switching a ist board M D8260 to M D8269 of a basic program refer to Output setting data Section 4 8 gt 2nd board M D8270 to M D8279 Error status Refer to the system configuration shown in the User s Manual Hardware Edition to check the number of connectable units and to configure the entire system 1 Only 1 analog board can be connected to the FX3G Series PLC 14 point and 24 point type G 3 Ww swe UOWWOD gt Qvr onex4 CVi NEXd varnexa MI agaveoexy O aav avr nexs O dav var nex4 TI da Vd1 9 xX4 dOv VE NeX4 mia day Mld Qyr NeXd Gom day FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 1 Outline FX3G 1DA BD 1 channel analog Output
634. vironment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases a Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design b Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user c When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided d Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced e Relay failure or output contact failure caused by usage beyond the specified Life of contact cycles f Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage g Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi h Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user 2 Onerous repair
635. wdriver whose head is straight and is not widened as shown in the figure to the right Note If the diameter of screwdriver grip is too small tightening torque will not be able to be achieved Use the following recommended screwdriver or an appropriate replacement grip diameter approximately 25mm Type Manufacturer The head should be straight Phoenix Contact SZS 0 4 x 2 5 0 4m gt 2 5mm 0 01 0 09 J 12 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 3 Wiring FX3U 4AD PTW ADP 4 channel Platinum Resistance Thermometer Data Input 3 3 Power Supply Line 3 3 Power Supply Line Connect the 24V DC power supply line of the PTW ADP to the 24 and 24 terminals of the terminal block 3 3 1 To connect to FX3G FX3u Series PLC 1 To use an external power 2 To use the 24V DC power of the PLC FX3G FX3u Series PLC Main unit PTW ADP FX3G FX3u Series PLC 5V Main unit PTW ADP Terminal block Terminal block Class D 24V DC grounding grounding Caution regarding connection of the power supply line e Ground the terminal to a class D grounding power supply line 100Q or less together with the ground terminal of the PLC main unit For the timing of power on off when using an external power supply see the following manual of the PLC to be connected gt Refer to the FX3G Series User s Manual Hardware Edition gt Refer to the FX3u Serie
636. y D 17 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 6 Error Status 2 Program Example M8000 MOV D8268 K4MO Normally ON Detects over scale in channel 1 of the 1st board Detects over scale in channel 2 of the 1st board EEPROM error in 1st board Averaging time setting error in 1st board Hardware error in 1st 2AD BD Communication data error in 1st 2AD BD D 18 FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition 4 Programming FX3G 2AD BD 2 channel analog Input 4 7 Model Code 4 7 Model Code Initial value K3 Numeric data type Decimal K When the 2AD BD is connected model code 3 is stored in the corresponding special data register The following table shows the special data registers that store the model code Special data register 1st board 2nd board D8269 D8279 Model code Description Use the special data registers above to check whether a 2AD BD is connected or not 1 Program Example FNC224 D8269 7007 Checks the model code of the st LD analog board 4 8 Basic Program Example Create the following basic program example to read out analog conversion A D conversion data The following program will set the 1st board to voltage input mode and channel 2 to current input mode and will store the converted A D value of channel 1 data into D100 and that of channel 2 data into D101 M
637. y and performance specifications for the 3A ADP 2 1 Generic Specifications Item Specifications Ambient 0 to 55 C 32 to 131 F when operating temperature 25 to 75 C 13 to 167 F when stored Relative humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation when operating Frequency Acceleration Half amplitude Hz m s mm a os 0035 Tests 10 times in each O i i i Y Vibration y DIN Rail Mounting direction X Y and Z resistance 57 to 150 4 9 axis directions Total gt 101057 0 075 SH min ec Direct Mounti ds 57 to 150 9 8 E Shock resistance 147 m s Acceleration Action time 11ms 3 times by half sine pulse in each direction X Y and Z Noiseresistance Using noise simulator of Noise voltage 1 000Vp p Noise width 1us Rise ins Cycle 30 to 100Hz Dielectric withstand 500 V AC for 1 min voltage Between all terminals and ground terminal Insulation 5MQ or more using 500V DC resistance insulation resistance meter G di Class D grounding grounding resistance 100 Q or less roundin lt Common grounding with a heavy electrical system is not allowed gt s Working Free from corrosive or flammable gas and excessive conductive dusts environment Working altitude lt 2000m 1 The criterion is shown in IEC61131 2 2 If 3A ADP is connected to the FX3uc Series PLC direct installation is not possible 3 Other Other Oth
638. y problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the programmable logic controller range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion FX3G FX3U FX3UC PLC User s Manual Analog Control Edition Revised History SEU Revised History Date Revision Description 7 2005 A Fir

Mitsubishi Electronics Mitsubishi Digital Electronics Home Theater Server MELSEC-F User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents